diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:19:52 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:19:52 -0700 |
| commit | 3d65049ae04209d5865133998410de2dbd0c4b9e (patch) | |
| tree | a4ef400107055fad1cd06d0f183d6d4cd20e968a | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20208-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 213166 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20208-h/20208-h.htm | 7078 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20208-h/images/bsp0001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 49109 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20208-h/images/bsp0002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 37120 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20208-h/images/bsp0003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 17080 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20208.txt | 6965 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20208.zip | bin | 0 -> 108492 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
10 files changed, 14059 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/20208-h.zip b/20208-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..142fb4a --- /dev/null +++ b/20208-h.zip diff --git a/20208-h/20208-h.htm b/20208-h/20208-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1889a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/20208-h/20208-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7078 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Boy Scouts in the Philippines, by Scout Master G. Harvey Ralphson. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */ + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */ + .sidenote {width: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em; margin-left: 1em; + float: right; clear: right; margin-top: 1em; + font-size: smaller; background: #eeeeee; border: dashed 1px;} + + .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + .bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + .bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + .br {border-right: solid 2px;} + .bbox {border: solid 2px;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: + 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;} + + .poem {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;} + .poem br {display: none;} + .poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;} + .poem span.i0 {display: block; margin-left: 0em;} + .poem span.i2 {display: block; margin-left: 2em;} + .poem span.i4 {display: block; margin-left: 4em;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's Boy Scouts in the Philippines, by G. Harvey Ralphson + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Boy Scouts in the Philippines + Or, The Key to the Treaty Box + +Author: G. Harvey Ralphson + +Release Date: December 29, 2006 [EBook #20208] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY SCOUTS IN THE PHILIPPINES *** + + + + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +book was produced from scanned images of public domain +material from the Google Print project.) + + + + + + +</pre> + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="bsp0003" id="bsp0003"></a> +<img src="images/bsp0003.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<h1>Boy Scouts in the Philippines</h1> + +<h3>Or</h3> + +<h2>The Key to the Treaty Box</h2> + +<h2>By Scout Master G. Harvey Ralphson</h2> + +<h3>Author of "Boy Scouts in Mexico; or On Guard with Uncle Sam." "Boy +Scouts In the Canal Zone; or The Plot Against Uncle Sam." "Boy Scouts in +the Northwest; or Fighting Forest Fires."</h3> + + +<h4><span class="smcap">Copyright</span> 1911.<br /> +<span class="smcap">M. A. Donohue & Company.</span><br /> +ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.</h4> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="bsp0001" id="bsp0001"></a> +<img src="images/bsp0001.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + +<!-- Autogenerated TOC. Modify or delete as required. --> +<p> +<a href="#CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I. <span class="smcap">Black Bears and Wolves</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II. <span class="smcap">It's Up to the Boy Scouts</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III. <span class="smcap">The Midnight Visitor</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV. <span class="smcap">The Signals in Grass</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V. <span class="smcap">On the Rim of the China Sea</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI. <span class="smcap">The Low Call of a Wolf</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII. <span class="smcap">A Missing Motor Boat</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII. <span class="smcap">Wigwags from the Beach</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX. <span class="smcap">Two Keys to the Treaty Box</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X. <span class="smcap">A Hot Night in Yokohama</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI. <span class="smcap">A Fairy History of Japan</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII. <span class="smcap">Pat Takes a Big Chance</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII. <span class="smcap">Of the Wild Cat Patrol, Manila</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV. <span class="smcap">The Senator's Son Seeks a Key</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV. <span class="smcap">Signal Lights in the China Sea</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI. <span class="smcap">For Piracy on the High Seas</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII. <span class="smcap">The Flare of a Rocket</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII. <span class="smcap">The Man Behind the Door</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX. <span class="smcap">Boy Scouts Unearth Plot</span></a><br /><br /> +<a href="#Other_Books_by_M_A_DONOHUE_CO">Other Books by M. A. DONOHUE& CO.</a><br /> +</p> +<!-- End Autogenerated TOC. --> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="bsp0002" id="bsp0002"></a> +<img src="images/bsp0002.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<h2>Boy Scouts in the Philippines</h2> + +<h2>OR</h2> + +<h2>The Key to the Treaty Box</h2> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<h3>BLACK BEARS AND WOLVES.</h3> + + +<p>"Wake up—wake up—wake up!"</p> + +<p>Frank Shaw, passenger on the United States army transport <i>Union</i>, San +Francisco to the Philippines, awoke in his cabin to find the freckled +face of Jimmie McGraw grinning above him.</p> + +<p>"What's the use?" he demanded, sleepily and impatiently. "It will be +only another roasting day on a hot deck on an ocean fit to stew fish in. +What's the use of getting up? I'm going to sleep again."</p> + +<p>Frank's intentions were all right, but he did not go to sleep again. As +he turned over and closed his eyes, Jimmie seized him deftly by the +shoulders and dumped him out on the scarlet rug which covered the floor +of the stateroom.</p> + +<p>Frank was seventeen and Jimmie was younger, and so there was a mixture +of legs and arms and vocabulary for a moment, at the end of which Jimmie +broke away and made for the door, which he had thoughtfully left open as +a means of retreat.</p> + +<p>Left thus alone on the tumbled blankets of the bunk from which he had +been hustled, Frank rubbed his eyes, threw a pillow at his tormentor, +and began making his way toward his cozy nest, much to Jimmie's disgust.</p> + +<p>"Aw, come on!" the boy urged, still standing in a safe place by the +doorway. "It's hot enough to melt brass in here, an' the siren's been +shoutin' for half an hour! That means land—the Philippines! Perhaps you +think you're lookin' for Battery Park, in little old New York! Get up +an' look out of the port, over the rollin' sea, to the land of the +little brown men!"</p> + +<p>Looking through the doorway, over the boy's shoulders, Frank smiled +serenely at what he saw and sat waiting for something to happen. Then +Jimmie was propelled headlong into the room, where he landed squarely on +top of the drowsy boy he had dragged out of bed. There was another +scramble for points, and then two boys of about seventeen showed their +faces in the doorway, laughing at the mix-up on the floor.</p> + +<p>The transport's siren broke out again in its long, shrill greeting of +the land which lay above the rim of the sea, and Frank, catapulting +Jimmie against the wall at the back of the bunk, hastened to the open +port and looked out.</p> + +<p>The boys who had entered the cabin so unceremoniously were Ned Nestor +and Jack Bosworth, who were traveling with Frank and Jimmie to the +Philippines, the party being under the direction of Major John Ross, of +the United States Secret Service.</p> + +<p>They had left Panama about the middle of April, and it was now not far +from the first of June, the transport having been delayed for a week at +Honolulu, where she had put in for supplies. The boys had enjoyed the +trip hugely, but were, nevertheless, not displeased at the sight of +land.</p> + +<p>Leave it to the lads themselves, and this was a Boy Scout expedition, +although there was a serious purpose behind it. Ned Nestor and Jimmie +McGraw were members of the Wolf Patrol, Ned being the Patrol Leader, +while Frank Shaw and Jack Bosworth were members of the famous Black Bear +Patrol, both of the city of New York.</p> + +<p>Those who have read the first two books of this series<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> will readily +understand the object of this journey to the Philippines, but for the +information of those who have not read the books it may be well to state +here that while in Mexico and the Canal Zone Ned Nestor had been able to +render valuable services to the United States government.</p> + +<p>At the close of his work in the Secret Service department of the Canal +Zone government, he had been invited to accompany Major Ross to the +Philippines for the purpose of assisting in the uncovering of an alleged +treasonable plot against the peace of the Islands and the continued +supremacy of the United States Government there.</p> + +<p>Knowing little of what there was to be done, or of what was expected of +him, Ned had accepted the invitation to enter the Secret Service, +stipulating only that his chums should be permitted to accompany him to +Uncle Sam's new and somewhat unruly possessions in Asia.</p> + +<p>"I won't go if we can't make a Boy Scout outing of it," he had insisted. +"I shall be glad to be of service to the government, but I want the boys +to have a jolly time, too. There must be plenty of opportunities for +adventure in the Philippines," he had added, thinking of the many odd +customs of the tribes of natives on the twelve hundred islands that +constitute the group.</p> + +<p>"I shall be only too glad to have your friends go," the Major had +replied, "for I understand that they contributed not a little to the +success of your efforts in Mexico and the Canal Zone."</p> + +<p>"I couldn't have done a thing without them," had been Ned's generous +reply, and so it was all arranged.</p> + +<p>However, only three of the boys who had accompanied Ned from New York to +the Canal Zone had been at liberty to go to the Philippines, the others +reluctantly turning back home. The three to go were now assembled in the +cabin occupied by Frank Shaw, looking out to the dim line of land.</p> + +<p>Frank Shaw was the son of the owner and editor of an influential daily +newspaper in New York, Jack Bosworth was the son of a wealthy board of +trade man, and Jimmie McGraw was a Bowery newsboy who had attached +himself to Ned Nestor, his patrol leader, just before the visit to +Mexico and had clung to him like a puppy to a root, as the saying is, +ever since.</p> + +<p>"Come on, boys," Ned said, after an inspection of the ocean through the +port, "let's go on deck. We can see the whole show from there."</p> + +<p>The boys trooped up to the rail and were soon joined by Major Ross. It +was now a little after dawn, and a sunrise breeze was lifting little +ripples on an otherwise motionless sea. Spread out, a couple of miles +away, was the outline of shore the siren was greeting.</p> + +<p>It was a low coast, stretching away to right and left until lost in the +mists of the morning. It looked monotonous and furry with forests, +deserted and still, but in time the presence of man became observable.</p> + +<p>A river wound down out of the trees and broke over a bar set against its +mouth in the sea. On the right bank of the stream a tin roof glistened +in the early sunlight. Wherever there is a tin roof there is +civilization in some degree, though this seemed to be a sleepy one.</p> + +<p>Presently the call of the siren brought forth a boat, not in the little +bay, but up the river a few hundred yards. It moved down to the +coastline with only the canopy, which was of faded scarlet cloth, and +the heads of the rowers in view above the tops of the bushes and +creepers which lined the stream.</p> + +<p>The land smoked under the rising temperature brought on by the climbing +sun, and Jimmie chuckled as he nudged Frank's arm.</p> + +<p>"I see your finish there," he said. "A boy as fat as you are will melt +over there. There's nothin' left of the brown men in the boat but their +heads!"</p> + +<p>Frank looked along the bow-shaped shore, over the palms, now touched +with the red light of a hot morning, and wiped his streaming forehead.</p> + +<p>"This doesn't look good to me!" he said. "I thought we were going to +Manila!"</p> + +<p>"Didn't Ned tell you about it?" asked Jack Bosworth.</p> + +<p>"Not a word."</p> + +<p>"Well, we're going to disembark here; I don't know the name of the +place, or even if it has one, and make our way among some of these +islands in a motor boat. There are a lot of secret service men at Manila +who don't want to mix with us kids!"</p> + +<p>"That's nice!" Jimmie cried. "We won't do a thing to 'em! We'll put it +over 'em good, you see if we don't! I reckon Ned Nestor can give any of +'em half a string an' win out, at that!"</p> + +<p>"Of course he can," Jack replied, "but I'm not kicking at this way of +doing things. I'm thinking of the motor boat, and the long days and +moony nights in the seas among these islands!"</p> + +<p>"It will be great!" Jimmie admitted.</p> + +<p>There was a short pause, and then he added, thoughtfully:</p> + +<p>"Who's goin' to run the boat?"</p> + +<p>"I can run it," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Yes, you can!"</p> + +<p>"I own one," insisted Jack.</p> + +<p>"Yes, an' you hire a man to run it!" Jimmie grinned. "I don't believe +you can run a hand cultivator!"</p> + +<p>"Of course not!" laughed Jack. "But I can operate a motor boat," he +added.</p> + +<p>"You can?" demanded Jimmie, with an exasperating grin. "Then perhaps you +can tell me if the motor boat we're goin' to have has pneumatic brakes?"</p> + +<p>"Sure it has!" laughed Jack. "And it also has a rudder that you can +unship and use as a safety razor. You might open up a barber shop with +it, only the eminent citizens over here don't have any more whiskers +than a squash."</p> + +<p>"You're gettin' dippy!" Jimmie shouted, darting away to the spot where +Ned and the Major were standing.</p> + +<p>Directly a flag broke out over the tin roof and in a short time the boat +was at the transport's side. Full of enthusiasm, and with high hopes for +the immediate future, the boys and the Major descended to the shaky +little craft and the transport steamed off, her rails lined with +soldiers and civilians cheering the boys and wishing them good luck.</p> + +<p>The last voice they heard as the boat crossed the bar and swung into the +sluggish current of the river was that of Captain Helmer, who had made +chums and companions of the boys on the way over.</p> + +<p>"Good hunting!" he cried, through his megaphone, and the marine band +struck up "Home, Sweet Home," "just to give us a cheerful mood on +entering this desolate land!" as Major Ross declared.</p> + +<p>"Do they all think we're goin' huntin'?" asked Jimmie, as the windrows +of salt water heaped up by the transport grew smaller and lapped on the +beach.</p> + +<p>"Sure they do," replied Jack. "Do you think the Major told them we were +going into the jungles to catch a few recruits for the federal prison at +Manila? Nice thing, that would be!"</p> + +<p>"There are just two persons, so far as I know, outside of the Secret +Service headquarters at Washington, who know what we are up to," Major +Ross said. "These are Colonel Hill, of the Canal Zone force, and Captain +Godwin, who is to receive us here."</p> + +<p>The brown oarsmen tugged and strained at the oars, and the waters of the +river came up to the rim of the native boat and crept in and spread +themselves over the rotten floor. The boys were all glad when the prow +touched the little dock at the lone pueblo where Uncle Sam's flag +snapped in a breeze which was coming over the trees, bringing with it a +musty smell of decaying undergrowth.</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin met them at the landing with great hand outstretched. He +was a stout, brown-faced man of fifty, with muscles like iron and a mind +all stuffed and tucked in with the glory of the United States. He was +proud of the service he had passed the greater part of his life in, and +was proud of the record for efficiency he had made. A kindly, bluff, +seasoned old man of war, with soft blue eyes and a hard hand.</p> + +<p>"I should have sent the <i>Manhattan</i> after you," he said, after +introductions had been made, "only there's something the matter with her +batteries."</p> + +<p>"You bet there is!" laughed Jimmie. "The only battery that never gets +under foot or loses a shoe is at the foot of Broadway, in little old New +York!"</p> + +<p>"Hardly at the foot of Broadway," Jack began, but Jimmie interrupted.</p> + +<p>"Never mind," he said, "if we know where it is! You go an' fix up this +motor boat of the name of <i>Manhattan</i>, an' we'll have a ride."</p> + +<p>"The boat will be ready by to-morrow morning," the Captain said, smiling +at the friendly arguments of the two boys. "I presume you have your +instructions?" he added.</p> + +<p>"I have them here," Major Ross said, rather sternly, as he took a sealed +packet from his pocket.</p> + +<p>"When and where are you to open that packet?" asked the Captain.</p> + +<p>"On my arrival at this place," was the dignified reply.</p> + +<p>The Major seemed to be of opinion that the Captain was stepping on his +official rights.</p> + +<p>"Then we'll go up to the house and you look them over while I see what +can be found to celebrate this auspicious event! I don't often have the +pleasure of meeting four happy, husky, hungry boys fresh from the United +States!"</p> + +<p>"You're the goods, all right!" shouted Jimmie. "But how did you guess we +were hungry?"</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin laughed and clapped both his broad palms on his knees.</p> + +<p>"How did I know?" he roared. "That's a good one! As if the boys weren't +always as hungry as black bears!"</p> + +<p>"There are two Black Bears in the party!" Jimmie said.</p> + +<p>"And two Wolves!" Jack added.</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin looked from face to face in smiling wonder, and the boys +thrust all kinds of Boy Scout signs and words at him.</p> + +<p>"I see," the Captain said, then. "I've heard of the Boy Scouts! And now +we'll go up to the house. Never saw a Black Bear or a Wolf that wasn't +hungry!"</p> + +<p>The jolly Captain gave instructions to his servants and they promised, +with many native grimaces and a waste of tribal vocabulary, to have a +satisfying breakfast ready in half an hour. Then Godwin drew Major Ross +and Ned to one side, his good-natured face assuming a grave expression +as he seated them in a private room of the rambling and wobbly old +house.</p> + +<p>"There's something unexpected here," he began, as the Major sat with his +sealed instructions in hand, "and I wish you would open your packet +immediately. To tell you the truth, I'm not a little worried."</p> + +<p>The Major opened the packet and glanced hastily through several typed +sheets. Then his keen eyes grew puzzled and he arose to his feet and +looked out of the window.</p> + +<p>"Something here I don't understand," he said. "Where's this Lieutenant +Rowe?"</p> + +<p>"You are to confer with him here?" asked the Captain, and Major Ross +nodded assent. "Do you know what information he possesses?" continued +the Captain, "what papers he has in his possession?"</p> + +<p>"My instructions say he has important documents."</p> + +<p>"Well," said the Captain, arising to his feet, "now I'll take you to the +place where I last saw Lieutenant Rowe. He came here in the launch +<i>Manhattan</i>, which you are to have use of, last night, and went to bed +without talking much with me. I suspect that he brought the boat from +Manila, though I can't be sure. Anyway, he brought with him only two +young men who did not seem to know much about the boat—Americans."</p> + +<p>"Have you seen him, the Lieutenant, or either of the young men, this +morning?" asked the Major, impatiently. "And why do you say you will +take us to the place where you saw him last? What is wrong here?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know," was the reply. "There are no known hostile elements +here, and yet the little nipa hut where Rowe and his men lodged last +night was found empty this morning—empty and the contents in disorder, +the floor spotted with blood."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<h3>IT'S UP TO THE BOY SCOUTS.</h3> + + +<p>"Do you mean that he has been murdered?" asked the Major, his face, +flushed before, looking gray and old.</p> + +<p>"I don't know," was the reply. "I have tried to look on the bright side +of the thing, but there's a subconscious warning in the back of my brain +somewhere. I've tried to be jolly, this morning, but I've about reached +the end of my store of optimism. It looks to me as if the Lieutenant had +been made way with."</p> + +<p>"This leaves me stranded," the Major said. "I am ordered to act only +after acquiring later information concerning the situation, the same to +be delivered by Lieutenant Rowe. In the absence of that information, +what am I to do? My present orders may be all wrong."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps," Ned suggested, "it may be well to visit this hut and see what +we can discover there. The Lieutenant may have gone out for a morning's +hunt."</p> + +<p>"No such good luck as that," replied the Captain. "Why, the little +furniture the hut contains is broken to bits, and the floor is streaked +with blood! There was a fight in there last night, depend upon it!"</p> + +<p>"And no one heard anything unusual during the night?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Not that I know of."</p> + +<p>"Are the usual residents of this place, so far as you know, all here +this morning?" was the next question.</p> + +<p>"I will ascertain that," said the Captain. "I learned of the strange +happening only a few minutes before your arrival."</p> + +<p>The three left the house, the only one of size there, and proceeded down +a mushy street between huts and thickets until they came to a little +nipa hut set high on poles. They climbed the bamboo stairs and stood on +the swaying porch in front, seeing no one about the place.</p> + +<p>The door stood wide open, and Captain Godwin was first to enter. There +was only one room in the hut, but there were two alcoves opening from +it—narrow little alcoves in which, evidently, bedding and articles not +wanted for immediate use were tucked away during the day.</p> + +<p>As the Captain had stated, the apartment was in disorder. The mosquito +wiring had been torn from the three windows and the door and now lay in +a tangle on the floor. Bamboo chairs had been broken, and there was a +faint odor of whisky in the room. Major Ross glanced casually over the +interior and turned away.</p> + +<p>"I can't stop here now," he said impatiently. "I've got to write a +report of this happening and get it to Manila. I suppose I can depend on +one of your men to deliver a letter for me?" he added, turning to +Captain Godwin.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but it will mean a great delay," replied Godwin. "It will take at +least a week for a man in a swift canoe to go to Manila and return +here."</p> + +<p>"It is unfortunate," grumbled the Major, "but I must, I suppose, endure +the delay. Unless," he continued, a sudden smile coming to his face as +he thought of the cozy club-life he had formerly enjoyed at Manila, +"unless I go with the messenger and receive my instructions verbally."</p> + +<p>"And in the meantime—"</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin was about to protest against being left alone there under +such tragic circumstances, but Ned caught his eyes and stopped him. He +had no idea what the boy had in mind in checking his expression of +regret at the proposed departure of the Major, but he liked the +appearance of the lad and closed his teeth on the words he was about to +say.</p> + +<p>"And in the meantime," he repeated, "we can look about for some traces +of the missing man," the Captain completed the sentence.</p> + +<p>"Exactly," replied the Major. "I regret exceedingly the peril of the +situation so far as Lieutenant Rowe and his companions are concerned, +and sincerely hope that they are all alive and not in serious trouble, +but it appears to me that my place is at Manila at this time, and not +here. We must start in on this remarkable case right, and I must confer +with my superior officers."</p> + +<p>"We can put in the time very well, looking up clues in the vicinity," +said Ned. He wanted to handle the matter in his own way, knowing that +while Major Ross might be an expert in military matters, he did not +possess a particle of the detective instinct so necessary at that time.</p> + +<p>"Yes," the Major replied, with his mind fixed on a few days of lazy +routine at Manila, with all the comforts of civilization within reach of +his hand, "yes, you may be able to accomplish a great deal in the way of +discovering clues, and may even be able to locate the missing men—I +have no idea that they have been murdered, but understand this: You are +not to take any important action without consulting with me."</p> + +<p>"Of course not," Ned replied, chuckling in his sleeves at the thought of +waiting in an emergency for instructions from Manila. "I hope we shall +be able to report good progress upon your return. Shall you go in the +launch?" he added, hoping with all his strength that the officer would +not take the motor boat with him.</p> + +<p>"Certainly," was the quick reply. "I must make progress, you know!"</p> + +<p>Jimmie and Jack, who had followed their chum to the nipa hut, now +entered and stood by the door. Ned saw them winking knowingly at each +other when the Major spoke of going away in the motor boat, and decided +to prod their inclinations a bit.</p> + +<p>"I shall be sorry to have the <i>Manhattan</i> away just now," he said, "for +we might use her to good advantage during your absence. However, there +seems to be no other way."</p> + +<p>Jimmie and Jack slid out of the doorway and down the oscillating bamboo +stairs, and when, an hour later, the Major went to the little dock where +the <i>Manhattan</i> lay he found the two boys working over her, sweating and +complaining in loud voices against the inefficiency of modern motor boat +manufacturers. The Major went on with his preparations for departure, +never doubting that the <i>Manhattan</i> would be ready for him in a few +minutes. At last Jimmie turned an oil-smeared face toward Ned.</p> + +<p>"No use," he exclaimed, "she won't go! The batteries are off and there's +something wrong with the carbureter, and the spark-plug is twisted, and +the delivery is all to the bad. Perhaps Major Ross can bring new parts +down from Manila."</p> + +<p>"Shut up, you dunce!" whispered Jack. "You'll give yourself away!"</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin nudged Ned with an elbow and turned his laughing eyes +away. He saw what the boys were doing, and rather approved of the idea +of journeys among the islands in the motor boat during the Major's +absence.</p> + +<p>"Preposterous!" shouted the Major. "You must get the boat in shape to +make the voyage to Manila! My mission will not endure delay. Captain +Godwin, see what you can do with the boat."</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin knew about as much of the running gear of a motor boat as +did Jimmie, but he at once oiled up his hands and his face and tugged +and pulled at the wheel, tapped on the supply pipes, investigated the +electric appliance, and finally announced that the boat was not in +running order.</p> + +<p>The Major blustered about for a few moments and then set forth on his +mission in the canoe in which the party had landed.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps," he said, at parting, "I may be able to catch a ship at +Banglo, or whatever the name of that little pueblo is on the island to +the west. In that case I shall return inside of ten days."</p> + +<p>And so the Major went away, urging the rowers to greater exertions and +wiping his red face with a red handkerchief. Then a strange thing +happened. Jack drove Jimmie away from the <i>Manhattan</i>, asked Captain +Godwin to bring him a wrench, and in ten minutes, or as soon as the +canoe bearing the disgusted Major was conveniently around a bend, the +boat was sailing about on the river like a bird in the sky.</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin started to censure the boys for the deception they had +practiced on the Major, but his severe words ended in a laugh.</p> + +<p>"You helped!" Jimmie said, accusingly. "You knew what was up! Why didn't +you tell him?"</p> + +<p>"We'll discuss that later," was the smiling reply.</p> + +<p>"Anyway," Jimmie said, "we're rid of the old bluffer, and may be able to +do somethin', if he stays away long enough."</p> + +<p>"You came near spoiling the whole thing," declared Jack, grinning at +Jimmie. "You and your talk about twisted spark-plugs! You'd have been +finding worn places in the spark next! You know about as much of a motor +boat as a pig knows of the hobble skirt. Good thing the Major knows less +about a boat than you do!"</p> + +<p>"Why didn't he use the wire, instead of going off on that long journey?" +asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"The government can't lay cables to all these tiny islands," Captain +Godwin replied, "but we are promised a wireless outfit before the season +closes. Now, if you are ready," he added, turning to Ned, "we'll go back +to the hut and make the examination suggested. I'm afraid there was a +tragedy there last night."</p> + +<p>"Are any of the people missing from the pueblo?" asked Ned, as the boat +came to the dock and they all stepped ashore.</p> + +<p>"Not a man missing," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Have you talked with the man who was sent to the hut to wait on the +Lieutenant and his companions?"</p> + +<p>"Only briefly," was the reply, "but he will be at the hut when we get +there. He is rather above the average native in intelligence, and may be +able to throw some light on the mystery."</p> + +<p>"Is he dependable?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"I think so. He has been with me for a long time, ever since I came to +this out-of-the-way jumping-off place."</p> + +<p>"Well," Ned said, "you go back to the hut, if you will be so kind, and +take the boys with you. I want to look about a little."</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin hesitated, but Jack started away.</p> + +<p>"Let Ned alone," he said. "He'll be giving us the shape of the aeroplane +the Lieutenant and his men sailed away in before long!"</p> + +<p>"He wants to consult the dream book," added Jimmie.</p> + +<p>Frank Shaw, who had been sitting on the bridge deck of the <i>Manhattan</i> +during this conversation, now sprang ashore and followed along after +Ned.</p> + +<p>"You ginks do a lot of talking!" he said. "Run along with the Captain +and I'll take care of Ned."</p> + +<p>Ned and Frank examined the ground around the pier and walked up and down +the river bank for some distance. Save here and there where the natives +drew up their canoes, and where the women came down with the meager +family washing, the bank on the pueblo side was covered with a growth of +bushes except where the little pier ran out in front of the house with +the tin roof.</p> + +<p>Several times Frank saw his companion take out a rule and measure +impressions he found in the soft earth under the thickets, and once he +saw him put something he had picked up in his pocketbook. Knowing well +the methods of his chum, Frank looked on with interest and maintained a +discreet silence.</p> + +<p>When the two reached the hut at last they found Captain Godwin and +Jimmie and Jack sitting on the porch with a government map of the +islands before them.</p> + +<p>"That is just what I was thinking of," Ned said, taking a seat by their +side. "I have yet to learn in what portion of the Philippines we are +stopping."</p> + +<p>"Strange the Major did not inform you as to that," Captain Godwin said.</p> + +<p>"I have an idea that he knew very little of our future movements when we +landed here," Ned said. "His instructions were unopened, remember, +besides being a month or more old."</p> + +<p>"I see," observed the Captain. "Well, you are on a little island of the +Babuyan group, in the Balintang channel, north of the island of Luzon +and southeast of the coast of China and Hong Kong. The transport sailed +due west from Honolulu and to the north of Luzon. The nearest station of +any size is Pata, on Luzon. The Major left without informing you as to +his instructions?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, he was in such haste to get away that he left us here without a +word of information as to what we were to do. Rotten, don't you think?"</p> + +<p>"He was in a hurry to get back to the soft side of military life at +Manila," laughed the Captain. "Well, before you investigate the hut it +may be well for me to give you some idea as to the situation. What I +have to say may give direction to your search of the place."</p> + +<p>"Everything is as when the discovery of the absence of the men was made, +I hope," Ned said.</p> + +<p>"Nothing has been touched," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Then go ahead with your story," Ned replied. "I have come a long way on +speculation, and am anxious for something tangible."</p> + +<p>"Some months ago," the Captain began, "it was discovered that hostile +influences—hostile to the United States Government—were at work among +the outer islands of the Philippine group."</p> + +<p>"I was told that much."</p> + +<p>"Yes; well, investigation—and a crude and indifferent investigation it +was—developed the fact that the tribes on some of the islands were +forming an alliance against Uncle Sam."</p> + +<p>"Now," said Ned, "you have come to the end of my information of the +subject. What comes next?"</p> + +<p>"At first little attention was given to the matter. Some of the native +tribes are always in revolt, though the news of the battles and +skirmishes are kept off the wires. Finally, however, it was learned that +rifles were being received by the tribes belonging to this alliance."</p> + +<p>"Then some nation alleged to be civilized must be at the bottom of the +matter," Ned suggested. "I am anxious for you to come to that point."</p> + +<p>"Well," hesitated the Captain, "I don't know what nation to suspect. It +seems that no one does. I think that is the problem you were brought +here to solve."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me that the wise men at Washington ought to be able to +secure information on the subject," Ned ventured.</p> + +<p>"I half believe that the state department does know a lot about the +matter," the Captain replied, "but does not see fit to act in the +absence of conclusive proof."</p> + +<p>"But how can a mess of Boy Scouts get the truth?" demanded Ned.</p> + +<p>"By being Boy Scouts," was the smiling reply. "The launch was brought +here for your convenience, and you are to go floating about among the +islands north of Luzon, hunting, fishing, gathering specimens, and all +that until you find out what sort of people it is that is doing this +trading with the natives."</p> + +<p>"That was the idea in the Canal Zone," laughed Ned, "but we had little +hunting to do! It was quick action down there."</p> + +<p>"And I hope it will be here," said the Captain. "Military detectives +have been sent down here, but have gone back as ignorant as when they +came, for the seasoned secret service man shows what his occupation is +and betrays himself at the start. Now it is up to you. And you must go +ahead without further instructions, for Lieutenant Rowe, who was to have +posted you as to recent developments, is either dead or a prisoner in +the hands of the plotters!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<h3>THE MIDNIGHT VISITOR.</h3> + + +<p>There was silence on the unsteady porch of the nipa hut for some +moments, and then Frank Shaw asked:</p> + +<p>"Is there any proof at all that any government is trying to arm the +native tribes against the United States?"</p> + +<p>"If there is," the Captain replied, "I do not know of it."</p> + +<p>"It may be simply a commercial conspiracy," said Jack.</p> + +<p>"Go on!" exclaimed Jimmie. "If anybody should ask you about it, it is +the Japs, or the Chinks!"</p> + +<p>"When a play fails in New York, or a man jumps off one of the East River +bridges, if you leave it to Jimmie, the Japs or the Chinks are at the +bottom of it."</p> + +<p>This from Jack, who ducked low to avoid a blow from the newsboy, and +wandered off down the stairs leading to the porch.</p> + +<p>"Yes," the Captain said, "it may be a conspiracy for the acquisition of +wealth. I am not an anarchist, but it is my belief that there are many +corporations in the world who would set the nations at each other's +throats if a profit could be made out of it. But, after all, there is no +need of guessing. You boys are here to find out what is going on, and +you may now do it in your own way."</p> + +<p>Ned left the Captain talking with Frank and Jimmie on the porch and went +into the one room of the hut. Everything was in disorder there, as has +been said, and Ned moved about cautiously in order that nothing might be +disturbed. The Major and Captain Godwin, on their visit of the morning, +had been careful to leave the place just as it had been on the discovery +of the strange happening.</p> + +<p>There was a rough table in the center of the room, and three bamboo +chairs were overturned beside it. It was in front of one of the chairs +that the spots of blood had been found. The light matting which had +covered the floor here was torn and twisted, as if a heavy person had +clung to it and had been dragged away by superior strength.</p> + +<p>Under the edge of this piece of matting Ned found long scratches, as if +shoe heels had slipped there and protruding nails had furrowed the +floor. There were also various oblong papers and numerous match ends. On +the floor, under the rolling back of another chair, were the scattered +remnants of a pack of playing cards. Mixed with these, and lying between +the ace of clubs and the jack of diamonds, were half a dozen pieces of +gilt paper, seemingly torn from an official seal.</p> + +<p>In a corner of one of the alcoves, where it had been thrown or wafted by +the fan which swung from the ceiling at the middle of the room, was a +twisted piece of letter paper burned at one end. It seemed to the boy +that the paper had been twisted in the form of a torch and lighted to +give a more satisfactory illumination than that provided by the matches +which had been burned. It was about half consumed.</p> + +<p>After spending half an hour in the room Ned went back to the porch and +sat down.</p> + +<p>"What about it?" asked Frank.</p> + +<p>"The mud is settling," laughed Ned.</p> + +<p>"But not so the bottom can be seen?" asked Captain Godwin with a smile.</p> + +<p>"Not yet," was the reply. "Perhaps a little talk with the servant who +was sent here with Lieutenant Rowe last night might help to clear the +case," he added.</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin beckoned to a short, squatty Filipino who stood leaning +against a tree not far away and the fellow advanced deferentially up the +bamboo stairs, evidently much in awe of the Americanos.</p> + +<p>"Tag," the Captain said to him, as he stood with one brown hand clinging +to one of the roof supports, "this gentleman wants to ask you a few +questions about what took place last night."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I have been waiting."</p> + +<p>The English was almost perfect, and the fellow's appreciation of the +gravity of the situation was apparent. It was later explained to Ned +that Tag, as he was called by the Captain, had been educated in an +English school at Manila, and had lived in army circles nearly all his +life until he had taken service with Captain Godwin.</p> + +<p>"First," the Captain put in, "I want to say that it was not my fault +that Lieutenant Rowe did not lodge in my own quarters last night. I +proposed that to him, and he said that he had a great deal of work to +do, should be moving about more or less during the night, might be +detained here several weeks, and so preferred to set up a small +establishment of his own. This was the best that could be provided on a +moment's notice."</p> + +<p>"He was served with supper at your house?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Yes; and he was to have <i>desayuno</i> there this morning. That is, he was +to have his first breakfast with me. Later he was to arrange for a table +of his own."</p> + +<p>"You came here with them?" asked Ned of the Filipino.</p> + +<p>"I came on in advance to clear up the place."</p> + +<p>"I see. Who came with you?"</p> + +<p>"Two servants."</p> + +<p>"Did they come into this room—the room occupied by the Lieutenant and +his companions, I mean?"</p> + +<p>"No; they were working the fan from the porch."</p> + +<p>"Are those men in the place to-day?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but they know nothing."</p> + +<p>"But they were to remain here during the night?"</p> + +<p>"They did, but they slept."</p> + +<p>"Drugged?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know. From the complaints they have of their heads I suspect +that they were."</p> + +<p>"And you were to remain here during the night?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, that was the understanding, but I was sent away about midnight."</p> + +<p>"By whom?"</p> + +<p>"By Lieutenant Rowe."</p> + +<p>"Did he give any reason for sending you away?"</p> + +<p>"He said they were going to bed and would not need me."</p> + +<p>"And did they go to bed as soon as you left? You, of course, remained +about the hut for a short time?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I remained about the hut for half an hour. They did not go to +bed."</p> + +<p>"What were they doing?"</p> + +<p>"The Lieutenant was working over papers and the others were playing +cards."</p> + +<p>"Could you hear what they were talking about?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, until the other man came."</p> + +<p>Ned and the others bent forward with new interest. Here was a fresh +feature in the case—a man who had not been referred to before coming +into the hut about midnight.</p> + +<p>"Who," asked Ned, "was this other man?"</p> + +<p>"An Americano."</p> + +<p>"Had you seen him about the place before?"</p> + +<p>"Never. He came in the night and went in the night."</p> + +<p>"Was he in uniform—the uniform of a soldier?"</p> + +<p>"No; he wore citizen's clothes."</p> + +<p>"Which way did he come from?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know," was the surprising reply. "I first saw him when he was +climbing in at the window."</p> + +<p>"Climbing in at the window!" repeated Captain Godwin. "If he climbed in +at the window when the others were awake, he must have been expected!"</p> + +<p>"Yes; I should think so."</p> + +<p>"I can't understand this at all!" exclaimed Captain Godwin, his +good-natured face looking anxious. "Lieutenant Rowe said nothing to me +about expecting company. And why should he conceal the fact from me? +Why, indeed, should a visitor come crawling in at a window at midnight? +Are you sure it wasn't one of the three men I conducted to the hut that +you saw at the window?" he added, turning to the Filipino.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes; I am quite sure it was a fourth man. He mounted to the +window-ledge on a ladder, pushed the screen aside and vaulted over the +sill."</p> + +<p>"And how was he received?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"He was welcomed, and given a chair at the table. But first he went back +to the window and made some sort of a signal to those waiting outside."</p> + +<p>"Oh, so there were others waiting outside!" grated out the Captain. "Why +didn't you come and tell me what was going on? Why didn't you tell me +about this the first thing this morning? That is the trouble with these +made-over men," he continued, half angrily as he looked at Ned. "You can +teach them to do things by rote, but when an emergency comes they are +like putty."</p> + +<p>"I had no instructions to report what I saw at the hut—no orders to +play the spy," answered Tag, indignant that his conduct should be +criticized. "And this morning you gave me no chance to talk with you."</p> + +<p>"How many people were there outside?" demanded the Captain.</p> + +<p>"I don't know," was the reply. "There was the flash of a match to show +that the signals from the hut were understood, and then I went to bed. +There is no accounting for the freaks of these military Americanos, so I +went to my bed. If I sat up at night taking note of the movements of the +soldiers sent here, I should get no rest at all, besides laughing myself +sick over the foolishnesses of them."</p> + +<p>Ned was watching the fellow with interest. He had no doubt that he was +telling the truth about what he had seen there the previous night—that +is, the truth so far as he went in the recital. Still, Ned did not trust +the fellow. He believed that he had seen more than he had described, +even if he had not been a party to what had taken place.</p> + +<p>"What else did you see here last night?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Nothing—nothing at all."</p> + +<p>"And you say you went to bed without satisfying your natural curiosity +as to what you had seen?" roared the Captain. "I don't believe it! Buck +up now, and tell us what was done after the fourth man entered the hut, +or I'll send you to the military prison at Manila."</p> + +<p>"I have told everything," said Tag with a sniffle. "You Americanos +expect us to see everything and know everything! If we are so wise and +capable, why don't you permit us to govern ourselves—send away your +soldiers and let us handle the situation here?"</p> + +<p>The Captain frowned and fumed about for a moment, and Ned was afraid he +would carry out his threat of placing the Filipino under arrest. This, +he believed, would be about the worst move that could be made. Seeking +to conciliate the fellow, he said:</p> + +<p>"There is a great deal of sense in what you say, and I honor you for not +playing the spy on the officers. Captain Godwin will not send you to +prison, I am sure, as we need you here. For instance, we want the story +of the men who worked the fan. Will you talk with them and tell us what +they say?"</p> + +<p>Tag hastened away, somewhat mollified, and Ned turned to the Captain.</p> + +<p>"The fellow knows more than he pretends to," he said. "We must keep him +here, and make him think that we trust him."</p> + +<p>"I can talk with the fanmen myself," grunted the Captain, not very well +pleased with Ned's interference. "I know the lingo."</p> + +<p>"Of course," Ned replied, "but I want to know if Tag will tell us the +same story, as coming from them, that they will tell you under a rigid +cross-examination. In other words, I think Tag, as you call him, will +shape their stories to suit his own purposes."</p> + +<p>"And so you want to set a trap for him? All right! Go ahead, lad, and +make what you can out of this mess. What do you think those visitors +came here for at midnight? And do you believe they are responsible for +the disappearance of Lieutenant Rowe and his companions?"</p> + +<p>"Here comes Tag," Ned said. "Suppose we wait and see what he says of the +experiences of the fanmen."</p> + +<p>The Filipino had in a measure recovered his good humor and was very +respectful to the Captain. He addressed him instead of Ned when he +spoke.</p> + +<p>"They say they were given drink after the fourth man arrived and went to +sleep."</p> + +<p>"That accounts for the strange odor about the place!" cried the Captain. +"Now, what the dickens does it all mean?"</p> + +<p>"Cripes!" broke in Jimmie. "I wish I had as many dollars as times I +don't know. Say, when we goin' to get a ride in the <i>Manhattan</i>? Me for +the rollin' deep whenever you get this thing doped out."</p> + +<p>"It looks like we had work cut out for us here," Ned replied. "Now, +Captain," he went on, "it looks as if the late arrivals last night +drugged the servants and took the secret service men away by main +force."</p> + +<p>"Main force!" roared the Captain. "Why didn't they shoot, or yell, or +make some sort of a row that would have brought help? I've got a lot of +old women here who could have stood off an attacking party! +Force—nothing! Lieutenant Rowe was in the deal. He wanted to disappear +with something he had in his possession, and he worked the abduction +dodge."</p> + +<p>"You may be right," the boy replied, "still, that does not change the +fact that there were enough men about this hut last night to make just +such a capture—with the assistance of a clever man on the inside—a man +pretending to be friendly to the Lieutenant—say, for instance, the +fourth man, or—Tag."</p> + +<p>"How do you know how many men there were about here?" asked the Captain.</p> + +<p>"If you will go to the river bank a few rods south of the pier," was the +reply, "you will discover that a large canoe beached there last night. +You will see that it was drawn far up into the thicket, a task which +must have taxed the strength of at least eight men. Then, about the hut, +and especially under the windows which the visitor entered, there are +plenty of footprints."</p> + +<p>"Footprints!" echoed the Captain. "My people don't wear footgear that +leaves prints!"</p> + +<p>"There were at least three pair of European shoes in the group," Ned +went on, "Now, the next query is this: Why did the visitor enter by the +window? If you will notice the floor in there, below the two front +windows, you will see that the shades were drawn there last night, and +that they were pulled down when this other wreck was produced and torn +from the rollers."</p> + +<p>"I hadn't noticed that," the Captain said.</p> + +<p>"This shows that some one in this hut was expecting a visit, and also +that the visit was to be kept a secret from you. The front windows +overlook your quarters, and the window entered is the one most protected +from view from your place. Now, this precaution may have been taken by +the midnight visitor, coming here as a friend, or by an enemy, for the +purpose of concealing from you what went on here."</p> + +<p>"And that is why the Lieutenant did not sleep under my roof!" said the +Captain. "He was expecting the fellow. Well, what do you say, did the +fellow betray his confidence and bring enemies to carry him away?"</p> + +<p>"His friend might have been followed here," Ned replied. "He might have +been the person sought by the intruders. The next question is: Who was +this visitor?"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<h3>THE SIGNALS IN GRASS.</h3> + + +<p>Captain Godwin turned to the Filipino.</p> + +<p>"Can you give us a description of him?" he asked.</p> + +<p>Tag shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I saw only his figure at the window," he said, "and only for an +instant. He was assisted in, and then after a time, the lights were +lowered, or extinguished entirely."</p> + +<p>"So that is why you didn't loiter around!" cried the Captain, "You +thought they had gone to bed! Are you sure you did not stop and listen +to what was said?"</p> + +<p>"I went to bed at once," was the sullen reply.</p> + +<p>"Did you see them burning matches after the lights were out?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"I could not see the interior of the hut from my bed," replied the +Filipino, with flashing eyes.</p> + +<p>"Well, don't get hot about it," advised the Captain. "Go on, Ned."</p> + +<p>"The matches burned," Ned went on, "were not of the kind kept in stock +here, the sort supplied by you to your guests. There is a difference in +the shape and size of the stick. The paper which I found in the alcove +is part of an official letter dealing with the situation we came here to +look into. It is more than half burned, so little can be learned from +it."</p> + +<p>"It is a wonder they didn't see that it was entirely destroyed," +suggested Frank.</p> + +<p>"It may be," Ned replied, "that they intended to burn the hut after +their departure, and left the paper blazing."</p> + +<p>"That is just about it!" cried the Captain.</p> + +<p>"Then we have to take it for granted that the visitor came here with +instructions for Lieutenant Rowe. Secret instructions, probably. He +either betrayed his trust and assisted in what was done, or was followed +here and attacked with the others. It is a great puzzle. One might ask a +dozen questions without finding an answer. For instance: Why was the +interior of the hut wrecked?"</p> + +<p>"There was a fight, of course," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"And not a shot fired!" cried the Captain. "I don't believe it! A fight +would have led to shooting; shooting would have attracted attention. No, +sir, you will find that Lieutenant Rowe stood in with this game! Why +should official communications follow so closely on his heels? If the +officials who sent him here had anything to add to his orders, they +might have sent a messenger on after him, of course, but there are no +cables here, so he could not have been notified that the man was coming. +Yet it is clear that he expected this man! Oh, he was in it, all right!"</p> + +<p>"Did you size him up for that sort of a man?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"I didn't see much of him," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"You may be right," Ned said, "although I can't see why he came here at +all if he was to make so sensational a disappearance."</p> + +<p>"He wasn't thinking of disappearing when he came here," insisted the +Captain. "Something in the instructions the fourth man brought changed +his line of action. I'll bet my head on it!"</p> + +<p>"Will you kindly talk with the two men who were put to sleep and see if +they confirm the story told by Tag?"</p> + +<p>The Captain agreed to this, and went away to look the men up. He was +back in a few minutes with the report that the men were not to be found.</p> + +<p>"They left just after talking with Tag," he added, looking angrily at +the Filipino.</p> + +<p>"They said nothing to me of going," Tag hastened to say. "They certainly +were not alarmed at what took place under their noses last night."</p> + +<p>"Did they tell you who gave them the drink?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Yes; they said it was the fourth man."</p> + +<p>"And there you are!" the Captain roared. "The fourth man! It is a wonder +he didn't stick a knife into them!"</p> + +<p>"How old were the men with the Lieutenant?" asked Ned. "You said they +were young fellows."</p> + +<p>"Well, they were tall and stoutish, but they looked young. Anywhere from +sixteen to twenty, I should say."</p> + +<p>"Did you notice a locked box in the party?"</p> + +<p>"No; they carried nothing of the kind."</p> + +<p>"They carried some baggage?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; one suitcase. Came away in a hurry, they said. I saw the suitcase +opened, on the table in there, and there was no box."</p> + +<p>Ned took a thin, flat steel key from his pocket and held it out to the +Captain. It was a key of peculiar construction, evidently made of +individual pattern. In fact, it was such a key as usually goes with a +strong cash box, having no duplicate.</p> + +<p>"This was not used to open the suitcase?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Certainly not," was the reply. "Where did you find that?"</p> + +<p>"On the river bank, where the canoe the men came in was beached," was +the reply.</p> + +<p>"Well," observed the Captain, "if we can't learn why they went away, or +how, we may at least be able to discover where they went. Let us be +about it."</p> + +<p>"Unfortunately," Ned replied, "we can't track them through the waters of +the channel. Water shows no footprints!"</p> + +<p>"But they might not have gone away by water," insisted the other. "If +they had, they would have taken the motor boat."</p> + +<p>"They did send a man to get it," Ned replied, "but he couldn't operate +it. That is why it was out of order this morning."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that?"</p> + +<p>"The man used matches there—the same kind of matches used in that +room."</p> + +<p>"Some day," laughed Jimmie, "some guy will come here an' move the +bloomm' place away without bein' caught at it. Why didn't some one wake +up?"</p> + +<p>"I didn't wake up," said the Captain, "but that is no proof that others +did not. You can't trust these Filipinos. The people of the pueblo might +have helped them away."</p> + +<p>"Exactly!" said Ned.</p> + +<p>"If they left in a canoe," Frank suggested, "we may be able to overtake +them."</p> + +<p>"In this maze of islands!" cried the Captain. "I should say not."</p> + +<p>"We'll get a ride anyway," Jimmie observed.</p> + +<p>"If you'll tell Jack to get the <i>Manhattan</i> ready," Ned said, "we'll +take a run out toward that rough-looking bit of land over there toward +the coast of China."</p> + +<p>The boy darted away, and Ned directed the Captain's steps to the spot +where the canoe had been beached. After inspecting the thickets into +which the canoe had been drawn when taken from the water, the two, Ned +in the lead, pressed through the tangle which lined the bank until they +came to a clear space strewn with food tins which had the appearance of +having been opened within a few hours.</p> + +<p>"They waited here," he said, "and ate while they waited. I found the key +here, and not at the point where the boat was pulled from the river. The +box to which it belongs was opened here and new papers put into it. At +least some papers which it had contained were removed. They were burned +one by one in that thicket ahead."</p> + +<p>The Captain looked Ned over from head to foot and laughed.</p> + +<p>"My boy," he said, "you surely know what your eyes were given to you +for. Can you tell by looking at my coat how much money I have in the +pocketbook in the breast pocket?"</p> + +<p>"Hardly," laughed Ned, "but I can tell by looking at that light coat you +have on that you went to sleep in your chair last night, with the lower +part wrinkled up under you! Did you sleep that way all night? Own up, +now!"</p> + +<p>Captain Godwin blushed through his coat of tan like a schoolgirl.</p> + +<p>"To tell you the truth," he said, "I did sleep in my clothes last night. +After I left the Lieutenant at the hut I went home and mixed a little +drink and sat down to read a bit. Well, sir, I fell asleep!"</p> + +<p>"And woke up at daylight?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Pretty close to it," was the reply. "I awoke with a headache, too!"</p> + +<p>"You mixed the drink yourself?" asked the boy.</p> + +<p>"Yes; I always do."</p> + +<p>"But your servant brought the glass?"</p> + +<p>"Why, yes."</p> + +<p>"Have you seen the servant to-day?"</p> + +<p>"Sure! He got my early breakfast. We have two here, you know."</p> + +<p>"Ever sleep like that before?"</p> + +<p>"Not here."</p> + +<p>Ned looked serious. This was something new. The Captain had without +doubt been drugged, but who had contrived the thing?</p> + +<p>"What are you getting at?" demanded Captain Godwin. "You don't think I +was doped, do you?"</p> + +<p>"Looks like it," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Then the whole native population is up to something!" shouted the +Captain. "I've noticed a good deal of whispering lately. Do you think +the tribe on the island has gone over to the insurrectos?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know," Ned said, "but it seems to me that something is going to +happen here before long."</p> + +<p>"I'll watch out," declared the Captain.</p> + +<p>"How long have you been in charge here?" asked the boy.</p> + +<p>"Two years. There's really nothing to do, but Uncle Sam thinks he needs +a man in charge here, and pays pretty well, and so I've remained. It is +a dull life, and I'm not certain that I don't enjoy this little +excitement."</p> + +<p>"Unless I am mistaken," Ned smiled, "it will not be so dull here in the +future. I see trouble for the whole group."</p> + +<p>"About a thousand of these brown leaders will have to be killed off +before there will be any security of life or property here," said the +Captain. "The natives would behave themselves if let alone."</p> + +<p>"Now," Ned said, "you have been insisting all along that Lieutenant Rowe +voluntarily left the island. Let us see about that."</p> + +<p>"I never said he left the island. He may be here still, plotting with +the natives, for all I know."</p> + +<p>"You are mistaken there. Whether voluntarily or not, his party left the +island last night, with the men who came here in the canoe."</p> + +<p>"If he left the island, why didn't he go in the launch he came in? That +would have been the most comfortable mode of leaving the place."</p> + +<p>"Because, as has been said, the man who was sent to seize the motor boat +could not make it move."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that?"</p> + +<p>"The fellow burned matches like those used In the hut as already stated, +and threw the sticks about. He left the electric apparatus out of order, +and that is why it would not run this morning when the Major wanted to +use it."</p> + +<p>"Originally that might have been the reason," laughed the Captain, "but +I have an idea that the boys—"</p> + +<p>"Never mind that!" Ned said. "We are not supposed to know anything about +it. For if the Lieutenant had been a willing member of the party, +wouldn't he have taken charge of the motor boat and got the party away +in it?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, all right! Have your own way about it!" smiled the Captain. "Let us +suppose, solely for the sake of argument, that the Lieutenant was taken +prisoner and went away against his will. Does that prove that he was +taken from the island?"</p> + +<p>"I was coming to that point," Ned replied.</p> + +<p>He then called the attention of the Captain to the food tins which lay +scattered about.</p> + +<p>"These tins," he said, "have been opened within a few hours, which shows +that the intruders rested and waited here and ate their suppers, perhaps +their early breakfasts also. There were several of them, as you will see +by the number of tins opened. The party embarked here. You can see where +the nose of the canoe struck the mud."</p> + +<p>"I reckon, as I remarked before," the Captain said, "that you don't need +any instructions as to the use of your eyes! And the gray matter back of +them seems to know what to do with the material unloaded on it! What +next?"</p> + +<p>"About the Lieutenant going away voluntarily," Ned went on. "Now step +down here to the river bank. You notice the footprints in the mud, close +to the water's edge?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; they are plain enough."</p> + +<p>"And some are heavy and some are light. See that? Some are faint +impressions in the mushy soil, while some sink in a couple of inches. +Some of the deep ones are clean cut, while others show that the foot +wobbled in the track."</p> + +<p>"There must have been a fat man who was unsteady on his feet," observed +the Captain.</p> + +<p>"Yes, there was a heavy man, but his tracks are cut sharply in the mud. +His step was quick and firm. Now these other deep tracks show a +staggering foot. What does that mean?"</p> + +<p>"Blessed if I know!" cried the Captain.</p> + +<p>"It means, to my mind, that the men who made these deep, wobbly tracks +carried a burden into the boat. What do you think that burden was?"</p> + +<p>"You will be telling me next that it was a wounded man—perhaps the +Lieutenant himself," said the Captain, his face alive with interest.</p> + +<p>"It was a wounded man, all right," Ned replied, "but we have no means of +knowing whether it was the Lieutenant. See, there are drops of blood +close to the margin of the river!"</p> + +<p>"You're a genius!" roared the Captain.</p> + +<p>"Just observation," Ned said modestly. "There is nothing unusual about +the faculty of seeing things. We all draw the same conclusions after the +facts are pointed out. So, you see, there was a struggle in the hut, +after all, and some one was cut with a knife, for there were no shots +fired. As there would have been no fight if the Lieutenant had been in +the game, as you express it, the inference is that he was taken +prisoner."</p> + +<p>"Granted—for the sake of argument!"</p> + +<p>"Now," Ned continued, "you have seen Indian service, I understand, so +you will no doubt recognize these signs in grass. Read them!"</p> + +<p>"Sure I can read them," exclaimed the Captain, "but I never would have +discovered them. Indian signals in grass, eh? Now, who do you think put +them there?"</p> + +<p>At the edge of the thicket were two bunches of grass, each tied tightly +at a point near the top. On one the grass stood straight up beyond the +band. On the other the top was bent toward the river.</p> + +<p>"'Here is the trail,'" Captain Godwin read, pointing to the first one, +"and the trail leads this way," he added, pointing to the other. "They +left by the river!"</p> + +<p>"There is one more," Ned said. "Read this," pointing to three bunches of +grass, each tied near the top and standing in a row.</p> + +<p>"That is a warning. It says, 'Be careful,'" read the other. "What does +it mean?"</p> + +<p>"Just what it says. It also means that there is a Boy Scout with the +party!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<h3>ON THE RIM OF THE CHINA SEA.</h3> + + +<p>The rain fell heavily, persistently, provokingly. Now and then came a +crash of thunder which seemed to shake the earth; vivid lightning cut +zigzags in the murky sky. The little islands of the Babuyan group in the +Balintang channel seemed to rock in the arms of the storm.</p> + +<p>The motor boat <i>Manhattan</i> lay tossing and drawing at her anchor in an +obscure bay of tiny dimensions on the west coast of a small island which +is a member of the Babuyan group and faces the China Sea. Ned, Frank, +Jack and Jimmie sat sweating in the little cabin, which was in the back +of the boat, the engine being located toward the center. The day was +dark because of the clouds and the downpour of the rain, and the heavy +foliage of the trees which came down to the very lip of the bay made it +dim in the little cabin, but there was no artificial light.</p> + +<p>The boys were waiting for the storm to subside. They knew the moods of +the weather man of the Philippines well enough to understand that the +rain was likely to continue for several days, it being the opening of +the rainy season, but they preferred not to face the initial tempest. In +a few hours comparative quiet would come, and there would be only the +steady fall of rain.</p> + +<p>Since leaving the little island where the transport had landed them, +they had visited three little dots of land in the channel, and on each +one they had found signals in grass pointing to the north and west.</p> + +<p>"That Boy Scout, whoever he is," Jimmie said, as they discussed the +signals in the almost stifling atmosphere of the cabin, "is strictly +next to his job! He's showing the way, all right!"</p> + +<p>"I'll bet you a can of corn against a bite of canned pie that he's from +New York," Jack Bosworth observed.</p> + +<p>"Speaking of pie," Frank cut in, "there's a little restaurant on Beekman +street where they serve hot pies at noon for a dime. You go in there at +twelve and get a peach pie, and an apple pie, and a berry pie, hot out +of the oven, and buy a piece of cheese, and go back to the office and +consume your frugal repast. What?"</p> + +<p>"If you talk about hot pie here," Jack said, threateningly, "I'll tip +you out of the boat. Pie! When I go back to little old New York I'm +going to have mother meet me at the pier with a pie under each arm!"</p> + +<p>"I won't take your bet, Jack," Jimmie said. "I'd lose. I know he's from +New York, an' he belongs to the Wolf Patrol."</p> + +<p>"I thought you left your dream book at home!" cried Frank.</p> + +<p>"There was a boy named Pat Mack," Jimmie went on, "who enlisted and went +to the Philippines a year ago. He was sixteen when he enlisted, but +looked older, and so they let him in, he bein' a husky chap. He belonged +to the Wolf Patrol, an' was a chum of Ned's. You remember him, Ned?"</p> + +<p>"Pat Mack?" repeated Ned. "Who would ever forget him? Why, that +red-headed Irishman is not a person to be forgotten, if once known. Why +do you think he is with the party we are following, Jimmie?"</p> + +<p>"Because Captain Godwin said one of the young men with the Lieutenant +has hair so red that he didn't need a light to go to bed by. That's Pat +Mack! And if he is with that bunch there'll be something doing before +long. That boy will fight a rattlesnake an' give him the first bite."</p> + +<p>"He is all to the good as a pugilist," Ned said. "That was the trouble +with him in New York. He was always in some kind of a mess because of +his quick temper and his ready fists. I hope it is Pat who is leaving +these signs."</p> + +<p>"You bet it is," Jimmie insisted. "Say, look here! Who's rockin' this +boat?"</p> + +<p>The boys were all sitting quietly in their seats, but the <i>Manhattan</i> +was rocking in a manner not accounted for by the storm. Motioning the +others to remain where they were, Ned arose and passed out of the cabin.</p> + +<p>The boat was still swaying violently, and Ned could at first see no good +reason for it, but presently a commotion in the water, a commotion not +caused by the wind and rain, caught his eyes and he advanced to the +stern. After looking into the water for a moment he went to the cabin +and beckoned to the boys.</p> + +<p>"If you don't mind getting soaking wet," he said, "come out here."</p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked Frank, lazily.</p> + +<p>"Is it anything good to eat?" asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>Jack made no response but bounded forward and looked over the edge of +the boat into the bay. What he saw was a great head with protruding jaws +and a long, dark back covered with enormous half defined scales, like +armor plate.</p> + +<p>"What is it?" he asked, drawing a revolver from his pocket.</p> + +<p>Ned pushed his hand back and the weapon was returned to a pocket.</p> + +<p>"Don't shoot," he said. "We are not yet ready to announce our presence +here."</p> + +<p>"But what is that thing?" demanded Jack. "Is he trying to eat up the +boat?"</p> + +<p>"That is a crocodile," Ned replied. "Corker, eh?"</p> + +<p>"Will he bite?" asked Jack, reaching for a boathook.</p> + +<p>"Jump in and see," laughed Ned. "They live on fish, but eat dogs and men +when they feel just right. The rivers and lakes of the Philippines swarm +with them."</p> + +<p>Jimmie and Frank now came out of the cabin and looked down at the +crocodile.</p> + +<p>"He's scratching his old nose on the boat!" Jimmie said. "That's what +makes it rock so!"</p> + +<p>"He thinks it's a sandwich, with meat inside," laughed Frank. "Suppose +we give him a poke in the ribs?"</p> + +<p>He reached forward with the boathook, which he took from Jack's hand, +and jabbed at the creature, which did not appear to mind the presence of +the boys at all, but continued his nosing of the boat.</p> + +<p>"His hide is as tough as the crust of the pies Bridget used to make!" +the boy said, jabbing harder than before and throwing his weight on the +handle of the hook.</p> + +<p>Just then the boat shunted to one side, the crocodile swished away, and +Frank fell headlong into the agitated waters of the little bay. Jack saw +him going and tried to catch him, but did not succeed.</p> + +<p>The crocodile had turned away from the boat when Frank struck the water +with a great splash, but he turned back and surveyed the submerged +figure with some degree of interest.</p> + +<p>Frank of course went down under the surface as he fell, and remained +there for a second. When his body rose toward the surface the crocodile +approached him. Jimmie and Jack drew their revolvers.</p> + +<p>"Don't shoot!" commanded Ned.</p> + +<p>"He'll eat Frank alive!" whispered Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"He's making a grab for his leg now!" Jack added.</p> + +<p>Frank came to the surface and struck out for the boat, which was only a +few strokes away, the crocodile following in his wake, the giant +armor-plated body moving through the water stolidly and without visible +means of motion. The rough back looked like a log which had lain long in +the waters of a swamp and had caught rust from mineral deposits and a +nasty brown from decaying vegetation.</p> + +<p>Frank knew the danger he was in, but did not seem to understand that the +boys on the boat were aware of his peril, for he swung his body out of +the water and whirling, pointed to the crocodile. As he did so the +monster speeded forward and snapped at his arm.</p> + +<p>"Shoot! Shoot!" cried Jimmie.</p> + +<p>But no shots were fired. When the great mouth of the monster opened +something shot out from the boat and landed squarely between the +extended jaws of the crocodile. There was a snap, a crunching sound, +then the water was whipped into commotion by the writhing body of the +monster.</p> + +<p>A rope was thrown to Frank and he was soon on board, not much wetter +than his chums, standing in the driving rain, and not at all injured by +his adventure.</p> + +<p>"Cripes!" Jimmie cried, as Frank stood panting by his side, "I thought +he had you where the whale had Jonah."</p> + +<p>"What was that you fed him?" asked Frank of Ned.</p> + +<p>"Just a bottle of gasoline which lay here," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"You couldn't make a throw like that again in a hundred years!" Frank +said.</p> + +<p>"If you're goin' to feed gasoline to the crocodiles," grinned Jimmie, +"I'll notify the government."</p> + +<p>"If the breed listens to what that fellow has to say of gasoline as an +article of food," Ned laughed, "there won't be much demand for it."</p> + +<p>"He'd have had my arm if you hadn't hit the mark," Frank said. "I'll owe +you an arm as long as I live, old man!"</p> + +<p>"And that big fish owes Uncle Sam a quart of gasoline and a good blue +glass bottle," laughed Jack. "I wonder how it will set on his tummy?"</p> + +<p>"Now," Ned said, "I'm as wet as it is possible to get, so I'm going on +shore to see if our Boy Scout left any mail for us. I'm getting anxious +to catch up with the Lieutenant and his abductors."</p> + +<p>"I'm goin' too!" said Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"You're not," Ned replied. "I'm not going to the trouble of keeping +track of you in that wilderness."</p> + +<p>"All right!" Jimmie grunted, apparently resigned to his fate, but when +Ned rowed ashore and disappeared in the thicket which skirted the bay +the little fellow recklessly slipped into the water and came out +unharmed on the beach farther to the south than Ned had landed. He stood +for a moment with the salt water running out of his hair and over his +freckled face, made an amusing grimace at the boys in the boat, and +scurried into the jungle.</p> + +<p>"The little dunce!" Jack exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"If he keeps close to Ned he will be all right," Frank observed, "but if +he goes to wandering about on his own account he will get into trouble. +I've got a hunch that the people we are following are on that island."</p> + +<p>In five minutes Ned made his appearance, rowing swiftly out to the boat.</p> + +<p>"They are there!" he exclaimed. "I found the trail mark and the +direction. A yard from the last direction I found the triple warning +three times repeated. You know what that means?"</p> + +<p>"Life or death," was the reply, and the three boys stood looking into +each other's faces for a moment without speaking.</p> + +<p>"I guess they're going to murder the prisoners," Jack said, presently, +breaking the painful silence.</p> + +<p>"That is what the sign seems to read," Ned said, gravely.</p> + +<p>"Then we may as well be getting out our guns," Frank said.</p> + +<p>Ned nodded, and turned toward the shore again. In a moment he faced his +chums again, his eyes startled and anxious.</p> + +<p>"Where's Jimmie?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"He went ashore!"</p> + +<p>"Didn't you see him?"</p> + +<p>Ned turned from Frank to Jack and then pointed toward an elevation +toward the center of the island.</p> + +<p>The clouds hung low and the rain was still falling in torrents, but +under the gray sky and through the downpour of the rain two columns of +smoke lifted an eloquent voice.</p> + +<p>"That's a Boy Scout call!" exclaimed Jack.</p> + +<p>"Two columns of smoke," Frank said, "mean 'Help'! Jimmie couldn't have +kindled two fires since he has been gone, could he?"</p> + +<p>"Of course not," Jack replied. "That's Pat Mack, the red-headed rascal!"</p> + +<p>"I bet he wishes he was back on Chatham Square!" observed Frank.</p> + +<p>The boys waited ten minutes, but Jimmie did not make his appearance.</p> + +<p>"He's in trouble!" cried Frank. "We better go and see what kind of a fix +he's gotten into."</p> + +<p>"It may be," Ned said, after a short pause, "that he has seen the call +for help, and is making his way in that direction."</p> + +<p>"That is just like him!" Jack burst out.</p> + +<p>"Are we going in there after him?" Frank asked.</p> + +<p>"We are likely to lose him in the thicket if we go," Ned cautioned, "and +it seems to me that we ought to wait a short time. He is wise enough not +to go butting into a camp."</p> + +<p>"What sort of a place is it in there?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"It is one of the nameless islands of the Babuyan group," Ned answered. +"Like most of the others, it is of volcanic formation. There is a +central elevation, and a stream of good size starts up there somewhere +and runs into a bay farther north. I was thinking of speeding up and +trying to get into the interior by way of the river."</p> + +<p>"With the engine barking like a terrier in a rat pit!" said Frank.</p> + +<p>"For once," said Ned, with a smile, "you have said a good thing! We've +got to lie here and wait until dark. Then we can advance through the +jungle and look for their campfire."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps they won't build a fire."</p> + +<p>This from Frank, who was stuffing his pockets with cartridges.</p> + +<p>"Of course they will!" Jack put in. "They will have to keep the wildcats +away."</p> + +<p>"Wildcats!" laughed Frank. "There isn't a wildcat within a thousand +miles of this island."</p> + +<p>"Don't you ever think it," Jack insisted. "There are plenty of wildcats +in the Philippines, and snakes, and lizards. In fact, the islands are +not unlike the Isthmus of Panama in this regard. And monkeys! Well, +we've heard enough chattering already to put us wise to them."</p> + +<p>As the boy spoke a great chattering broke out in a thicket only a few +rods away from the beach. The monkeys seemed frightened, and moving +toward the shore.</p> + +<p>"Jimmie is in there!" Ned exclaimed. "I wish I could chloroform the +little pests. They will betray the presence of the lad."</p> + +<p>While the boys waited, wondering what was to be the outcome of the +dangerous situation, the sharp whistle of a launch came from the +opposite side of the island. The first blast was followed by three +others, in quick succession, and then a shot was heard from the +interior.</p> + +<p>"This must be receiving day for the little brown men!" said Jack. +"There's a boat over there talking to them. What about it, Ned?"</p> + +<p>"If you boys will promise not to leave the boat," Ned said, "I'll go +ashore and try to find out what is going on. This island lies on the rim +of the China Sea, and that boat may be from the land of the Celestials!"</p> + +<p>"Bringing arms to put Uncle Sam to the bad!" exclaimed Frank. "I'd like +to pull their pigtails!"</p> + +<p>The boys promised not to leave the <i>Manhattan</i>, and Ned rowed ashore and +struck into the jungle. There was now an uproar of chattering all over +the island, it seemed, and he walked swiftly under cover of the racket. +In half an hour he was on an elevation which gave him a view of the +China Sea. What he saw caused him to drop suddenly to the ground.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<h3>THE LOW CALL OF A WOLF.</h3> + + +<p>When Jimmie left the <i>Manhattan</i> he thought it would be perfectly easy +to follow Ned into the jungle. Before leaving Captain Godwin's charge +the boys had been provided with bolos, and the youngster slipped one +under his jacket before leaving the motor boat. This he used to good +purpose, though with great caution, as he crept through the thickets.</p> + +<p>As is well known, it is almost impossible to make headway in a +Philippine forest without chopping down creepers and tangled vines. The +bolo is always in use by parties hunting or exploring. It is a short, +heavy sword, or knife, similar to the machete of Cuba, and is frequently +used in warfare. In the hands of an expert it becomes a very effective +weapon.</p> + +<p>Gaining the thicket, Jimmie stood still and listened for some indication +of the presence of his patrol leader. But the patter of the rain, the +rustling of the great leaves, the scolding of the wet and alarmed +monkeys in the trees about him, served to shut out any other sounds.</p> + +<p>He walked as fast as he could through the jungle toward the center of +the island, or in the direction which he believed to be the center. +Always his way was uphill, and now and then he was obliged to draw +himself up some acclivity by pulling, hand over hand, on a creeper +trailing from a tree.</p> + +<p>Certain that he could find his way back, he did not blaze the way. Here +and there he hewed down a thorny limb which tore at his clothes, or cut +a creeper from a tree, but he made no effort to mark his path.</p> + +<p>Occasionally he came to a little glade, a space clear of trees but +hemmed in by the eternal jungle just the same. Here the way was choked +with rank cogon grass, growing from eight to twelve feet high. He found +this as mean a growth to pass through as any briar patch or cane-brake.</p> + +<p>Cogon grass seems a useless parasite on the bosom of old Mother Earth, +and yet it presents a compensation in its gorgeous white bloom, for, +like the poppy, the cogon is a show-piece of nature, and she flaunts it +in places where beauty is needed, too. Jimmie had never seen a field of +buckwheat in blossom, or he might have compared the cogon stretches to +fields in the United States at certain seasons of the year.</p> + +<p>Even in his haste, in the uncomfortable day, the boy stopped to gaze in +wonder at the wonderful balete tree, which is a representative of the +fig family. This tree begins life as a parasite, at least it springs to +life in a crotch of some other tree. Here it thrives on the humus and +decayed vegetable matter and sends long, winding tendrils down to the +ground.</p> + +<p>These tendrils take root and grow with such vigor that the supporting +trunk is rapidly enveloped in a coalescing mass of stems, while its own +branches are overtopped by the usurper, which kills it eventually as +much by stealing its sunshine as by appropriating the soil at its base. +When very old these trees possess a massive trunk, usually, with a large +cavity in the middle where the trunk of the other tree rotted out. Some +of the younger trees, however, seem to stand on stilts.</p> + +<p>Jimmie saw many things to marvel at, for a Philippine forest is not at +all like a forest in the states of New York or Illinois. In the glades +he saw plants of enormous size, with leaves seven feet long. He came +upon rattan or bejuco thickets, where thorns, pointing down the stems +like barbs on a fish-hook, snatched at his clothes and clung to them +too.</p> + +<p>A variety of this plant has a stem, trailing on the ground, five hundred +feet long. This stem is hollow and divided into compartments by +diaphragms at the joints, like the bamboo. Each compartment contains +about a mouthful of pure water.</p> + +<p>Jimmie climbed upward for half an hour, thinking every moment that he +would come upon some trace of Ned, but Ned, as the reader knows, was at +that time waiting in the cabin of the <i>Manhattan</i> for the return of his +friend. Unconsciously he wandered off to the right, or north, and +presently came to an elevation from which he could overlook the +rain-splashed waters of the China Sea.</p> + +<p>By the time he reached this position Ned was also in the forest, hoping +to meet Jimmie as well as to learn the meaning of the signals from the +unknown launch and the firing on the island. Ned, however, for a long +time kept to the left, and when at last he came to an elevation he was +at least a mile away from that to which Jimmie had ascended.</p> + +<p>From the hill—it could not be termed a mountain, though it was of +volcanic formation—Jimmie looked into a glade from which the smoke of a +fire ascended. He would have observed the two columns of smoke which had +been seen from the motor boat had he reached the position earlier, or if +he had not been surrounded by the thicket when the Boy Scout signal rose +to the sky.</p> + +<p>He could see people moving about the fire, which was partially protected +from the storm by a heavy canvas on the windward side. A crude shelter +composed of great leaves and canvas was also seen, and in this he +thought he saw several reclining figures. By this time the boy had given +up all hope of coming upon Ned, and also of finding his way back to the +<i>Manhattan</i> without a careful study of the location.</p> + +<p>From the place where he stood he could look over a large portion of the +island. He could see a river running to the east, and wondered if the +bay in which the motor boat was lay not near the mouth of the stream. +Still, there were many indentations in the shores of the little isle; he +could not discover the <i>Manhattan</i> in any of them.</p> + +<p>He studied over the situation for a time and then arrived at the +conclusion that he could best find his way back to the boat by following +the line of the coast. That, however, necessitated a long journey and, +perhaps, the swimming of streams which would doubtless take him far into +the night, and a Philippine jungle is no place to travel in the +darkness. Besides being decidedly uncomfortable, such a trip would be +dangerous. Even if there were no wildcats on the island, there were +plenty of reptiles. Then he caught sight of a launch off to the east and +changed his plans.</p> + +<p>His idea was to circle the camp and gain a position between it and the +place where the launch had made its appearance. If the people on the +boat were planning to land he wanted to see them before they reached the +camp. If they were enemies he thought he could avoid them readily +enough; if they were friends they might assist him in releasing the +prisoners.</p> + +<p>"Of course they're in with the game that's goin' on, though," he mused, +as he made his way around the hill. "If they wasn't, what would they be +comin' to the island for? There's no one here to visit—or wouldn't be +if this party of dagoes hadn't landed. The men in the launch are here to +meet the others, and that's all there is to it. I'm goin' to see what +their business is!"</p> + +<p>It was growing dim over the forest when Jimmie gained the position he +sought, and there were lights in the launch down in a little bay and +lights in the camp halfway up the hill. The rain still came down +heavily, driven with considerable force by the wind, and the boy was, of +course, soaked to the skin and suffering from the stings of the insects +which swarm in Philippine forests, but still he waited patiently for +some signs of communication between the people on the boat and those in +the camp.</p> + +<p>There was no stir in the thicket which lay between the two, and Jimmie +concluded that he had arrived too late to witness the meeting of the two +parties. The next thing to do was to get as close to the camp as he +could without danger of detection and observe what was taking place +there. It might be even possible, he thought, to get near enough to hear +something of the conversation.</p> + +<p>With this object in view he moved as stealthily as possible through the +jungle, up the hill, toward the fire, shining dimly in the rain. Much to +his surprise he found no guards posted about the camp. When fifty yards +away, concealed from any possible view of those about the fire by a mass +of creepers, he saw that the inhabitants of the camp were hustling about +in the work of building a good-sized shelter of the huge leaves which +grew about. The reclining forms in the shelter he had first seen were +now only partly in sight.</p> + +<p>"They are tryin' to keep the prisoners dry, anyway," the boy thought.</p> + +<p>The shelter last spoken of was at the right of the fire, and Jimmie +circled off so as to reach it from the rear, his purpose being to learn +if the persons lying there were really the men who had been carried away +from the island where Captain Godwin had his headquarters.</p> + +<p>Presently he came upon a group of four people, standing, somewhat +protected from the storm, under a great tree. He drew as close as he +dared, even risking discovery, and listened. He could hear voices above +the wailing of the wind and the patter of the rain, but could not +understand what was being said. The conversation was being carried on in +a tongue with which he was unfamiliar.</p> + +<p>"Three of them are Chinks," he mused, when, in moving about, the men +came between his line of vision and the slow flame of the fire. "They +wear their shirts outside their trousers and have their hair done up +like the Chinese in Pell street!"</p> + +<p>Directly the fourth man of the party, who seemed to be an American, or, +at least, an Englishman, asked:</p> + +<p>"And the treaty? Will they sign?"</p> + +<p>The others nodded and chattered away in their own tongue.</p> + +<p>"When will they be here?" he then asked.</p> + +<p>More chattering followed, and then the four hastened to the shelter +which was being constructed. Jimmie gathered from the two questions he +had heard that the island had been chosen as a meeting place, and that +the shelter was being built for the accommodation of those expected.</p> + +<p>He had heard something of the purpose of the government in sending Ned +to the Philippines, and remembered now that there had been talk of a +possible organization of the native tribes against the United States +government. Now he suspected that the chiefs were to meet there to +execute the treaty which was to tie the tribes together and bring about +an armed revolt against American occupancy.</p> + +<p>"It looks to me," he thought, "like the Chinese were at the bottom of +the trouble. I guess China would like to get a foothold here!"</p> + +<p>There was nothing more to be learned from the position he occupied, and +so he moved on, always keeping to the right of the campfire, blazing +dimly in the rain and requiring constant care, until he came out in a +thicket close to the rear of the shelter where the men he believed to be +prisoners lay. In five minutes he was at the canvas wall of the refuge, +listening.</p> + +<p>All was still inside, and it was evident that the conspirators did not +suspect that they had been followed to their retreat. Looking about, he +saw that most of the men of the party were still busily engaged in +constructing the shelter and that no one was near the place he wished to +investigate, so he cautiously lifted a corner of the canvas and looked +inside.</p> + +<p>The men there were four in number, and all seemed to be bound hand and +foot! The captors were not taking any chances on escape, although they +evidently believed themselves to be in full possession of the little +island. All was still inside the shelter except that the rain descended +steadily on the leaf roof and now and then a low moan came from the +front of the place.</p> + +<p>"That must be the man they cut up," thought the boy. "I wonder if it is +Lieutenant Rowe who is wounded?"</p> + +<p>While the boy waited, uncertain what course to pursue, another signal +came from the shore and was answered by another pistol shot.</p> + +<p>"Another bunch of Chinks!" he thought.</p> + +<p>The signals brought considerable excitement to the camp, and Jimmie +concluded that the new arrival must be a person of some importance. In a +short time nearly every person in the camp rushed away down the hill +toward the bay where the first launch was anchored, as if to welcome the +new arrivals.</p> + +<p>"Now's my time!" thought the boy, and in an instant his inquisitive head +was thrust under the canvas, and then the low, snarling call of a wolf +penetrated the shadowy place where the men he believed to be prisoners +lay.</p> + +<p>The effect of the signal was instantaneous. A figure half arose and +dropped back again, only to roll over and over in the direction from +which had come the Boy Scout signal used by all members of the Wolf +Patrol. As the bound figure came awkwardly rolling on, Jimmie saw, with +what joy may be readily understood, a red head shining in the firelight! +Never in all his life had any color looked so good to Jimmie as that +brilliant red did at that time!</p> + +<p>"Pat Mack?" he whispered.</p> + +<p>The figure wiggled and twisted vigorously, but there was no verbal +reply.</p> + +<p>"I'll bet dollars to doughnuts they've put a stick in his mouth," said +Jimmie, and this whispered observation was answered by another muscular +demonstration.</p> + +<p>"Sure," muttered the boy, "it is Pat an' he's tryin' to talk to me with +his feet, an' them tied up plenty!"</p> + +<p>Bolo in hand he crept into the shelter, although the sound of voices +told him that the people who had gone down the hill were now returning. +He could not see the cords which held the still struggling man, but he +found them with his fingers and cut them, not quite certain that he was +serving a friend, but willing, under the circumstances, to take the +risk. First the cords which held the feet were severed, then those which +held the wooden gag in place, then that which confined the hands.</p> + +<p>When this last cord was cut two muscular arms flew up and seized the boy +about the neck, drawing his head down until his nose was buried in the +wet clothes of the man he had released.</p> + +<p>"Let up!" he muttered in a smothered voice.</p> + +<p>Still the powerful arms drew him down, and the boy was beginning to +wonder if he had not better use his bolo when a voice whispered:</p> + +<p>"Jimmie! Is it dead we both are?"</p> + +<p>"We will soon be if you don't let up!" answered Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"Jimmie from the Bowery?" demanded the other.</p> + +<p>"Sure!" was the reply. "What is this, anyway, a catch-as-catch-can? If +you don't let up I'll take a rib out with my bolo."</p> + +<p>With a spring which almost keeled the boy over the figure sprang up, +ducked under the dripping canvas, and crouched in the thicket from which +Jimmie had observed the tent. Jimmie's first thought was to follow, then +he thought of the remaining prisoners and turned to cut their bonds.</p> + +<p>But he was too late. As he turned three men came to the front of the +shelter and bent low for the purpose of entering. To have hesitated +longer would have been to invite capture, and so, with a sigh of regret, +the boy shot under the canvas and joined the other in the thicket.</p> + +<p>"It's leg bail for it!" came the familiar voice of Pat Mack, and the +boys poked their faces into the thicket and kept going, regardless of +the thorns and creepers which tore at their garments and tripped their +feet. It was so dark now that they could not see a hand held two inches +from their eyes, but they kept on, making as little noise as possible.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<h3>A MISSING MOTOR BOAT.</h3> + + +<p>"You rapscallion," Pat Mack whispered, as the two came together in the +embrace of a particularly tough creeper, "how did you ever get here? I +saw you last on the good old Bowery!"</p> + +<p>"I didn't fly over," replied Jimmie. "Here," he added, "take this bolo +an' cut that rope! What did you mean by chokin' me when I cut you +loose?"</p> + +<p>"A hug of affection!" retorted the other. "You looked like an angel to +me! Did you flutter down from the sky in the rain?"</p> + +<p>"I ought to give you a good punch for it!" Jimmie replied. "You near +took the hide off me beautiful nose! Have you got that bloomin' steel +cable cut? Seems to me they are comin' after us!"</p> + +<p>The boys stood perfectly still and listened. Above the patter of the +rain, above the murmur of the trees, above the chattering of the aroused +monkeys, came the crash of heavy bodies through the bushes, the sound of +human voices.</p> + +<p>"Sure they are!" whispered Pat, and they set off again.</p> + +<p>Working their way painfully through the jungle, falling now and then +over long vines, coming into contact with great trees and swinging +parasites which brushed against their faces like snakes, the boys +pressed on as rapidly as possible, but ever the sounds of pursuit came +closer! The pursuers were more familiar with jungle methods than they, +and no pretense of secrecy was made.</p> + +<p>"Have you got a gun?" whispered Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"I haven't even got a toothpick," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"We'll have to fight before long," Jimmie said, panting with the +exertion of the unfamiliar struggle with the jungle.</p> + +<p>"There's plenty of hollow trees about," suggested Pat. "Why not hide in +one of them until they pass?"</p> + +<p>The suggestion seemed a good one, for a moment. Then the uselessness of +such an effort at concealment became apparent. With sinking hearts the +boys heard the low whine of a hound!</p> + +<p>"I wonder how they managed to track us so easily," Jimmie said.</p> + +<p>"Give me the bolo," Pat said. "I'll split the dog's head open if he +comes near us. Use your gun on the men."</p> + +<p>The boys did not give up hope of final escape, but pressed on for a +time. However, the acclivity they were ascending grew steeper as they +advanced, and they were obliged to stop now and then to rest. On one of +these occasions they heard a commotion in the jungle just ahead of them. +This was disheartening!</p> + +<p>"They've flanked us!" whispered Pat.</p> + +<p>The pursuers were carrying a torch which, in the rain, gave a dim light, +but still served to direct their steps, and the glow of the flame now +reached to the very spot where the lads stood. The bushes behind them +parted and the glowing eyes of the hound looked up in their faces. Then +the call of the beast told the men following that he had at last sighted +his prey.</p> + +<p>The boys turned to flee again, but came up against an almost +perpendicular wall of rock. The pursuers saw them now and came on with +cries of victory.</p> + +<p>"Guess they've got us!" Pat said.</p> + +<p>"Not yet!" Jimmie answered.</p> + +<p>But, however courageous the lads might have proved themselves to be, +they would have been taken in a moment had they not received unexpected +assistance. The hound was almost at their feet when a shot was heard and +the great beast fell to the ground, struggled for an instant, and lay +still.</p> + +<p>Another shot followed the first instantly, and the torch dropped from +the uplifted hand of the evil-faced man who was carrying it in the lead. +An intense, uncanny darkness followed the extinction of the torch, and +the two boys took advantage of it to edge around the face of the rock +which had blocked their progress. Without the help of the dog, and +without the torch, the pursuers could do little, and stood on equal +terms with the pursued.</p> + +<p>It was impossible, of course, for the boys to make their way through the +jungle without making any noise, and in a moment the pursuing party +showed its temper by firing revengeful shots at the spots from which the +sounds of their progress proceeded. After half a dozen bullets had +clipped the bushes about the heads of the lads two shots came from in +front, the lead whizzing over their heads. A sharp cry of distress was +heard in the rear at the second shot, and then all was still.</p> + +<p>The boys crouched in the open space between the "legs" of a balete tree +and waited for some possible explanation of the strange thing that had +taken place. Who had killed the hound, and who was it that was shooting +at the enemy over their heads? These questions were hard to answer.</p> + +<p>"It is one of the boys from the <i>Manhattan</i>," Jimmie concluded, at last.</p> + +<p>"Then why don't he show up?" demanded Pat. "Who is in the <i>Manhattan</i>?"</p> + +<p>"Ned Nestor and two members of the Black Bear Patrol," was the reply. +"We came over here to sleuth."</p> + +<p>"To what?"</p> + +<p>"To sleuth. To do the Sherlock Holmes stunt. To put down an insurrection +in the Philippines!"</p> + +<p>"You seem to be putting it down," Pat said, in a sarcastic tone.</p> + +<p>"We've got it by the neck!" insisted Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"Ned's being along will help some," said Pat. "He's the boy to get to +the bottom of a tough case. If he's on this side of the world, that's +him in the shrubbery just ahead. Did you hear the signals a short time +ago?"</p> + +<p>"Of course."</p> + +<p>"Well, that's the bunch coming."</p> + +<p>"What bunch?" demanded Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"Why, the Chinks, of course."</p> + +<p>"What they coming here for?"</p> + +<p>"I guess they expect to take the Philippines home with 'em," was the +reply. "Anyway, they're plotting to take Uncle Sam down and search him +for them."</p> + +<p>"Did you hear much of their talk?" asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"Quite a little, but Lieutenant Rowe made so much noise I couldn't hear +all that was said when they were near me. He's badly wounded."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to know just what took place at the hut Captain Godwin put you +fellows in night before last," Jimmie said.</p> + +<p>"There's treachery somewhere," began Pat, but just then a sound reached +their ears which drove all thoughts of that other night from their +minds. It was the low, snarling call of a wolf!</p> + +<p>"That's Ned!" whispered Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"It's a Wolf, anyway," Pat exclaimed, losing caution in the excitement +of the moment. "That will help some!"</p> + +<p>The boy's voice must have been heard above the rain and the swishing of +the tropical growth, for several shots came from the rear, and one of +the bullets cut into the tree near Pat's head.</p> + +<p>"They seem to be gettin' the range!" Pat said, scratching his head and +blessing his lucky star that a bullet had not connected with it.</p> + +<p>"They couldn't hit a flock of bridges!" said Jimmie, disdainfully.</p> + +<p>Then he straightened up and gave out a long, shrill cry, like that of a +wolf calling to the pack. Pat caught him by the arm and drew him back +into the semi-shelter of the "legs" of the balete tree.</p> + +<p>"You'll have a spray of lead flying this way in a second!" he said. +"Can't you give the Wolf call without alarming the people of Hong Kong, +six hundred miles away?"</p> + +<p>"I'm celebratin'!" answered the boy.</p> + +<p>Again the wolf cry echoed through the forest, and this time it was +answered from within a few feet of where the boys stood. There were no +shots this time, and it was concluded that the pursuers had returned to +the camp.</p> + +<p>"Ned!" called Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"Hey, there!" added Pat.</p> + +<p>"That voice sounds like Chatham Square!" said a voice close to the boy's +elbow, and in the darkness two hands fumbled together and clasped in a +hearty greeting.</p> + +<p>"What you followin' me about for?" demanded Jimmie, as the three started +on through the jungle again.</p> + +<p>"You've got your nerve!" said Pat. "Only for the darkness I'd hand you +one for that. What's he following you for? If he hadn't followed you, +both of us would have been captured back there."</p> + +<p>"Hereafter," Ned said, "when Jimmie goes into the woods I'm going to tie +a string to him, so he can be pulled back home."</p> + +<p>"Huh!" snickered Pat, "they tied plenty of strings to me, but they +didn't pull me back home!"</p> + +<p>It was so still in the rear, for all of any sounds of pursuit, that the +boys decided that their enemies had given up the search for them, so +they walked faster and soon came out on the elevation which Ned had +mounted on leaving the <i>Manhattan</i> in the afternoon. The rain ceased +gradually, and a fugitive moon was seen now and then among the hurrying +clouds.</p> + +<p>With the first show of light Ned looked Pat Mack over with interest. The +Irish lad returned the friendly glance with interest, and the two again +clasped hands.</p> + +<p>"We didn't anticipate such a meeting," Ned said.</p> + +<p>"You knew I had gone to the Philippines," Pat said, "but I had no idea +you would ever wander off here. Tell me about it."</p> + +<p>The story was soon told, in condensed form, and then Ned asked:</p> + +<p>"That was Lieutenant Rowe who was captured?"</p> + +<p>"Sure! They got into our hut and geezled us good. I shall not be able to +straighten out my arms for a month."</p> + +<p>"Your hands must have been free when you left those signs in the grass," +said the patrol leader.</p> + +<p>"They caught me doing it," said Pat, "and that is why I was tied up +tighter than the others."</p> + +<p>"Well, you did a good job before they caught you," Jimmie said. "When +you goin' back to let the others loose?"</p> + +<p>"Lieutenant Rowe is in great pain because of his wound," Pat replied, +"and we ought to do something for him soon."</p> + +<p>"Where is the fourth man—the fellow who climbed in the window?" asked +Ned in a moment.</p> + +<p>"Say!" Pat answered, "there was something strange about that! He came in +with new instructions—instructions which would have sent us off to +Manila again, and the Lieutenant wouldn't stand for them, and so—"</p> + +<p>"They had a scrap?" asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"Did the Lieutenant doubt the authenticity of the instructions?" asked +Ned.</p> + +<p>"I think he did," was the reply, "and so did the messenger! Odd, eh?"</p> + +<p>"But he must have been expecting the messenger," Ned went on, "for the +screen at the window where he entered was left unfastened for him."</p> + +<p>"He was expecting some one," answered Pat, "but of course he did not +know who it would be. Anyway, he was not anticipating faked +instructions."</p> + +<p>"But why was he so secret about letting the fellow in? Why wasn't the +door used when he came?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know. The messenger the Lieutenant was expecting was to come +secretly and go secretly. That's all I know about it."</p> + +<p>"He was to be sent by the government officers?"</p> + +<p>"Of course."</p> + +<p>"From what point?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I don't know," answered Pat. "It is all a muddle. I can't +understand how a man could follow us with instructions, anyway. We came +fast in the motor boat, and could not have been followed in a canoe. I +don't know where this messenger was to spring from, I'm sure. Anyhow, +the wrong one came, or the right one brought the wrong dispatches, and +Lieutenant Rowe wouldn't stand for it, and there was a conference, and +then the brown men came in and we were geezled. Looked like a raid on a +pool room in little old New York!"</p> + +<p>"But this false messenger—the wrong man, or the right man with the +wrong instructions—was captured also?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, he was; and he made a row about it. I'll tell you what I think. +There's treachery in the secret service somewhere. Some interest or some +nation is trying to take the Philippines away from Uncle Sam."</p> + +<p>"And receiving assistance from those in the employ of Uncle Sam!" Ned +said, musingly. "Well, I'm here to see what can be done in the line of +locking the traitors up in a nice hot cell at Manila."</p> + +<p>"You needn't look much farther," Jimmie said. "There's a second motor +boat out in a bay west of the island, and I'm tellin' you that it came +across from China. It is the washee-washee people who are kicking up +this mess, all right."</p> + +<p>"You seem to have solved the mystery," laughed Ned. "From the first we +have known that there was a conspiracy against Uncle Sam, but the +question has always been 'Who?' and not 'What for?' The purpose of the +alleged treaty has never been a mystery. What we are here for is to +catch the conspirators with the goods, as Inspector Byrnes used to say. +And now you've solved the puzzle!"</p> + +<p>"Quit yer kiddin'!" exclaimed Jimmie. "I can say what I think, can't I? +Besides, if it ain't the Chinks, who is it?"</p> + +<p>"That is just what we want to know," Ned replied, more soberly. "There +is a notion at Washington that it may be some financial interest. The +newspapers were saying, when we left civilization, that a certain +monopoly was financing the Mexican revolution, and there is a suspicion +that some disloyal men in the United States are doing the same with the +ignorant natives of the Philippines—urging them on and supplying them +with guns and ammunition."</p> + +<p>"Well," Pat observed, "whoever it is that is doing the business, there +are traitors in the secret service department. The Americans who acted +with the Filipinos who captured us are posted as to what is going on at +Washington, all right."</p> + +<p>"Let's go and get them," suggested Jimmie. "I guess the third degree +would make them tell all about it!"</p> + +<p>"Yes," suggested Pat, "you run out and get them while we find the +<i>Manhattan</i>! That will be a nice little job for you!"</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't let them tie me up, anyway," growled Jimmie, annoyed at the +chaffing of his friends. "Say!" he added, "here's our little bay now, +but where is that bloomin' motor boat? Some one's come and carried it +away while we've been in the woods, an' took Jack and Frank away with +it!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<h3>WIGWAGS FROM THE BEACH.</h3> + + +<p>For a long time after the departure of Ned, Jack and Frank sat in the +cabin of the <i>Manhattan</i>, looking out on the steady downpour. They were +not quite satisfied with their share in the activities of the day. +Instead of being housed in the cabin, they preferred an exciting hunt +even in the rain, over the hills of the little island in view.</p> + +<p>"If we stand for it," grumbled Jack, "we'll have to spend most of our +time keeping house! Jimmie will scatter himself all over the Asiatic +division of the map, and Ned will spend most of his time looking him +up!"</p> + +<p>Frank laughed at this outbreak of ill humor, although he was as anxious +as his chum to be on the firing line.</p> + +<p>"I wish we'd not taken the <i>Manhattan</i>," Jack continued. "I'm the only +one in the party that can operate it, and I'll be tied down like a +galley slave!"</p> + +<p>"Go it!" laughed Frank. "Growl your head off, if you want to, Mr. Black +Bear! Instead of snarling, why don't you tell me what makes the boat go +when you do something to the wheel and that switch?"</p> + +<p>"I thought you owned a launch?" said Jack.</p> + +<p>"Father bought me one," was the reply, "but I've never learned how to +run it. I'm too fat to bother my head about such things!"</p> + +<p>"Then what are you asking me about the mechanism of the thing for?" +asked Jack. "If you don't want to know, what's the use of my telling you +how to run a motor boat? You make me weary!"</p> + +<p>"If I had a nice little temper like yours," Frank grinned, "I'd go and +bump my head against a tree! Come, old man, tell me about the boat. I +may want to run it some time, after you get caught by a cat or filled +full of poisoned arrows! Come! honest! What makes it go?"</p> + +<p>"And you don't even know the action of a gasoline engine?" exclaimed +Jack, in better humor. "Well, I'll tell you. A jet of gasoline, which is +thinner than water, is sprayed, as one would spray any liquid from an +atomizer, into the chamber of the engine cylinder-head, which it reaches +in the form of vapor, having been mixed with air."</p> + +<p>"That's all simple!"</p> + +<p>"Here the vapor is compressed by the rising piston, and when it is +squeezed up as close as it can be an electric spark is introduced into +the chamber. That is what the electric battery and gear are for."</p> + +<p>"I was wondering why one had to have electricity and gasoline both," +said Frank, very much interested in the simple recital.</p> + +<p>"The result of the introduction of the spark is the explosion of the +compressed vapor, which sends the piston downward. The motion turns the +shaft, and that turns the boat's propeller."</p> + +<p>"Easy as pie."</p> + +<p>"This operation is repeated from two to six hundred times a minute," +Jack went on, "and that causes the continuous action of the machinery +which sends the boat along."</p> + +<p>"What is there about that so complicated?" demanded Frank. "Everybody +you hear talking of an engine seems to speak as if it were one of the +mysteries of the universe."</p> + +<p>"It is usually the electric system which gets out of order," was the +reply, "but sometimes the gasoline section balks. A man often has to try +so many different things when his engine stops that he actually does not +know which one remedies the evil and sets the thing in motion."</p> + +<p>"All right!" Frank said. "Now show me how to start the thing."</p> + +<p>"That's easy. First turn on your gasoline, as you would turn water from +a faucet into a kitchen sink. The gasoline fills the carbureter, which +is the thing which feeds the engine automatically. Then you turn on your +electricity by shifting a switch. That is to supply the spark. Then turn +the fly-wheel two or three times so as to get the vapor into the +cylinder and secure the first explosion. That is all there is to it. I +hope you do learn to run this boat, so I can get away now and then!"</p> + +<p>"You may get away farther than you want to!" cautioned Frank.</p> + +<p>The <i>Manhattan</i> was a plain, usable boat, twenty-five feet long and ten +feet wide, with bow and stern rather square in order to make more room +inside. The cabin was ten feet long, with strong oak sides and +brass-rimmed ports for light and ventilation. The cockpit, or outdoor +sitting room, was of the same length as the cabin.</p> + +<p>The engine was a plain, solidly built machine, with two cylinders, and +rated at ten horsepower, with a speed of fifteen miles an hour. It was +installed under a short bridge-deck in front of the cabin, while the +gasoline tanks, holding fifty gallons, were hidden under the cockpit +seats.</p> + +<p>The cabin had two wide slatted berths, supplied with hair mattresses, a +movable table, an ice chest, a small coal range—the boat was not +designed especially for tropical use—an ice-chest and an alcohol stove +for cooking. The storage lockers and water tanks had a capacity of a +week's supply of stores for four persons. It was a government boat, and +was in good repute as a racer in and about Manila, in spite of its blunt +bow and wide beam.</p> + +<p>Frank pottered away at the machinery until he announced that it was like +taking candy away from the children to run it, and then the two retired +to the cabin to get rid of their wet garments.</p> + +<p>"Ned and Jimmie are having a good soaking," Jack said, his ill humor all +gone, as he soused his wet underclothing in a tub of sea water. "I wish +they'd come home."</p> + +<p>A dull thump, as of a canoe striking the motor boat, and a quick step on +the prow caused both boys to spring to their feet.</p> + +<p>"There they come now!" Jack cried, glancing out into the slanting rain, +"and it's good and wet they are."</p> + +<p>The boy was about to step forward and open the cabin door when Frank +caught him by the shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Wait!" he said. "Look there!"</p> + +<p>Jack followed the pointing finger with his eyes and saw half a dozen +Filipinos clambering into the cockpit, and also saw the muzzles of +American-built rifles covering the cabin door.</p> + +<p>"Get your gun!" Jack whispered.</p> + +<p>"We've got to do something besides shoot," Frank said. "They have the +drop on us. We should have been looking out for an attempt at surprise."</p> + +<p>There was a moment's silence, and then a man enveloped from neck to +heels in a heavy raincoat and sweating tremendously in consequence, +advanced to the cabin door.</p> + +<p>"Never mind the guns!" he said, through the glass. "My men have you +covered, and it would be a pity to shoot two likely boys!"</p> + +<p>"What do you want?" demanded Frank.</p> + +<p>"We want this boat," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Well, you've got it!" Jack said, angrily.</p> + +<p>"Of course we have," was the reply. "We seem to be getting about +everything we want in this corner of the world! Where are the others?"</p> + +<p>"Gone after a battleship!" declared Jack.</p> + +<p>The man grinned and, opening the cabin door, stepped inside. He was +tall, rather slender, with clean-cut features and bright gray eyes. His +bearing was that of a gentleman, and Frank began to have an indefinable +idea that he had met him before somewhere, just where he could not +decide. The fellow evidently was an American, though his followers +seemed to be Chinese and Filipinos.</p> + +<p>"So he's gone after a battleship, has he?" the intruder said, shutting +the cabin door behind him, after making sure that his men were standing +at attention with their guns. "Do they pick battleships off trees up on +the hill?"</p> + +<p>"I don't see anything funny about it," Jack said, sourly. "Who do you +mean by 'he'? What do you know about the crew of the boat?"</p> + +<p>"I've heard of Mr. Ned Nestor," was the calm reply, "and was hoping to +meet him here. However, you seem to be cheerful young fellows, and a +cruise with you may not result in lost time. You are Jack Bosworth and +Frank Shaw. Which one is Shaw, and which one is Bosworth?"</p> + +<p>"I'm Shaw," answered Frank, somewhat amused at the cool impudence of the +man. "What is your name?"</p> + +<p>"I'm French," was the reply. "Not French tribally but just French. One +of the sort of Frenchmen who are born of Irish parents in the city of +Chicago! Anyway, you may call me French. That is near enough."</p> + +<p>"You seem to be an amusing sort of a character," observed Frank. "What +are you going to do with the <i>Manhattan</i>?"</p> + +<p>"Why," was the smiling reply, "there is a sort of a political convention +called for that hill over there, and some of the delegates are slow in +coming. So I thought I'd borrow your boat and go and fetch them. They +are not far away. Some of them, in fact, live on islands, not more than +four or five hundred miles off."</p> + +<p>"That will be nice!" Frank said, falling into the mood of the other. +"Only you can't carry many native chiefs in this boat, not if they +insist on bringing their wives and attendants along. Suppose one should +insist on appearing before the convention riding in state on the back of +a white elephant?"</p> + +<p>"Never thought of that," replied the other with a grin, "but how did you +learn that the delegates were to be native chiefs?"</p> + +<p>"I guess most everybody knows what kind of a game you're playing," Frank +said with a grin which he intended to be provoking. "When you get your +delegates assembled, Uncle Sam will give you an imitation of a man +shooting up traitors."</p> + +<p>"We'll have to take our chances on that," replied French, with apparent +good nature. "In the meantime, we'll have to ask you to vacate the boat +while we make our collection of delegates. I presume that you can get +along very well on shore. Only be careful that the little brown men +don't pot you with their funny little guns."</p> + +<p>"Oh, we'll get along with the little brown men, all right," growled +Jack. "When are you going to put us ashore?"</p> + +<p>"Well," was the cool reply, "I want to wait here until I form the +acquaintance of Mr. Ned Nestor and Mr. James McGraw. I have long felt a +desire to meet them!"</p> + +<p>"They'll feel proud, I know!" Jack said, provokingly. "Pirates and +traitors are not so thick that it is not a pleasure to meet them. We'll +all remember, after you are all hanged, that we met you here."</p> + +<p>"Thank you!" replied French, not at all indignant at the remark, "and +now if you'll hand over the guns you have, and tell me where the others +are hidden, you can walk about the boat in comparative freedom while we +get supper. You see it is beginning to get dark, and I'm hungry."</p> + +<p>There was nothing to do but to comply with the polite request, and soon +the intruders were making themselves at home all over the boat. French +brought one of the Filipinos into the cabin, where he sat with his gun +pointing ominously at the boys whenever they moved toward the door, +while the others were stationed on the prow, where they sat stolidly in +the rain, with their guns under their coarse coats to keep them dry.</p> + +<p>"Rather a scanty supply of provisions!" French said, as he investigated +the lockers. "I really think I'll have to send one of my men ashore for +dinner. Two men with perfectly good guns and eyesight ought to be able +to keep us on friendly terms here. Besides, it seems a waste of good +material to feed those fellows from this choice stock when they prefer +boiled dog."</p> + +<p>"Say, French," Jack said, "if you weren't crooked enough to make a +corkscrew look like a straight-edge, you'd be a pretty good sort of a +chap to go on a cruise with."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I'm all right when I'm not abused," French replied. "If Dad had +presented me with a million instead of a thirst for other people's +property, I'd have had my name in the society columns every day! Isn't +it about time for Ned and Jimmie to come home?" he added. "If you don't +mind, I'll run the boat out a little farther, so they'll have to call +and signal when they do come."</p> + +<p>"They should have been here long ago," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"I must insist that you remain perfectly quiet when they do come," +French said, after the boat had changed position, in a moment. "I don't +want to spoil this pretty boat with dark stains. Perhaps, however, they +have been captured."</p> + +<p>"You would know if they had, wouldn't you?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"Why, no, I think not. You see I have just arrived, coming in the second +launch, now over there in the bay. I did not go to the camp, but edged +around the hill with half a dozen men in order to see if all was safe. +We've got some pretty high-up men in this game with us, and I'm afraid +Wall street would stand up on its hind legs and howl if their names were +known. Hence this caution."</p> + +<p>French seemed to be a college educated man and a gentleman by instinct. +While they were preparing supper he amused them with stories of his +travels and adventures, and both boys heartily wished he was with them +as a friend instead of an enemy. When it grew dark he sent all the +Filipinos away but two, and they sat down to a good meal.</p> + +<p>Frank questioned French, cautiously of course, but could gain little +information from him. The fellow seemed fully aware of the purpose of +the boy, and replied to his questions with the most extravagant stories +of the empire that was to be raised in the Philippines after the United +States protectorate had ceased.</p> + +<p>"You're a queer chap," Frank said, at the conclusion of one of French's +stories of the grandeur of the coming empire, "and I'd like to hear you +spin yarns all night, but, if you don't mind, I'll go to bed."</p> + +<p>"Just as you like," was the amiable reply. "I'll sit here and smoke a +few more cigarettes and then follow your example. It is such a wild +night that your friends may have stopped at a down-town hotel!"</p> + +<p>"Perhaps they've stepped over to the Waldorf!" Jack replied.</p> + +<p>The lads occupied the same bunk, and talked in whispers all through the +night. They had no idea what had become of Ned and Jimmie except the +supposition that they had been captured by their enemies. French retired +about midnight, as calmly as if he were in his own rooms, leaving the +two Filipinos on guard in the cabin.</p> + +<p>Once Frank arose and tried to slip out, his idea being to reach the +shore and look for his chums, but the brown men lifted their guns +automatically as he looked out on them. All through the night they sat +unblinkingly, looking out in the dim light much as glass eyes might have +looked out of the head of a wooden image.</p> + +<p>"We're sure in a bad box," Jack whispered, after this attempt at escape. +"I don't believe they'll turn us loose on the island, knowing what we +know. They won't take any chance of our getting away! If Ned was free, +he'd have been here before this, so we may as well make up our minds +that he's in trouble also."</p> + +<p>With daylight came a cessation of the storm, and soon the sun was +shining smotheringly down on the little bay. Sweltering in the cabin, +Frank looked out of a port and saw a pole lifted above a clump of low +bushes just back from the distant beach. As he looked the pole moved +forward and back, then to the right, ducking three times and coming back +to a vertical position. The pole wavered to right and left and to the +front for a time, and the boy waved his hand from the open port.</p> + +<p>"Wigwag!" he whispered. "It says: 'Brace up!' That's Jimmie!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<h3>TWO KEYS TO THE TREATY BOX.</h3> + + +<p>The relief of the boys at the information conveyed by the wigwag signals +from the shore may well be imagined. The night had been a long and +trying one, and they had about abandoned hope when the signals came.</p> + +<p>The presence of Ned and Jimmie on the beach meant not only that they +were still safe, but that there was a possibility of rescuing the +<i>Manhattan</i> from the courteous pirate who had seized it. They did not +know exactly how this could be accomplished, but they had every +confidence in Ned's courage and resourcefulness.</p> + +<p>The boys knew, however, that what was done must be undertaken at once, +for the Filipinos who had been sent away from the boat the night before +had doubtless communicated with French's friends on the island, and it +was natural that they, the friends, should hasten down to the little bay +soon after sunrise to look over the fortunate capture made by French.</p> + +<p>They heard French stirring in his bunk while they were talking over +plans for the rescue, and ceased whispering immediately. They knew that +Ned, probably from the presence of the Filipinos, who were drying +themselves in the scorching sunshine, understood the situation on board. +In fact, they realized that Ned and Jimmie would have come aboard at +once if they had not received an inkling of what was going on by the +change of position.</p> + +<p>French arose, yawning, and looked lazily out of a port. He was a +muscular fellow, evidently in first-class condition physically, so it +was useless to attempt to overpower him, regain their weapons, and drive +the Filipinos off the boat. Jack seemed to think that if they could both +get hold of him they might accomplish something, but there were the +guards to reckon with while the fight was in progress.</p> + +<p>So they gave up all idea of rescue until Ned should show his hand. +French glanced keenly about the cabin and then went out into the +cockpit, taking a seat on the bridge deck and scanning the shore +critically. The pole which had been used to convey the wigwag signals +was now out of sight.</p> + +<p>"Can you boys operate this boat?" he finally asked.</p> + +<p>Jack was about to reply in the affirmative but Frank lifted a warning +hand.</p> + +<p>"No," the latter said, telling the falsehood brazenly. "Ned is the only +one who can run it."</p> + +<p>"Can't you start the engine?" French asked, anxiously.</p> + +<p>The boys shook their heads.</p> + +<p>"Then I'm going to try," French said. "As I hinted last night, when I +told you I came here in a launch, there are other motor boats around the +corner, in a bay on the western side of the island. I have only to get +to them. There are plenty of men there who can do the job."</p> + +<p>"I hardly think it safe for one who knows nothing of engines to fool +with one," said Jack. "Suppose I see what I can do with it. I've seen +Ned work the thing, and may be able to start it."</p> + +<p>"Try it!" French said. "But if you make any foolishness with it, you'll +find yourself in trouble. Understand?"</p> + +<p>"I don't want to ruin the boat!" Jack said. "We're going to have fun +with this craft before we leave it!" he added, with a grin.</p> + +<p>"Then you'll have to hurry and have your fun," said French, "for you're +going to leave it as soon as we get to the bay where the other boats +are."</p> + +<p>Jack opened a trap in the cockpit seat and placed his hand on the jar +which supplied the electricity for the spark. French was watching him, +but he managed to draw the wires out without being seen. This, of +course, effectually crippled the boat. He fumbled for a time with his +hand on the jar, watching the shore as he did so, and then closed the +trap.</p> + +<p>After closing the trap Jack turned the fly-wheel a few times, pounded +away with a wrench, and inspected the gasoline tanks, but of course no +motion was transmitted to the shaft. Finally he threw down the wrench in +apparent disgust.</p> + +<p>"I can't do anything with it!" he exclaimed. "You'll have to wait until +Ned comes if you can't start it yourself."</p> + +<p>"It is my impression," said French, with a smile, "that your friend Ned +is trussed up in a camp over on the other side of the island!"</p> + +<p>"Then why don't you send for him, or for some one else to run the boat?" +asked Frank innocently, his purpose being to induce French to send one +of the guards away, and so reduce the force to be opposed.</p> + +<p>"From out of the mouths of children," laughed French. "Well, you know +the rest! I have an idea that you have solved the problem."</p> + +<p>He talked in Spanish to one of the men for a moment, and the fellow +rowed ashore in one of the canoes the captors had come in and set off +through the jungle. The boys watched the thickets, hoping to see some +sign of a struggle. They were sure that Ned would capture the guard, and +so, possibly, delay the appearance of French's friends.</p> + +<p>But all was quiet along the coast. Ned evidently had some other plan in +mind. In a few moments French proposed breakfast and entered the cabin, +relying on the guard to keep the boys out of mischief. As they had no +weapons, he did not believe they would make any trouble. Besides, he +kept a sharp lookout through the low, open doorway of the little cabin.</p> + +<p>Then Frank became possessed of what Ned afterwards declared to be the +one brilliant idea of his life! First he asked the guard if he could +speak English.</p> + +<p>"Understan' some; speak little," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Well," Frank went on, "I'm going to take my morning exercises. See if +you have anything like this in your blooming land!"</p> + +<p>"Bloomin' lan' Good! She bloom!"</p> + +<p>The Filipino pointed away to the mass of tropical blossoms shimmering in +the sunlight and grinned at what he doubtless considered a very sharp +reply. French, hearing the voices, looked out of the cabin and smiled at +the antics the boy was making.</p> + +<p>Frank threw his body into a vertical position and bent sharply off to +the right. Then back to vertical and off to the left. Then back and to +the right again.</p> + +<p>"That's all right!" cried French from the cabin. "You appear to be a +nimble little chap. What are those exercises for?"</p> + +<p>"To bring all the muscles of the body into use!" replied Frank, winking +at Jack, who was just beginning to understand the purpose of the sudden +demand for exercise.</p> + +<p>"Blessed if he ain't doing the wigwag with his body!" thought Jack. +"That is the letter 'C'."</p> + +<p>From the vertical Frank then dropped his body over to the left, then to +the right and stopped.</p> + +<p>"That's wigwag for 'O'," thought Jack. "I wonder what he means to say?"</p> + +<p>"Well done!" shouted French, his hands full of tinned goods. "I'll get +you a job in a circus when I get done with you!"</p> + +<p>"That will be fine!" Frank replied, facing French with as innocent a +face as a boy ever carried.</p> + +<p>One to the right, two to the left, one to the right, and Jack read the +letter "M" and saw what the next one would be. One to the right, one to +the left, and Jack read the letter "E." Then three slow motions straight +in front, then to vertical again.</p> + +<p>"That means the end of the word," the boy thought, "and the word is +'COME.' Now, I wonder if he will?"</p> + +<p>Frank kept up his odd motions, at which the Filipino seemed greatly +amused, and French turned away to the alcohol stove to prepare a cup of +hot cocoa. But the motions were only for effect now, and meant nothing. +There was a light movement in the thicket, and three figures, crawling +low, entered the canoe which the guard had left the <i>Manhattan</i> in and +moved noiselessly toward the boat.</p> + +<p>The Filipino's back was turned to the beach, for he was watching Frank. +French was busy with his cocoa, condensed cream, and sugar, and so the +advancing canoe was not observed until it was within a few feet of the +boat. Then the guard uttered a cry of warning and raised his gun.</p> + +<p>Frank was ready for this and the distance between himself and the guard +was well calculated. He launched himself like a catapult-dart against +the slim figure, and was fortunate enough to seize the gun. Frank was an +adept at the Japanese ju-jitsu game, and, much to the astonishment of +the Filipino, he soon found himself, minus his gun, dropping to the +bottom of the bay.</p> + +<p>French, of course, started out of the cabin, revolver in hand, but when +he stooped his tall figure in the low doorway he did not straighten it +again as readily as he had expected to. Jack was on the back of his neck +and shoulders, pressing him down to the bridge deck. But French was a +strong man and Jack would have soon been thrown aside had Frank not +engaged him.</p> + +<p>When Ned, Pat and Jimmie sprang out of the canoe and gained the cockpit, +the three were in a tangle, with Frank sitting on the hand which held +the weapon. French surrendered the revolver and sat up with a sickly +grin on his face when he saw the three bending over him, ready to take a +hand in the proceedings.</p> + +<p>"You win!" he said. "I know when I hold the low hand!"</p> + +<p>"Didn't I tell you," Frank said, as soon as he could catch his breath, +"that the motions you saw were calculated to bring the muscles of the +body into action? Well, they did, didn't they?"</p> + +<p>"Rather!" French replied. "Now, if you'll pull this ambitious young man +off my back, I'll get into an easier position."</p> + +<p>"You're a good fellow," Jack said, "and I'll do as you say, only you've +got to behave yourself, you know."</p> + +<p>French, looking as calm as when he had held the upper hand, arose and +seated himself on the bridge deck, looking Ned over keenly as he did so.</p> + +<p>"You didn't figure on getting into a mix-up with a lot of wild animals, +did you?" asked Ned, with a smile. "These two Black Bears gave you quite +a squeeze, eh?"</p> + +<p>"Rather!" was the short reply. "Say, gentlemen," he went on, "if you'll +kindly step to one side I'll time that Filipino as he plows through the +jungle. I can't see him, but I can see the bushes make way for him. +Believe me, at this time to-morrow he'll still be running!"</p> + +<p>"He went up in the air some!" Pat said. "How did you ever do that, +Cully? He shot up into the blue and then dove straight down into the +bottom. Most wonderful thing I ever saw."</p> + +<p>"That," answered Frank, with a grin, "was a Boy Scout hint that his +presence was not needed here."</p> + +<p>"This," said Jimmie, pointing to Pat, "is Pat Mack, the loafer we were +talkin' about the other night. He placed the signals in grass. You +wouldn't think to look at him, that he was very bright, except his hair, +but he is quite intelligent at times."</p> + +<p>Jimmie dodged as Pat made for him and promptly fell overboard. The boys +fished him out and Frank scolded him for mussing up the cockpit!</p> + +<p>"The little rascal deserved it," said Pat. "I'm deserving of a more +formal introduction, being of the Wolf Patrol, of the city of New York."</p> + +<p>"Huh!" said Jimmie. "I found him tied up like a calf in a butcher's +wagon, and had to cut him loose. Then Ned found him in the teeth of a +dog an' had to shoot the dog! I don't think he's so much-a-much!"</p> + +<p>Shouts were now heard coming from the jungle, and it became evident that +the guard who had been thrown out of the boat had encountered others who +were proceeding to the bay to inspect the wonderful prize secured by +French, as reported by the Filipinos sent away the night before.</p> + +<p>Ned suggested to Jack that he get the <i>Manhattan</i> under motion at once, +as she lay within easy reaching distance of the shore. Jack replaced the +wires in the jar and the propeller was soon singing a merry tune to the +waters of the bay.</p> + +<p>"You got the engine in order quick!" French suggested.</p> + +<p>"Of course," Jack replied. "Did you have any idea that I would help you +steal our Uncle Sam's boat?"</p> + +<p>"Take to your heels," Ned directed, as soon as the boat was fairly out +of the little harbor. "It won't take long for the news to get to the +other boats, and they will, of course, pursue us. Can they overtake us?" +he asked, turning to French.</p> + +<p>"They can make about fifteen miles an hour," was the reply. "What can +you make?"</p> + +<p>"Rather more than that, under pressure," was the reply.</p> + +<p>French sat easily on the bridge deck as the <i>Manhattan</i> glided away. He +appeared to be as thoroughly satisfied with the situation as when he was +the captor instead of the captive. When Frank related the story of the +night, in his presence, he laughed and asked for the wigwag code which +Frank had used.</p> + +<p>"So that is the meeting of the chiefs?" Ned asked. "They are there to +sign the treaty of rebellion?"</p> + +<p>"Something of the sort," was the reply. "At least, they were there to +pass upon the treaty. Now, they'll duck. That is, they will if you boys +succeed in getting away from them."</p> + +<p>"Do you know where they will go?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Look here," French said, "I'm not in a position to tell you anything +about what they may or may not do. I rather like you boys, and I'd tell +you all I know if I could do so decently. But I can't. To be frank with +you, I'm wishing you'll outrun the boats that will come after you. I +have had my pay for what I've done for the rebels, and the money is +buried with a friend at Hong Kong. I don't care about meeting them +again, to tell you the truth, and this being captured is an easy way out +of it. Now, I'll give you my parole not to try to get away, not to try +any tricks, if you let me walk about as I please."</p> + +<p>"He's all right!" Jack put in. "He's a good fellow, all right. I vote +that we give him his freedom."</p> + +<p>"Here, too!" cried Frank.</p> + +<p>"But I don't want my freedom!" French said. "At least not until you can +land me where these pirate chiefs can't get hold of me. I imagine they +would blame me for the trouble they're in."</p> + +<p>"They are meeting to sign the treaty of rebellion," Ned said. "Now, +perhaps you can tell me when the war is to begin?"</p> + +<p>"Right away."</p> + +<p>"Who drew the treaty?" asked the boy.</p> + +<p>"Some chap high up!" laughed French.</p> + +<p>"And who has possession of it?"</p> + +<p>"There are two keys to the box. One is held by the author of the +treaty."</p> + +<p>"And the other?" asked Ned with a knowing smile.</p> + +<p>"By the American in charge of the party on the island," answered French. +"Let me tell you this, though," he added, "you'll never see the treaty, +even if you win. Also, you'll never know the name of the author of it, +or the name of the man who has the second key to the treaty box. You've +found out something about the conspiracy against the government, but +you'll never know who organized it, or why!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<h3>A HOT NIGHT IN YOKOHAMA.</h3> + + +<p>Ned Nestor stood on the deck of the steamship, and the steamship was +entering the harbor of Yokohama, which opens from Tokyo bay, the bay +from the Sagani Sea, the sea from the Pacific ocean. In the cabin of the +steamship were Frank Shaw, Jack Bosworth and Jimmie McGraw. While Ned +looked over the city they were approaching the three boys came to his +side.</p> + +<p>None of them had ever looked upon a Japanese city before. The scene +before them was one well calculated to excite their interest and appeal +to their imagination. The fishing junks sailing over the glassy waters +of the bay did not seem at all like any fishing boats they had ever seen +before.</p> + +<p>The colored wooden roofs of the town seemed to have been cut out from a +picture book of fairy tales. The narrow streets in sight from the deck +seemed steep and not too straight. The buildings seemed to lap over on +each other. To the west, standing straight up in the sky, as it seemed, +loomed the pile of Oyama mountain. To the north showed the roofs of +Kanagawa.</p> + +<p>Night fell while they gazed at the unfamiliar scene, and the lanterns on +the sampans, bound for the customs <i>hatoba</i>, glistened over the bay like +fireflies. The shampooer's whistles drifted out on the offshore breeze.</p> + +<p>"Doesn't look much like coming into little old New York!" Frank +exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"Queer lookin' country!" Jimmie added.</p> + +<p>"I'd rather be back in the <i>Manhattan</i>, among the islands north of +Luzon," Jack observed. "I don't like this smell of the Orient they talk +so much about."</p> + +<p>"Not much Orient about this!" Ned said.</p> + +<p>"I hope we'll get out of it before long," Jack went on. "I'm hungry for +the wash of the China Sea."</p> + +<p>"We'll have a little China Sea made for you, an' tuck it away in Central +Park," Jimmie laughed.</p> + +<p>"All right!" replied Jack. "I wonder why some one didn't think of that +before! Fine scheme!"</p> + +<p>On leaving the bay where such an eventful night had been passed, the +boys had driven the <i>Manhattan</i> at full speed directly to Manila. The +boat was rather small for such a trip, but it had behaved nobly, and the +lads had enjoyed the trip immensely.</p> + +<p>They had for a time been pursued by the launches which had anchored on +the opposite side of the little island, but the chase had soon been +abandoned, as the <i>Manhattan</i> was the fastest boat of the three.</p> + +<p>On the way to Manila, Ned had held several long conversations with +French, but had gained little information from him. He corroborated what +little was known regarding the conspiracy for the establishing of a +native government on the Philippines, but would not reveal what he knew +of the interests interested or of the men at the head of the movement.</p> + +<p>At Manila, French had been released on parole at the urgent request of +Frank and Jack, who had formed a liking for the courteous gentleman who +had treated them so kindly during the few hours he had been their +jailer. French, however, had promised to remain at Manila and to report +daily at military headquarters.</p> + +<p>"I don't understand what his share in the plot is, or has been," Ned had +explained, "but it is evident that he will be needed only as a witness."</p> + +<p>At Manila Ned had held a long conference with Major John Ross, and that +gentleman had seemed overjoyed at the report the boy had presented, +especially as it made his return to the group of islands to the north +unnecessary. After remaining in Manila one day and a night, Ned had been +directed to continue his investigation of the case in his own way.</p> + +<p>To tell the truth, Major John Ross and the military men with whom Ned +conferred at Manila treated the employment of the boy by the authorities +at Washington as a good deal of a joke, as a whim. They were not +discourteous to Ned, but they took no interest in his suggestions. For +some hours after his departure, his employment on the case was the +subject of many sarcastic remarks.</p> + +<p>However, those in charge had consented to hold the <i>Manhattan</i> subject +to his orders, and had promised to give any communications received from +him due attention. And this was the situation when the boy, following +clues secured at the nipa hut and hints obtained from Pat, who had kept +his ears open during his captivity, and from French, had sailed away for +Japan with his chums on a steamer which was leaving Manila for Yokohama. +Pat Mack, released from service by the effort of Major Ross, at his own +request, had been left at Manila in charge of the <i>Manhattan</i>.</p> + +<p>The boys landed shortly after dark and proceeded to a hotel where the +English language or something like it was spoken. Everything was new and +strange, the place being as unlike a Broadway hotel as it is possible to +imagine. However, the meals were served in half-American fashion, and +the rooms were tolerably comfortable.</p> + +<p>"Now," Ned said, after their first meal in Yokohama was over, "we did +not come here to visit the palaces of the wealthy, or to inspect the +United States consulate. We've got to get down into the slums a bit if +we find what I want. The man who led the party that captured Lieutenant +Rowe was sent away as soon as he got to his masters. You doubtless +understand why. They did not want him implicated in the plot."</p> + +<p>"How do you know?" asked Jimmie. "You didn't see him go, did you?"</p> + +<p>"Then he must be up some," Jack said.</p> + +<p>"And he left Manila on a boat bound for Yokohama," Frank added. "I know +about that, for French gave me a valuable tip. And he was accompanied by +an American sailor with a thirst for strong drink."</p> + +<p>"I guess you've got the idea, all right," Ned said, with a smile. "But I +did not state the case exactly as it is. I said that the man who led the +party against Lieutenant Rowe was sent away. I should have said that the +man suspected of having been at the head of that expedition had +mysteriously disappeared from Manila on the very day of his return there +after an absence unaccounted for, and that it was believed he had taken +a steamer for Yokohama. I stated my conclusions as facts."</p> + +<p>"And there was an American sailor with him," insisted Frank.</p> + +<p>"Yes, an, American sailor who evidently knew too much. At least, that is +the way I figure it out. Now, we are not looking for this high-brow at +this time, but for the American sailor."</p> + +<p>"That makes it all the pleasanter!" Jack said. "We'll have a chance to +see life in Japan as it is. I'd feel better about this little outing, +though, if I knew just what has become of Lieutenant Rowe."</p> + +<p>"I often wish we had tried to release him," Ned replied, "but we were +lucky to get off with whole hides. Anyway, Pat says they were to release +him in a short time, after the plot is perfected. All they wanted was +his dispatches, and they will hold him captive only because his release +might lead to the premature discovery of the meeting of chiefs on the +island."</p> + +<p>"Well, let us get busy with the underworld of Japan," Jack said. "I'll +bet we find plenty of American sailors with thirsts."</p> + +<p>On a dark night in Yokohama the houses in the section visited by the +boys look very much alike. They are drygoods box affairs, two stories +high, with peaked roofs, paper walls and narrow piazzas. All the shops +are looking for the American sailor.</p> + +<p>Ned secured an interpreter, and the boys strolled through a dozen or +more cheap joints before they came to a halt and sat down. The places +were all alike. There was split matting on the floors, always, and +sailors drinking at little tables. There was always a fair grade of tea, +always <i>sake</i>, always a wheezy graphophone.</p> + +<p>One might also buy whiskey, ale and other intoxicating drinks. And there +were also the <i>geisha</i> dances and the <i>nesans</i> running up stairs and +down with their little white socks and flowery skirts, carrying +refreshments. There were also men in <i>kimonos</i> and cowboy hats, the +former to give the Japanese color and the latter to inform customers +that the American trade was catered to!</p> + +<p>"How you goin' to know this American sailor when you find him?" asked +Jimmie, as the boys sat with steaming cups of tea before them.</p> + +<p>"I have his photograph," laughed Ned.</p> + +<p>"Let's see it!" cried Jack.</p> + +<p>"I'll bet it's a mental photograph!" Jimmie went on. "That is the only +kind Ned carries."</p> + +<p>"What does he look like?" asked Frank.</p> + +<p>"Yes; tell us. We may see him first!" urged Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"He's short, and very broad across the shoulders, with one shoulder +lower than the other. He is quite bald, and there is a cicatrice on his +left cheek where a Malay cut him. There is a squint in one of his eyes, +and there is a scar along the ball of his right thumb."</p> + +<p>"Quit your kiddin'!" said Jimmie. "You never saw him."</p> + +<p>"Pat saw him," was the reply, "and French and some of the military +people at Manila saw him. He left with the man whose acquaintance I want +to make, or just before him."</p> + +<p>"Seems like looking for a needle in a haymow," Frank said, "but I'll +wager my hat against a swipe in the jaw that we find him."</p> + +<p>"'We!'" repeated Jimmie, with due scorn.</p> + +<p>"For instance," Frank said, "what do you think of the fellow over there +talking with the man in the <i>kimono</i> and the derby hat of the vintage of +1880?"</p> + +<p>"He's short and broad, and one of his shoulders is higher than the +other," Jimmie replied.</p> + +<p>"Don't attract his attention," Ned warned. "He sat there when we came +in, and does not seem to notice us."</p> + +<p>"You goin' to geezle him?" asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"If he were in Manila I certainly should," was the answer, "but it would +never answer here. Look!" the lad added. "He seems to be having trouble +with one of the waiters."</p> + +<p>"He's gone broke, I guess," Jimmie said, "an' there's a kick on his +bill."</p> + +<p>"An American friend would look pretty good to him now," Ned said +thoughtfully.</p> + +<p>There was in the mind of the boy a thought that circumstances were +favoring him. If he could only befriend the man!</p> + +<p>"You don't suppose the fellow he came here with left him in the lurch, +do you?" asked Jimmie, something like Ned's thought coming to him. "If +he did, why—"</p> + +<p>"That's what I've been thinking," Ned replied, "Anyway, I'm going over +there and have a talk with him."</p> + +<p>"Before you blow yourself on him," laughed Jimmie, "look at the ball of +his right thumb an' see if there's a scar there!"</p> + +<p>"If he's a sailorman from New York," Jack put in, "he'll eat corn out of +your hand, like a billy goat! Go on and talk with him, Ned."</p> + +<p>Ned arose to his feet and moved toward the table where the sailor sat. +Then he turned back to the boys again.</p> + +<p>"If I go away with him," he said, "don't attempt to follow us. Go back +to the hotel and wait for me. You understand, now, Jimmie? No chasing +out after me! This is not New York!"</p> + +<p>"I'll be good!" replied the boy, with a wink at Jack.</p> + +<p>"You bet you will!" replied Jack, seizing him by the sleeve. "You don't +get away from me to-night. Too much trouble looking you up!"</p> + +<p>"What are we to do with that blooming interpreter?" asked Frank, +motioning to the Jap, who sat a short distance away, where he could not +overhear the talk.</p> + +<p>"Take him back to the hotel with you," was the reply, "and hold him +there until I come."</p> + +<p>There was no little excitement around the table where the sailor sat +when Ned approached it. The sailor was talking in English, the waiter +was talking in his native tongue, and the bystanders were trying to tell +each one what the other was saying.</p> + +<p>Ned made out from the pigeon English brought forth by the bystanders +that the sailor had run up a large bill and was unable to pay it.</p> + +<p>"P'lice come!" one of the officious ones said.</p> + +<p>The sailor heard the words and stirred uneasily in his seat. After +wiggling about for a moment he removed his cap and scratched a bald head +thoughtfully. Ned advanced to his side and laid a hand on his arm, +whereat the sailor squirmed as if he anticipated immediate arrest.</p> + +<p>"What's the trouble, pard?" the boy asked.</p> + +<p>The sailor sat back in his chair and regarded Ned with evident suspicion +for a moment, then, observing that his interrogator was only a boy, he +extended his hand, his bleary eyes showing the pleasure he felt at the +meeting.</p> + +<p>"You look mighty good to me!" he said, in the tone and manner of a man +who had had educational advantages.</p> + +<p>"What's the difficulty?" repeated Ned, taking the hard hand of the +other. "I saw the commotion here and thought you might be in trouble. +You're an American, I take it?"</p> + +<p>"Proud to say yes to that!" replied the other.</p> + +<p>"Well, what are they trying to do to you?" asked Ned, taking a chair by +his side. "Americans must stand back to back when they meet in a place +like this!"</p> + +<p>"They don't all do that," was the reply. "My pardner got me here and +shook me. I'm broke, and that's all there is to it. Kept buying after I +had spent all my money. I guess it is the coop for mine!"</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we can fix it up in some way," Ned said. "I'm not a +millionaire, but I may be able to help you out. How much do you owe?"</p> + +<p>"About two dollars in American money," was the reply. "It is a small +sum, but I'm your slave for life if you get me out of this. Ever spend a +day in a Japanese jail, waiting for the American consul to get you out?"</p> + +<p>"Never did," was the reply. "How are you fixed for lodgings?"</p> + +<p>"Got a room up over a tea house," was the reply. "I'm looking for a ship +that will take me back to New York."</p> + +<p>"Well," Ned said, "I'll pay this bill and go home with you for the +night. I'll need free lodgings somewhere after I settle!"</p> + +<p>"You'll be as welcome as the flowers of May!" the sailor said, and the +boys, still sitting where Ned had left them, saw him hand the waiter +some money and leave the place with the sailor.</p> + +<p>A moment later, however, they saw a keen-eyed Jap come rushing through +the door and up to the table where the sailor had been seated. He talked +with the waiter a moment, speaking angrily at last, and darted out of +the door again.</p> + +<p>"That fellow came after the sailor," Frank said, "and will follow him. +When he finds Ned working him for his story he won't do a thing to Ned!"</p> + +<p>"An' we'll go back to the hotel, like good little boys, an' sit there +knittin' while they pinch Ned an' chuck him into the bay! Not for your +uncle!"</p> + +<p>"We'd make a hit wandering about Yokohama in the night!" Jack said. "I +reckon Ned can take care of himself. Anyway, he's had to go and find you +every time you've gone out without him."</p> + +<p>But before Jack had finished Jimmie had jerked away and was out in the +street.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<h3>A FAIRY HISTORY OF JAPAN.</h3> + + +<p>The shop in which Ned had discovered the object of his search was well +down toward the water front, and the course of the sailor was now toward +the center of the city. The two passed the customs quarters and the +official offices of the city—Yokohama is the old-time treaty port of +Japan—and so on to wide streets lined with shops, still alight, though +the hour was getting late.</p> + +<p>Such quaint little shops Ned had never seen before, and more than once +he stopped to look at lacquered ware of rare quality, bronze work, and +fancy embroidery. Directly the sailor led the way from the wide streets +to the old-time narrow ones in the native quarter, which were not far +from the old canal which virtually makes an island of the town.</p> + +<p>After proceeding, with hesitating steps, down a particularly dark and +foul-smelling street, the sailor paused at a corner, glanced up at a +window in a tea-chest of a house which stood flush with the alley-like +thoroughfare, and began the ascent of a flight of stairs which swayed +under his weight.</p> + +<p>On the corner below the tea-house was still open, and the invariable +graphophone was grinding out some indistinguishable tune. When the two +passed up the dark stairway an attendant slipped out of the public room, +walked to the foot of the stairs, and observed the two mounting figures. +When the sailor opened the door to as miserable a room as the sun of the +Orient ever shone on, the attendant slipped back to the public room and +conferred with a keen-eyed, slender man who sat there—a man garbed in +the native costume, but bearing in manner and face the stamp of a +European!</p> + +<p>The sailor closed the door of his room and set a match to a candle which +he found on a shelf hanging to a wall. There was nothing in the room, +nothing but mats, as it seemed to Ned. There was no table, no chair. +Only the mats to sit on and sleep on. The walls were of paper, and Ned +saw with pleasure that the whole front of the room, which faced the +alley, might be rolled up at will!</p> + +<p>The sailor dropped on the floor and fumbled in his clothing for a +cigarette.</p> + +<p>"Have you got the makings?" he asked, giving up the search at last.</p> + +<p>Ned shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I have need of all my wits," he said, "and never befuddle my brain with +tobacco. It's the curse of the age."</p> + +<p>"I've got to have a cigarette," the sailor said. "I'll go crazy if I +don't have one! I won't sleep a wink, either!" he whined.</p> + +<p>Ned handed him a dime and pointed to the door.</p> + +<p>"Go and buy some," he said, knowing that the fellow would be in fighting +mood if he was not supplied with the narcotic. "Come back here and +smoke."</p> + +<p>The sailor looked at the dime sorrowfully, scorning the small piece of +silver because it wasn't a dollar, as Ned concluded—pitying himself, +too, because it would not buy what he wanted most—liquor!</p> + +<p>Ned handed him a quarter and bade him hasten back. With the man's nerves +crying out for accustomed stimulants, the boy knew that he could do +nothing with him. He must get him into a companionable mood if possible. +He dreaded the night, which seemed about to be passed in the fumes of +tobacco and liquor, but there was no help for it that he could see.</p> + +<p>Presently the sailor came back with a package of cigarettes, gin in a +bottle, and a jug of water. He arranged the articles in a half-circle +about him when he sat down on a mat. It seemed pitiful to the boy, the +sailor's dependence on the nerve-destroying things he looked upon as +necessary to his comfort. Only for these, only for their constant use +for years, the man might have been honored and respected and possessed a +home among his kind instead of being an object of contempt in a foreign +port.</p> + +<p>"Here's to the Flowery Kingdom!" the sailor said, the bottle at his +lips. "Here's life to you, not existence! What's your name?" he added, +stopping in the midst of a grin which wrinkled his dissipated face +horribly to cast a glance of suspicion on the boy sitting in pity before +him. "My name," he added, without waiting for Ned to reply to his +question, "is Brown—B-R-O-W-N."</p> + +<p>"Glad to make your acquaintance, Mr. Brown," Ned said. "One is always +glad to meet Americans in a place like this. Now," he went on, resolved +to have his talk out before the sailor became too befuddled to talk +coherently, "you spoke about wanting to get back to New York. Well, the +<i>Fultonia</i> leaves for New York by way of Manila, to-morrow afternoon, +and I may be able to arrange a passage for you. I'm a friend of the +captain's."</p> + +<p>"Not on your life! Not by way of Manila!" the sailor cried. "I wouldn't +go back to Manila for all the gold there is in Standard Oil! I'm going +to lose myself on a wind-jammer! Manila's unhealthy for me!" he added +with a wink.</p> + +<p>"I wasn't thinking of remaining there," said Ned. "I'm going back to New +York."</p> + +<p>"Wind-jammer for mine!" Brown insisted. "Why," he added, swinging his +bottle of gin in the air, "do you know that I'd like to get inside a +boat with wide white wings and sail about the Orient forever! The more I +mix with Englishmen and Americans the more I think of the Japs. It was +an American that threw me down to-night. I did something for him, and—"</p> + +<p>The sailor paused, gave a slight shiver, and looked down at his right +hand. Then he brushed it, as if trying to wipe something away that was +obstinate and hard to get rid of—some stain like the stain of blood!</p> + +<p>"And he left you stranded?" Ned continued "I'm glad I happened along," +he added, not caring to say how glad he was, nor how much the meeting +might mean to him!</p> + +<p>"I did his dirty work!" the sailor went on, his tongue loosened by the +liquor. "I did for him what I never did before, what I never will do +again! And he went back on me! He threw me down! I'd like to meet him on +Roosevelt street, New York! I'd provide against his throwing anyone else +down!"</p> + +<p>"What did you do for him?" Ned asked, with as innocent a manner as he +could assume.</p> + +<p>"That's my business!" Brown answered, with a sly wink. "That's between +the two of us! If I had him here I'd cut his heart out, and show you how +black it is."</p> + +<p>The sailor was fast coming under the influence of the gin, and Ned knew +that he must keep him talking or he would drop off into drugged slumber. +He sounded him on half a dozen subjects, intending to lead him back to +the man's connection with the plot, but he would not talk until the +subject of Japan was brought up. He seemed to be infatuated with the +Flowery Kingdom.</p> + +<p>"I know the history of Japan," he said, with a brightening of the eyes. +"In the beginning, the world was like an egg in shape. The white became +heaven, and the yolk became earth. You may read about it yourself in the +book called "<i>The Way of the Gods</i>." Then two Gods descended from +heaven, and a son called Omikami was born to them, and his body was so +bright that he flew up into the sky and became the sun.</p> + +<p>"What do you think of that? He became the sun. And a daughter was born +to the two Gods, and she became the moon. The moon you see when the sun +goes down. Then the children that were born after these became strong +and founded the Empire of Japan. And the original inhabitants were hairy +on the body and ate raw meat. You see I know all about it!"</p> + +<p>"And Japan may in time acquire all Asia," Ned said, desiring to lead the +sailor back to within reaching distance of the subject he was most +interested in. "In time the Philippines may belong to Japan."</p> + +<p>The sailor winked at Ned mysteriously and flourished his bottle of gin.</p> + +<p>"I know!" he cried. "I know! If Japan gets the Philippines she'll have +to fight a thousand tribes and the monkeys in the trees! She'll have to +fight also the crocodiles in the brooks. 'I could a tale unfold whose +lightest word would harrow up thy soul—cause thy two eyes, like stars, +to start from their spheres, and thy—.' Say," he said with a laugh, +"what do you think of me anyway? You think I've got a jag on, don't you. +Never was soberer in my innocent life!"</p> + +<p>"If you'll describe this man that threw you down," Ned said, anxious to +have done with the by-play, "and tell me where to look for him, I'll go +and see what I can do for you. How much was he to give you?"</p> + +<p>"Barrels!"</p> + +<p>The sailor paused and stretched his hands above his head, the bottle +glistening in one of them. "He was to pile the greenbacks up so +high—for me to wade in, and wipe my feet on. You can't find him."</p> + +<p>There was a stealthy movement on the stairs, and a movement not so +stealthy at the door. Ned heard a hand moving over the bamboo, and made +ready for a spring. He had no idea who the visitor might be, but his +manner of approach showed him to be no friend of the sailor's.</p> + +<p>There were no more sounds at the door, and Ned glanced casually in that +direction. The candle on the wobbling shelf gave forth little light, and +that seemed to grow more shadows than rays of illumination. The shadows +seemed deepest and most uncertain of form at the door, but, at the +center of the odd-shape panel in the middle of the door he thought he +saw a malevolent eye looking forth into the room.</p> + +<p>He wondered if an eye was really there, or if, his imagination stirred +by the weird scene and the fairy history of Japan which the sailor had +repeated, he was seeing things not present to the senses!</p> + +<p>In a moment there was no doubt, for the malevolent eye left the aperture +and there was again a fumbling at the door. Ned made no motion, but sat +as if unconscious of any intruder being there. He knew that the person +at the door was there to watch the sailor, to see that he did not talk +too much, to see that he did not leave Yokohama until the trap of +treason had been fully set and baited.</p> + +<p>There was no doubt in the mind of the boy now that he had found the man +he had set out in quest of. Of course the man who had planned the +conspiracy, who was doubtless assisting the tribes to arms and +ammunition by way of the unpatrolled China Sea, was the one he aimed to +reach in time. The sailor was only a link in the chain which led to the +object sought.</p> + +<p>The mind of the boy was not at that time much concerned with thoughts +for his own safety although he could never be in more deadly peril than +he was at that moment when he was looked at through the opening in the +door. His one idea was to get a view of the spy, and with this object in +view he arose and stepped toward the door.</p> + +<p>"You're getting sleepy," he said to the sailor, "and I'll go out and get +a little fresh air while you sleep. I shall not be far away."</p> + +<p>"You're a good fellow," Brown cried, already half asleep. "When I get +out of this I'll tell you something that'll make your fortune. Bring +back another bottle of gin. Thish mos' gone!"</p> + +<p>Ned stood by the door for a moment in order to give the spy time to get +back to the bottom of the stairs. He could see no profit in a struggle +in that place, and there was certain to be one if he permitted the spy +to know that his movements had been observed.</p> + +<p>Finally he heard soft footsteps on the stairs. He waited only an instant +after this before passing out into the narrow hall. The staircase was +clear, but a door opening into it from the public room below was open +and a broad zone of light lay on the floor of the passage and on the +wall.</p> + +<p>Ned stood in the doorway and looked out on the street, now and then +turning his eyes in the direction of the public room. At a table well +toward the back end of the place he saw the man he was looking for. He +was seated at a table with two men who appeared to be American sailors. +While he stood there, wondering at the inefficiency of the disguise the +man wore, at the nerve which prompted him to wear that fragment of +native costume when his face, manner and accent bespoke the cultured +American another sailor came swaggering into the place.</p> + +<p>This sailor was unquestionably intoxicated. He swayed back and forth as +he walked, and would have fallen to the floor at the very door only for +the restraining hand of a boy who accompanied him. Immediately on his +appearance waiters rushed forward to attend to his wants, to give him a +chair and a table, and to pay him all sorts of little attentions.</p> + +<p>In such places in all foreign ports the American sailor is the easy +mark. He drinks—when he drinks at all—until he is past all wisdom +regarding the expenditure of money, with the result that he literally +throws it away. In the appearance of this sailor the attendants saw a +rich harvest, not only for the place but for themselves.</p> + +<p>But Ned saw more than this. He saw the freckled face and sparkling eyes +of Jimmie McGraw, steering the drunken sailor to the table pointed out +for him. The boy was in high humor, for he joked with the blundering +sailor, and instead of sitting down at the table—brought into use there +because the foreigners insist on not drinking sitting on the floor—he +sat down on it and swung his feet downward.</p> + +<p>"Look at the kid!" one of the men at the table Ned was watching said. +"Looks like he was on South Clark street, Chicago."</p> + +<p>"Don't get gay, now!" Jimmie retorted. "I'm playin' I'm a tug towin' +this 'ere sailorman to bed."</p> + +<p>"You've got a job on your hands," the other said, and then the three at +the table bent their heads forward and talked in whispers. Now and then +they faced toward the doorway, but Ned was then too far toward the +street for them to observe him.</p> + +<p>They did not seem at all suspicious of Jimmie, and Ned concluded that +such occurrences were not uncommon there. Jimmie seated his companion +more firmly in his chair in a moment and passed out, stopping at the +doorway where Ned stood.</p> + +<p>"You duck!" the boy said. "That man in there with the sailors followed +you here, an' I followed him here. You duck!"</p> + +<p>"I haven't got the information I'm after yet," Ned said. "How in the +world did you get here?"</p> + +<p>"Followed the chap that followed you," was the quick reply. "Out here I +come upon that beery sailor and took him in tow!"</p> + +<p>"Good idea," Ned said. "Now, you slip past me and go up stairs, to the +room in front, and see if the man there can be gotten away. I want to +size up the men in there. I can see them by poking my head out +occasionally, but they can't see me."</p> + +<p>"Well, you keep your gun ready," Jimmie warned. "This ain't New York, +with a cop every half block an' a taxicab always within reach. This is +Yokohama! Don't you forget that!"</p> + +<p>"Don't remain up there long!" said Ned.</p> + +<p>Jimmie hastened away, and Ned stood leaning against the casing of the +doorway. Then Jimmie came down the stairs at a jump, making no pretense +of secrecy, and behind him there was a rush of feet and a jumble of +foreign words.</p> + +<p>The three men Ned had been watching sprang up from their table and +dashed toward the front of the place, and all was confusion in an +instant. The sailor who had come in with Jimmie attempted to lean +carelessly back in his chair and toppled over on the floor, where he lay +with the slippered feet of the attendants striking him in their rush for +the door.</p> + +<p>"Run!" Jimmie cried as he approached Ned. "Hot foot! The man you sent me +to is dead, and there's a bunch of ruffians after us. Run! Beat it!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<h3>PAT TAKES A BIG CHANCE.</h3> + + +<p>The <i>Manhattan</i> glided like a duck over the waters of the Bashee +Channel, South of the Island of Formosa. A week had passed since that +night in Yokohama, and Ned and Jimmie were back among the islands north +of Luzon.</p> + +<p>It had been a close shave that night, for the boys had been only a few +feet ahead of their pursuers when they were fortunate enough to come +upon a party of American marines on shore leave. The marines had +gathered about the panting boys and finally, after fighting off the +Japs, conducted them to their hotel. The last Ned saw of the man whom he +believed to be an American military man in the disguise of a Jap he was +running in a most undignified manner down the street, as if not willing +to look upon the uniforms of the marines. The next morning he had caught +a glimpse of the fellow, but had not been able to get close to him. On +the day before he left for Manila the man had left the port. Ned was of +the opinion that he had traveled on to Manila, and so on to the group of +islands which the <i>Manhattan</i> was now nosing among.</p> + +<p>At Manila Ned had again conferred with Major John Ross, and that +dignified official had virtually dismissed the boy from the service. He +had scolded him for going over to Yokohama and for stirring up a mess +there, as he put it, between a party of hilarious marines and the local +police.</p> + +<p>However, Ned did not accept dismissal. Instead of remaining at Manila, +as ordered to do, until word could be received from Washington, he +joined Pat in the motor boat, provisioned her for a long cruise, and set +out to locate the island which was to see the signing of the treaty +between the tribes of the Philippines—the treaty which was certain to +bring war and starvation to the islands.</p> + +<p>He was sure the treaty had not yet been signed, and he could not +understand the delay. It did not seem possible that his appearance at +the island first chosen for the meeting could have caused so long a wait +in the important negotiations. He had suspicions at times that the +disappearance from the scene of the men he had followed to Yokohama had +had something to do with the delay.</p> + +<p>In looking over the results of the trip to the Japanese city, Ned was +fairly well satisfied with them. He believed that he had caught a +glimpse of the man who was at the head of the plot against the United +States. When he considered that the sailor who had complained so +bitterly of the manner in which he had been treated had been murdered in +his room while the suspect sat below in disguise, he did not doubt that +the crime had been committed by paid assassins for the purpose of +enforcing secrecy.</p> + +<p>On the whole he was well pleased with the progress of the case. He had +made his discoveries by deviating from the paths usually followed by +investigators, but he believed that he held the right clues in his +hands. It remained for him now to find the island where the treaty was +to be signed and await developments.</p> + +<p>It was sure that if the king-pins of the conspiracy could be captured +the whole fabric would fall to the ground. He believed that large sums +of money were being used, though he could not tell where the cash was +coming from. Sometimes he thought commercial interests guilty of the +reckless thing that was being done. Sometimes he thought the plot +original with the foxy prime minister of some nation looking for +additional possessions in the Orient.</p> + +<p>At Manila he had learned that Lieutenant Rowe had been restored to +liberty, badly wounded, but in a fair way to recover. The Lieutenant, +however could do little to assist the investigation, as he had learned +little during his captivity, had not been permitted to see the leading +spirits. As Ned had believed from the first, the men who attacked him +were not inclined to do murder unnecessarily. All they sought was the +sealed orders carried by the officer and the man who had followed on +after him and entered unceremoniously through the window.</p> + +<p>One thing Ned could not understand was the matter of the despatches +handed the Lieutenant by the man who had entered the nipa hut in so +strange a manner, shortly after midnight on the night of the attack. +These instructions, according to reports, countermanded the ones +Lieutenant Rowe had received in person at Manila, and would have turned +him back without conferring with Major Ross or the lads he had with him.</p> + +<p>The fourth man had declared, when seen by by Ned at Manila, that he had +managed to follow on the heels of the Lieutenant with the supplemental +instructions, and had reached the island at midnight. He said that he +had entered by way of the window because the front of the house seemed +to be watched with hostile intent, and because there was a ladder there +ready to his hand.</p> + +<p>This story seemed a little fishy to Ned, but he had no means of proving +that the man was not telling the truth. The fellow certainly had been +given despatches to deliver to Lieutenant Rowe, with orders to follow +him and place them in his hands personally. But the instructions +received by the Lieutenant were not, it was asserted, the ones sent to +him.</p> + +<p>The supplemental instructions would have taken him back to Manila at +once, as has been said, without conferring with Major Ross and the +assistants he had brought with him. It was insisted at the military +office that the instructions sent out had increased rather than +diminished the Lieutenant's authority to act.</p> + +<p>One of two things seemed to be true. Either there was a traitor in the +office, or the instructions had been changed. The envelope might have +been shifted after reaching the man's hands or he might have substituted +the counterfeit ones for the original ones. In this latter case the +messenger was himself a traitor, and would bear watching.</p> + +<p>Ned would have liked nothing better than to have remained in Manila for +the purpose of investigating this phase of the case, but he believed +that the mystery would be solved eventually where the work was being +done—on the ground with the native tribes which were being urged into +revolt. So he had provisioned the <i>Manhattan</i> and, much to the joy of +the boys, headed for the group of islands north of Luzon.</p> + +<p>It was glorious there in the channel, with the green islands lifting +from the lacquered sea, bluer than any sky the lads had ever seen. From +the bow of the <i>Manhattan</i> spread two thin emerald lines curling +transparently and tipped with foam. Upon the immensity of the sea there +would be for hours no other movement, and upon the immensity of the sky +there would not be a fleck of cloud. At night the boys slept in their +bunks with the waves whispering to the sand of some sheltered bay.</p> + +<p>"I hope we'll never find the island where the treaty is to be signed," +Jack said, one morning. "I'd like to stay here forever."</p> + +<p>"Why don't you build a hut on one of the islands and stay there, then?" +asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"I guess you'd soon get weary of doin' the Robinson Crusoe act an' get +back to the Great White Way!"</p> + +<p>"I'm not looking for life in the jungle," Jack replied. "The water is +good enough for me."</p> + +<p>One morning when the <i>Manhattan</i> lay in a bay on the eastern shore of an +island of good size and Jack proposed a trip to the shore.</p> + +<p>"There's game up there," he said, pointing to an elevation not far from +the beach. "Unless I'm very much mistaken there is a line of hills on +the other side of this bit of land, with a valley in between the two. If +this is right, that valley will be well stocked with game, and I'm +getting hungry for fresh meat."</p> + +<p>"There's surely one class of animal life there," Frank said. "Hear the +monkeys! They must be holding some kind of a convention!"</p> + +<p>While the boys were talking Ned came out of the cabin with his glass. He +gazed landward for a long time and then handed the glass to Jack.</p> + +<p>"There's something stirring up the little chaps," he said.</p> + +<p>"They're always wigglin' like a basket of snakes," Jimmie observed.</p> + +<p>"Sounds like they were calling the police," Frank put in.</p> + +<p>"I'll tell you about it when I return," Jack said. "If there's anything +grand, gloomy or peculiar over there I'll be sure to find it. Want to go +along with me, little boy?" he added, turning to Jimmie, who at once +resented this manner of address by trying to push Jack overboard.</p> + +<p>"Of course I'm goin'," Jimmie declared, giving over his benevolent +intentions with regard to Jack. "I reckon you'll get lost if you go six +yards away from the <i>Manhattan</i> alone."</p> + +<p>"Run along, both of you!" Ned said. "And don't get into trouble. We've +got no time to waste looking up runaway boys."</p> + +<p>"If the native tribes are holding a convention there," Frank said, as +the boys slipped into the boat which they were to row ashore, "just give +them my compliments and ask them to dinner."</p> + +<p>For some moments after the boys reached the white beach and disappeared +in the jungle Ned stood scanning the island with his glass.</p> + +<p>"I half believe the chiefs are there," he said, turning to Frank.</p> + +<p>"Then why did you let the boys go?" asked the latter.</p> + +<p>"I wish now that I hadn't," Ned replied.</p> + +<p>"Say," Pat called out, "I can go and bring 'em back. They can't be very +far away. Shall I?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," was the hesitating reply, "and bring back all the news you can +about what is going on on the island. There's something unusual taking +place there, judging from the row the monkeys are making."</p> + +<p>"How you going to get ashore?" asked Frank. "The boat is over there on +the beach."</p> + +<p>"I'll show you," Pat replied.</p> + +<p>The next moment he was in the water, striking out with lusty strokes for +the shore, only a few rods away.</p> + +<p>"There's a crocodile coming!" Frank called out to him.</p> + +<p>The call was designed to make Pat show a burst of speed, but it did +indeed serve as a warning to the swimmer, for a huge crocodile separated +himself from a point a few paces away and started to make a breakfast of +the boy.</p> + +<p>Pat saw the danger and hesitated an instant, uncertain whether to turn +back to the <i>Manhattan</i> or to strike out for the shore. This second of +hesitation would have cost him his life if Ned had not acted promptly.</p> + +<p>When he saw that the crocodile was sure to win in the race, he fired one +shot and the saurian disappeared beneath the surface of the water, shot +through the eye. Pat turned back to the <i>Manhattan</i>, but Ned directed +him to go on to the shore, find the boys, and return as quickly as +possible.</p> + +<p>"And row back here before you go," continued Ned.</p> + +<p>"And swim to the beach again?" called Pat, glancing cautiously about. +"Not on your whiskers!"</p> + +<p>"Afraid of a little crocodile not more then forty feet long!" laughed +Frank, as Pat reached the beach and entered the boat.</p> + +<p>"Here's the boat," Pat called, in a few moments, touching the bow of the +<i>Manhattan</i>. "What next!"</p> + +<p>"I'm going with you and bring it back," Ned replied. "When you boys +reach the beach you'll have to call out. I'm going to take the +<i>Manhattan</i> out farther."</p> + +<p>"All right!" Pat said. "I think you need to after that shot!"</p> + +<p>"And tell the boys," Ned went on, "that they'll have the chiefs of a +hundred tribes of dog-eaters after them if they don't get to the boat +right quick!"</p> + +<p>"I guess that ought to bring them!" Frank said.</p> + +<p>Ned accompanied Pat to the beach, brought the boat back, and then moved +the <i>Manhattan</i> some distance out in the bay.</p> + +<p>"Do you really think the boys are in danger?" asked Frank, after they +had settled down to a careful watch of the beach.</p> + +<p>"They certainly are," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Do you think the chiefs are really on that island?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; in fact, I am quite certain of it."</p> + +<p>"Oh, a wild cat might have stirred up the monkeys," Frank said, hardly +believing the lame explanation of the disturbances which he was making.</p> + +<p>Ned pointed off to the west.</p> + +<p>"Look there," he said.</p> + +<p>"Can't see a thing."</p> + +<p>"Then take the glass," Ned said.</p> + +<p>"Why," Frank said, "there's smoke over there on the west coast! Now, +what do you think of that? It wasn't there a few minutes ago."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Ned. "It wasn't there a few minutes ago. It puffed up +while I was looking that way."</p> + +<p>"It must be a steam launch," Frank observed.</p> + +<p>"Of course," Ned replied, "and steam has been gotten up since that shot +was fired. Now do you understand?"</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid I do," Frank replied. "And the steamer is coming around here +to see what's going on, and the native chiefs will be coming down to the +bay to look the situation over! Where do the boys come out?"</p> + +<p>"They are in a dangerous position," Ned replied.</p> + +<p>"I hope they'll get here before the steamer turns that point."</p> + +<p>"They will have to return pretty soon if they do," Ned said, looking +again through his glass, "for the steamer is approaching the southern +end of the island rapidly, and will soon be in sight."</p> + +<p>"Can we beat it?" asked Frank.</p> + +<p>"On the run? I'm afraid not. If the boys were here we might stand a +chance of keeping out of their way for a long time, but we've got to +remain here until the last moment in the hope of their returning."</p> + +<p>"You're not thinking of going away and leaving them, are you?" asked +Frank, surprised at Ned's remark.</p> + +<p>"If we stay here and submit to capture," Ned replied, "it is all off for +all of us. If we get away we may be able to render assistance to the +boys, but if we remain here and are killed or taken prisoners there is +little hope for them, surrounded by savages on an unknown island, +without even a boat."</p> + +<p>"Of course you are right," Frank said, "It seems cruel to sail away and +leave them here."</p> + +<p>The steamer, as shown by the column of smoke, was now approaching the +southern end of the island, and would soon be in a position from which +the <i>Manhattan</i> might be seen.</p> + +<p>"If we are going at all," Ned said, with a sigh, "we may as well be +moving. We ought to be able to make the north end by the time they gain +the south end. It will be a game of chase, I reckon. I hope the boys +will understand."</p> + +<p>"They certainly will," replied Frank. "They know well enough we are no +quitters, and that there is usually a good reason for what you do."</p> + +<p>The <i>Manhattan</i> was soon in motion, speeding at the rate of fifteen or +eighteen miles an hour toward the north end of the island. Ned watched +the smoke of the steamer intently as the race progressed. Finally the +point at the north was turned, and, much to the surprise of both boys, +they saw Pat standing on the beach beckoning to them in a manner full of +excitement.</p> + +<p>"There's been something doing," said Frank, with a shiver.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<h3>OF THE WILD CAT PATROL, MANILA.</h3> + + +<p>The smoke from the steamer was now on the south end of the island, +moving along toward the east with a speed which showed Ned that it would +be impossible to outfoot the larger craft.</p> + +<p>There was little time to lose, if the <i>Manhattan</i> was to continue the +flight, and yet it was evident that Pat had something of importance to +communicate or desired to be at once taken on board. Ned did not +hesitate long, for the boy's life might be at stake.</p> + +<p>But when the <i>Manhattan</i> neared the point of land upon which Pat stood +the boy shook his head and pointed to the west. It was clear that he did +not wish to be taken on board there.</p> + +<p>Ned kept on toward the beach, however, notwithstanding Pat's frantic +gestures, and was not a little annoyed when he saw the boy wade out into +the water, down the sloping shore, lapped by tiny waves, and strike out +boldly for the boat.</p> + +<p>He reached the <i>Manhattan</i> in safety, was hauled in, and sank down in +the cockpit with a grunt of exhaustion for he had exerted his full +strength, "and then some" as he afterwards explained, in the long swim. +Presently he arose and pointed to a little projection on the shore, +perhaps three hundred yards ahead.</p> + +<p>"There's a river runs in there," he said, "and the <i>Manhattan</i> will find +a safe harbor, as the stream though narrow, is deep and overhung with +trees and creepers."</p> + +<p>"But they must know that there is a boat here," Frank said. "This engine +of ours talks some when she moves."</p> + +<p>"I don't think they heard it," Pat insisted.</p> + +<p>"But the shot?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"That might have come from the island. Anyway," Pat went on, "there is +little commotion on the island except that made by the monkeys and the +birds."</p> + +<p>"Did you see anything of the boys?" asked Ned, the safety of Jack and +Jimmie concerning him greatly.</p> + +<p>"No," was the disappointing reply. "They got too good a start on me."</p> + +<p>"How far inland did you go?" asked Frank.</p> + +<p>By this time the <i>Manhattan</i> was under way, and the place of refuge +spoken of by the boy was not far away.</p> + +<p>"I climbed the hill that runs near the shore," was the reply. "The first +thing I saw was a collection of tents and leaf shelters."</p> + +<p>Ned and Frank both gave exclamations of amazement.</p> + +<p>"Found at last!" Frank said.</p> + +<p>"The next thing I saw," Pat went on, "was a small steamer lying in a bay +on the west shore. There is a break in the hills which line that coast, +and I could see the boat plainly. I have seen her in Manila. It is the +<i>Miles</i>, and she is carrying the American flag. She got up steam just as +I caught sight of her, and at first I thought her activity had been +aroused by the shot which saved my life, but I've now reached the +conclusion that she was merely making a perfunctory trip around the +island."</p> + +<p>"Then you think if we escape observation on this run we will be safe for +some hours?"</p> + +<p>"I am quite sure of it, so far as those on the boat are concerned. But +what is the boat doing here? It is a government boat, used by officials +in making tours of inspection. Perhaps the high brows at Manila are wise +to what is going on here, and have sent the <i>Miles</i> to look into the +matter. Then we're left, eh?"</p> + +<p>As the <i>Manhattan</i> was now nosing her way into the mouth of the little +stream referred to by Pat, and Ned was fully occupied in working her in, +he made no reply to the suggestions thus presented. However, he was +studying over the proposition with a wish in his breast that the <i>Miles</i> +might not be at that time in the legitimate service of the government.</p> + +<p>He was virtually disobeying the positive orders of Major John Ross in +cruising about in the <i>Manhattan</i> at that time. If he had obeyed +instructions he would doubtless be in Manila now awaiting the slow +unwinding of red tape, instead of there in the channel. He had taken the +bit in his teeth and desired to "make good."</p> + +<p>Besides, he was satisfied that the government officers, if the <i>Miles</i> +really was there on an official mission, would merely disperse the +native chiefs if they were discovered and permit the plotters to escape. +This would only put off the day of final action, for the chiefs would +continue to assemble and discuss the treaty until the Philippines were +in a blaze of war or the men who were urging them on were in prison.</p> + +<p>"There," said Frank, presently, "no person out there in the bay can get +a look at us so long as we remain here."</p> + +<p>Indeed the harbor was an ideal hiding place. The stream turned sharply +to the east from its northerly course just before it reached the white +beach, ran a few yards in that direction, and then turned north once +more and emptied into the sea. This placed a dense growth of jungle +between the beach and the position taken by the <i>Manhattan</i>, which had +passed into the channel running east and west and was effectively +screened from view on either side by the growths of the jungle.</p> + +<p>As soon as the boat was in the position desired, Ned crossed the arm of +land lying between the stream and the beach and looked out with his +glass. The <i>Miles</i> passed while he stood there, the American flag flying +from her masthead. When he went back to the <i>Manhattan</i> there was a +troubled look on his face.</p> + +<p>"She's on government service, all right," he said to Pat and Frank, "I +saw men in uniform on her deck."</p> + +<p>"I didn't see anybody land," said Pat.</p> + +<p>"Did she communicate with the shore in any way?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Well, there were native boats plying about and they might have taken +some of the brown men off to her."</p> + +<p>"It is all of a piece with the counterfeit instructions," Ned said. +"There is an unknown interest working in this case. If the officers at +Manila suspected or had wind of what is going on here, why didn't they +send a troop ship and capture the chiefs, and so screen out the men +responsible for the conspiracy?"</p> + +<p>"That's another thing we've got to find out," Frank said, with a grin. +"We've got a good many things to find out!"</p> + +<p>"And the first thing to discover," Ned said, "is what has become of the +boys."</p> + +<p>"Right you are!" cried Pat. "I'll go back to the top of the hill and see +if there's any commotion on the island."</p> + +<p>"What does the island look like?" asked Frank.</p> + +<p>"Looks like a valley with a line of hills shutting it in. Looks like a +saucer with a high rim. The dago chiefs are encamped in the middle of +the saucer."</p> + +<p>"In a thicket, of course?"</p> + +<p>"It is quite free from jungle growths down there," was the reply—"so +clear that I was able to see the encampment and the people moving about. +And I think I saw the treaty box, at that!"</p> + +<p>"Treaty box?" laughed Frank. "Don't you ever think these brown men have +any box to put their treaty in!"</p> + +<p>"What do you think about it, Ned?" asked Pat.</p> + +<p>"I hardly think they unlock their pocket-books with keys like the one I +found," replied Ned. "And, besides," he added, "the white men back of +this conspiracy would naturally want a treaty signed up with all the +ceremony that could be hatched up, in order to impress the chiefs. Yes, +I think there must be a treaty box!"</p> + +<p>"And you think you've got a key to it?" asked Frank.</p> + +<p>"I've got a key to something," was the reply.</p> + +<p>Frank opened his lips to make some remark, but Ned laid a hand on his +arm and drew closer to him so that a low voice might be heard, at the +same time motioning to Pat to remain quiet.</p> + +<p>"Now, don't move, or turn to look," Ned said, "but in a few seconds, +after I have turned away, look, casually, toward the great balete tree +which rises above the jungle straight to the south."</p> + +<p>Ned turned away directly and faced the jungle to the north.</p> + +<p>"What do you see?" he asked, turning toward the boys again but not +looking at them.</p> + +<p>"Monkeys wiggling in the creepers," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"Filipinos," answered Pat.</p> + +<p>"How many?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Well," replied Pat, "I thought I saw two, but I guess there is only +one. We've got to get him," he added.</p> + +<p>"Of course!" Frank said. "If we don't, he'll go back to camp and tell +about seeing us here; then they'll swarm down on us, and it will be all +off with the whole bunch of us. We've got to get him!"</p> + +<p>"But how?" asked Pat.</p> + +<p>In the short silence that followed all three boys cudgeled their brains +for some idea which might serve, but the case was assuming a hopeless +aspect when a shrill voice in pretty good English came from the tree.</p> + +<p>"Hi, there!" cried the voice.</p> + +<p>"If that's Jimmie, made up as a little brown man," Pat said, "I'll beat +him up when he comes aboard."</p> + +<p>"More likely to be Jack," said Frank.</p> + +<p>"Hi, there!" repeated the voice from the tree.</p> + +<p>"That's not Jimmie, or Jack either," Ned said. "What do you want?" he +asked.</p> + +<p>The reply came in the form of a feline growl which might have issued +forth from the throat of a wild cat.</p> + +<p>"What does the badge say?" asked the voice, then.</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other in wonder for a moment and then Ned +answered:</p> + +<p>"Be prepared!"</p> + +<p>"Now, what do you think of that?" Pat demanded. "What do you think of +meeting a Boy Scout out here?"</p> + +<p>"What patrol?" asked Frank, half doubting whether the person in the tree +would find the correct answer.</p> + +<p>"Wild Cat, Manila!" came the reply.</p> + +<p>"Then come out of the tree, Wild Cat," Ned laughed, "and tell us how you +came to be here."</p> + +<p>There was a great rustling of foliage, and then a Filipino boy not more +than fourteen years of age appeared on the trunk. He worked his way down +and disappeared in the jungle. In a moment, however, he made his +appearance on the margin of the little stream and was on board.</p> + +<p>He was a rather good looking young fellow, with keen eyes and a lithe, +muscular figure. He was well dressed in a suit of light material, and +wore a Boy Scout badge on the lapel of his coat.</p> + +<p>"We're gettin so we find 'em in the woods!" Frank said, as the boy +stepped on the bridge deck. "Did you come to the island on the steamer +which just passed here?" he added, as the lad looked about him with a +grin.</p> + +<p>"Yes," was the reply. "Come as servant."</p> + +<p>"Well, why aren't you on board now?" asked Frank, suspiciously.</p> + +<p>"Run away!" was the short reply.</p> + +<p>"What for?" demanded Frank, determined to know all that there was to +know about the new-comer, and urged on by Ned's nods, which told him to +proceed.</p> + +<p>"Tired of city," was the grinning reply.</p> + +<p>As the boy spoke he turned around to the jungle and waved his hand, as +if taking it all in at one motion. Then he laid a finger on his own +breast and said:</p> + +<p>"That for mine!"</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you've been in bad company," laughed Frank. "You're talking +slang! What's your name?"</p> + +<p>"Minda," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Sounds like a girl's name," grunted Pat. "What are the chiefs doing on +the island?"</p> + +<p>"Conference," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"They're forming a confederacy, are they?"</p> + +<p>Minda shook his head and looked perplexed.</p> + +<p>"Don't know," he replied.</p> + +<p>"Where are the two Scouts who went ashore a long time ago?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Tied," replied Minda, crossing his wrists to indicate what he meant.</p> + +<p>"That's nice!" Pat broke in. "Where are they?"</p> + +<p>Again Minda shook his head, saying that he did not know where the boys +were, that they might have been put on board the steamer.</p> + +<p>"So the officers on board the steamer communicated with the shore?" +asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Yes; that's how I got away," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Do the officers know what is going on?" continued Ned. Again Minda +shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I reckon you're off there," Pat exclaimed. "They do know, and the man +in charge on board the steamer is a traitor! I know him!"</p> + +<p>Again the Filipino looked puzzled.</p> + +<p>"Good man!" he said, and sat down on the bridge deck.</p> + +<p>"Do you really believe the boys were put on board the steamer?" asked +Frank of Ned, in a moment.</p> + +<p>"I think the native chiefs would put us all on board the steamer, if +they could do so," was the reply.</p> + +<p>Then the patrol leader turned to Minda again.</p> + +<p>"What did the steamer come down here for?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Patrol," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"On no special mission?" Ned went on.</p> + +<p>"Just to patrol," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"I don't believe it!" Frank burst out. "That boat was sent down here to +investigate this conspiracy matter, and the man in command is making a +perfunctory job of it. He'll then go back to Manila and report nothing +doing!"</p> + +<p>"And the conspiracy will go on, and there'll be war!" Pat added.</p> + +<p>"Just so!" Frank commented.</p> + +<p>"Well," Ned said, "we can't find out whether you are right or not by +asking the officers, either on the steamer or at Manila. We've got to +find out by watching the brown men! We've got to leave the <i>Manhattan</i> +here and go into the jungle and see what is going on, and find out what +company the chiefs receive. It is my idea that some of the men in +uniform are leading double lives!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<h3>THE SENATOR'S SON SEEKS A KEY.</h3> + + +<p>Jimmie and Jack were lying behind a great flowing vine which swung from +a balete tree, looking keenly out in the direction in which they +believed the camp to be situated, when four lusty men who appeared to be +Filipinos crept noiselessly out of the jungle and sat down on their +backs with chuckles of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>"Quit it!" roared Jimmie, thinking they had been followed from the boat.</p> + +<p>Then he saw it was no joke, for Jack was floundering about, and one of +the little brown men was tying his hands with a hard cord. He flopped +over on his back and looked up into the sinister face of a native.</p> + +<p>"What's comin' off here?" demanded the boy, trying hard to get a glimpse +of Jack from where he lay.</p> + +<p>"We're pinched!" Jack called out.</p> + +<p>Then the two were dragged hastily to their feet and pushed through the +jungle toward the camp. Jimmie thought this a place for optimism, and +decided to try it on the low-browed chap who was rather rudely forcing +him along. "I was just thinking of going down to see your camp," he said +with a grin, "but I didn't know the way exactly. I'm glad you happened +along. I've got the left hind foot of a rabbit that was caught by a +black cat at midnight, in the dark of the moon, in a negro cemetery, on +the grave of a black man who was hanged for murder. Guess that's brought +me luck."</p> + +<p>"You'll need four rabbits' feet if you get out of this," Jack grumbled. +"Suppose we take a quick hike for the boat, right now?" he added, +believing the Filipinos would not be able to understand English.</p> + +<p>In this he was mistaken, for one of the men said:</p> + +<p>"Don't you ever try it. Your left hind foot won't protect you if you +do."</p> + +<p>The boys gazed about the group, now halted, trying to pick out the +speaker.</p> + +<p>"But this is a magic rabbit-foot," Jimmie retorted, scornfully as if any +sane person ought to know of the virtues of a left hind rabbit-foot. "It +used to be owned by an armless man who rowed over the Great American +Desert in an open boat!"</p> + +<p>This, of course, was all for the purpose of inducing the one who had +spoken in English to speak again, in order that he might be sorted out +of the others. Jimmie's imaginative powers proved equal to the occasion.</p> + +<p>A man who, regarded closely, did not look at all like a Filipino—a +slender, though broad-shouldered, man with sharp gray eyes and the +awkward manner of one unused to disguise—laughed lightly at the boy's +odd conceit and said:</p> + +<p>"That will be about enough of that Bowery lingo. What are you boys doing +here?" he added.</p> + +<p>"We came over to see about puttin' up a couple of skyscrapers!" replied +Jimmie. "The air seems nice an' high here. Guess we wouldn't have to +push it up any to build fifty stories. Where you takin' us?" he went on. +"If I owned this shrubbery we're borin' through, I'd have it manicured."</p> + +<p>"Where did you leave the <i>Manhattan</i>?" asked the other, without taking +the trouble to answer Jimmie's question.</p> + +<p>"We didn't leave her," Jimmie lied, cheerfully arguing with himself that +it wasn't any of the other man's business where they had left the boat. +"She's left us, an' gone off on a cruise to the South; left us to reign +on this island. She'll be back in a couple of days, an' then you'll get +what's comin' to you."</p> + +<p>"I'm glad you took over the government of the island," the other +laughed. "Only for your appearance here we should not have known about +the <i>Manhattan</i> being in these waters. Now we can look her up. We have a +steamer here for that purpose."</p> + +<p>"I guess I ought to have remained on board," Jimmie said, ruefully.</p> + +<p>"It is a wonder that Nestor permitted you to leave the boat," observed +the other. "It is said of the lad that he makes few mistakes," he went +on, glancing from one boy to the other.</p> + +<p>"So you know Ned, do you?" asked Jack. "Well, you know a good fellow. If +you stay about here you'll be likely to know more about him before +long."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I mean to remain," was the cool reply. "Nestor is wanted at Manila +for disobeying orders, and I'll take him along with me when I go. +There's a steamer out here looking for him."</p> + +<p>The boys knew that Ned had left Manila in defiance of the orders of +Major John Ross, but they did not believe that a steamer had been sent +out to arrest him. They knew that he had received his original orders +from Washington, and believed that when Ross communicated with the +authorities there he would be instructed to keep his hands off so far as +Ned was concerned.</p> + +<p>The man was, of course, lying, doubtless in the hope of creating the +impression in the minds of the boys that he was still in the service of +the government, and there on official business. The boys had no fear of +their leader being taken back to Manila under arrest. They were more +concerned for his life if he fell into the hands of this traitor.</p> + +<p>"You know a fat lot about it," Jack said, disdainfully. "What you know +about Ned's business won't swell your head any. Where's this steamer +you're talking about?"</p> + +<p>"I suspect," replied the other, "that she is now circling the island in +order to pick up the <i>Manhattan</i>. Nestor was wrong to run away with a +government boat. He'll serve time for it, I reckon."</p> + +<p>"I suppose," Jimmie said, in as sarcastic a tone as he could bring +forth, "that you're lookin' among these bushes for the <i>Manhattan</i>. She +might have climbed one of these big trees," he added, with a grin.</p> + +<p>The leader made no reply, none being required, and the party pressed +forward toward the center of the island. The jungle grew thinner as they +advanced, and presently the encampment came into view.</p> + +<p>It was evident to the boys that some of the native chiefs were there in +state, for some of the tents—doubtless stolen from the government—were +gaudily decorated, and attendants were flying about as if their lives +depended on the speed with which they covered the ground. It seemed to +the boys that there could not be less than three hundred persons +present, and the decorated tents, marking the stopping place of a chief, +indicated a large collection of native rulers.</p> + +<p>The boys were not taken through the encampment, but led into a tent on +the outskirts, where they were securely tied up and left alone.</p> + +<p>"Cripes!" Jimmie said, when the flap of the tent fell behind the figure +of the disguised man, "this reminds me of a drammer we used to have on +the good old Bowery. In this play there was a girl that was always bein' +captured an' rescued. Any scene that didn't witness a couple of captures +and a couple of rescues was no good. This is just like that. We're bein' +captured, all right, but we ain't bein' rescued—not just yet!"</p> + +<p>"Ned's somewhere about," Jack said, confidently. "He'll manage to turn +us loose before long."</p> + +<p>Then through the jungle, and ringing snappingly on the clear air, came +the snorting of the <i>Manhattan's</i> engines. At that moment she was +entering the little creek which Pat had pointed out. In a moment the +explosions ceased.</p> + +<p>"If they didn't know before," Jack said, "they know now. It won't take +them long to geezle the <i>Manhattan</i> now. Say," he added, "roll over here +and eat these cords. If I could get down to them I'd soon be free."</p> + +<p>"I wonder if I could?" asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>The cords were hard and strong and tightly knotted, but after a long +time the boy succeeded in releasing Jack's hands, and the rest was easy +as they were alone in the tent. In a very short time both boys were free +of bonds.</p> + +<p>The tent did not seem to be guarded, as the captors doubtless believed +escape from the island impossible, even if the boys succeeded in getting +away from the camp. They did not know, of course, that the member of the +Wild Cat Patrol from Manila had noted the capture of the lads, and had +started away to notify their friends as soon as the explosions heard so +plainly by the boys notified him of the whereabouts of the <i>Manhattan</i>.</p> + +<p>Jimmie and Jack remained quietly in the tent for some moments after +their freedom from their bonds had been gained, then Jimmie crawled to +the wall nearest the center of the camp, lifted the canvas and looked +out. He crouched there a moment and then dropped the canvas and turned +to his chum.</p> + +<p>"You remember the night in Yokohama?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"I should say so," Jack replied. "Didn't I wait around a bum old hotel +until almost morning for you to come back?"</p> + +<p>"Well," Jimmie went on, "the man that sat in disguise in the tea house, +and the men who were there with him, are out there."</p> + +<p>Jack approached the little opening made by the lifting of the canvas and +looked out.</p> + +<p>"Which one?" he asked. "Which one was disguised!"</p> + +<p>"The military-lookin' chap," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"On the night them gazabos chased us down the Street of a Thousand Steps +he was made up like a Jap. When we came to the marines he ducked, as if +afraid of Uncle Sam's uniforms."</p> + +<p>"Ned rather thought he'd be down to this conference," Jack said.</p> + +<p>The man to whom the boy called special attention was in the garb of a +civilian, but the military manner was unmistakable. He now stood talking +with half a dozen Filipinos, occasionally pointing to the eastern coast +of the island.</p> + +<p>"He's sendin' his natives after the <i>Manhattan</i>, all right," Jimmie +said. "There's goin' to be somethin' doin here before long. Look who's +here!" he added, as a young man of perhaps twenty-five sauntered toward +the tent.</p> + +<p>Under his arm the young man carried a steel box, like those used as +receptacles for cash and important papers in safe deposit vaults. The +box seemed to be quite heavy, for the young man frequently shifted it +from one side to the other.</p> + +<p>"There's your treaty box!" laughed Jack, poking Jimmie in the ribs.</p> + +<p>"It may be, at that," the boy replied.</p> + +<p>The young man passed from group to group in front of the tents, +apparently seeking some one. Occasionally he pointed to the keyhole of +the box and the others felt in their pockets.</p> + +<p>"He's lost the key to the treaty box," Jimmie grinned.</p> + +<p>"Probably he's got cigarettes in there and wants to dope himself with +one," Jack replied.</p> + +<p>"Anyway," Jimmie went on, "I wish Ned was here. I'll bet he could open +that box for him."</p> + +<p>"Now he's talking with the man who chased you out of the tea house in +the Street of a Thousand Steps," Jack said, "and the fellow is raving +about something."</p> + +<p>"They can't open the treaty box!" laughed Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"You'll be seeing things next," Jack grunted. "Now, what do you think of +that?" he added. "The chap is bringing his box here."</p> + +<p>"Then fix yourself up so you'll look like you was in captivity," Jimmie +advised. "If he finds out we've released ourselves he'll tie us up +again."</p> + +<p>The boys found pieces of the cord with which they had been tied and +managed to put up a very fair imitation of being bound good and hard. +When the young man entered the tent he stood over them for a moment with +a supercilious grin on his face.</p> + +<p>"How do you like it, boys?" he finally asked.</p> + +<p>"Fine!" Jimmie sang out.</p> + +<p>"Isn't it most dinner time?" Jack added.</p> + +<p>The young man sat down on a bundle of freshly cut grass, placed the box +by his side, placed his chin on his hands, his elbows on his knees, and +sat for some moments regarding the boys with an amused smile on his +rather weak face.</p> + +<p>"What are you doing here?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"We're doin' acrobatic stunts on a high wire just now," scorned Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"Don't get gay, now," the other growled. "I'm the son of a United States +senator."</p> + +<p>"I'm the sister of the sun an' moon," Jimmie replied. "So don't be +givin' me no guff."</p> + +<p>"You're a cheeky little baggage," the son of the senator replied, rising +to his feet.</p> + +<p>"You might leave that box here," Jimmie called out, "if it's got +anythin' to eat in it. We could eat a crocodile."</p> + +<p>"Be careful that the crocodiles don't eat you," warned the other and, +seizing the box in a firmer grasp, walked out of the tent.</p> + +<p>"What do you make of it?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"The son of a senator," Jimmie replied, "is here representin' some big +interest, an' that's the treaty box he's got. Say, if they ever get all +these native kings an' queens an' prime ministers to goin', there'll be +bloody war in the Philippines, an' Japan, or China, or Germany, or +France will butt in, an' there'll be a fine time."</p> + +<p>"Of course," Jack replied. "That's why we've got to stop it."</p> + +<p>"It might be stopped by scatterin' these chiefs, an' kings, an' all the +rest," Jimmie concluded.</p> + +<p>"Not so you could notice it," Jack insisted. "Didn't we scatter them +when they met on that other island? Well, they've come together again, +haven't they? I've heard Ned say that the only way to stop this thing is +to get a good grip on the man at the head of it. The thing now is to +find who that man is."</p> + +<p>"I should say so, with the military men all mixed up in it!" Jimmie +said. "It seems to me that the head of it must be in Washington, in +Manila, or in Yokohama. I wish Ned was here."</p> + +<p>"Tied up?" echoed Jack. "If he was, we'd never get out. Let me tell you +this, little man," he went on, the tan on his cheeks showing browner +than ever against the sudden paleness of his face, "let me tell you +this: These men are here in the guise of soldiers to put this treaty +through. These chiefs think they represent men high up in our +government. If they didn't think so they wouldn't listen.</p> + +<p>"When it is all over, and war has been declared, and our title to the +islands has gone up in smoke, these traitors will go back to their posts +in the army. Now, this being the case, they won't want to see us around, +will they?"</p> + +<p>"Hardly," was the reply.</p> + +<p>Jimmie saw what his chum was coming to and opened his eyes wider than +ever.</p> + +<p>"You mean," he added, "that when the ruction breaks out, or even before, +we'll be put out of the way?"</p> + +<p>"Of course."</p> + +<p>"Then I'm goin' to duck right now!" Jimmie said, moving toward the wall +of the tent. "I'm not goin' to stay here an' be bolo meat. If we can get +to the first thicket we stand a chance of gettin' to the <i>Manhattan</i>."</p> + +<p>"That's all right, but it won't do," Jack said. "Don't you suppose these +gazabos heard the fuss the engine was makin'? Well, then! But we've got +to go somewheres, so come on. Me for a point opposite to the direction +of the sounds we heard."</p> + +<p>There was a sudden commotion in the camp just then, and the boys reached +the first thicket.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<h3>SIGNAL LIGHTS IN THE CHINA SEA.</h3> + + +<p>The boys reached the first thicket and quickly disappeared from the +sight of those in the camp. There they listened for an instant, but +heard nothing which sounded like pursuit. Then they dug into the jungle +and worked around toward the bay where they had left the <i>Manhattan</i>.</p> + +<p>There came no alarm from the camp as they passed through the thickets, +using only their hands in fighting the creepers and snake-like vines. It +was afterwards learned that the arrival of a particularly powerful chief +had caused the commotion which had so assisted in the escape.</p> + +<p>Luckily the attentions paid to the new arrival stretched over a long +period of time, otherwise the boys would certainly have been retaken. +Disturbed by the noise made by the lads in pushing through the jungle, +the monkeys, birds, and other creatures of the forest lifted up their +voices and seemed to point out the path of flight. Jimmie declared that +a brass band could have done no more to locate them.</p> + +<p>It was after noon when they came to the little bay where they had left +the <i>Manhattan</i>. There was the bay, shimmering in the sun, there was the +beach where they had landed. But where was the motor boat?</p> + +<p>"They've had to run for it," Jimmie decided, gazing gloomily over the +waste of sea and back to the jungle. "What's the next move? This spot +must be watched, so we've got to get out of here. I guess we're in for +it, all right."</p> + +<p>The situation seemed to be a desperate one, and the boys crept back into +the jungle to study it out. If the <i>Manhattan</i> had left the vicinity of +the island there was no hope for them; still, they decided to make sure +that it had before giving over the search for it. In considering the +situation they did not at all censure Ned, for they saw that he might +have been obliged to take the <i>Manhattan</i> away from the little bay in +order to avoid capture.</p> + +<p>At last when, in their tracing of the coast in the faint hope of finally +coming upon the <i>Manhattan</i>, the boys came upon the little stream where +the boat was hidden, they remained concealed from the sight of those on +board while they took careful note of the surroundings. It did not seem +possible that the <i>Manhattan</i> had not been discovered by the Filipinos, +and naturally the boys suspected that some trick to gain possession of +her without an open fight was being worked.</p> + +<p>The boat lay quietly drawing at the cable which held her to the bank of +the little stream, with everything apparently in order in the cockpit +and in the cabin, but there were at first no signs of the boys. +Presently, however, Pat's red head shot up out of the cockpit, where he +had evidently been lying down.</p> + +<p>As the head appeared, an arrow whizzed almost over the heads of the +watching boys and struck the side of the boat with a force which seemed +equal to cutting a hole in it. Pat was out of sight in a moment, with +the cabin door closed behind him.</p> + +<p>"Going back to old methods, are they?" whispered Jack. "Do you see +anything of Ned or Frank there?"</p> + +<p>Jimmie shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid they've gone to look us up," he said, "an' in that case, +their return to the boat is likely to bring about a fight."</p> + +<p>The battle was on in a moment, for Ned, Frank and the Filipino boy were +now approaching the boat. It was decidedly a desperate charge they were +making through the jungle when shots from the right of the pursuers +caused the latter to believe that their peril lay in that direction.</p> + +<p>When the Filipinos turned to beat off this attack Ned and his companions +made a rush for the boat and reached her in safety. Then the Filipinos +rushed to the bank, a dozen or more of them, in a rash attempt to board +the <i>Manhattan</i>.</p> + +<p>They were met by a hot fire from the cabin and the cockpit as soon as +they came out on the little rim of clear space on the bank and turned to +the thicket for shelter only to meet a volley of revolver shots from the +interior. This was too much for the untrained natives to endure, and +they fled up the shore of the stream and disappeared.</p> + +<p>The boys themselves were uninjured, but spots of blood on the shore and +on the leaves indicated that their bullets had not all gone astray. The +wounded natives, however, had been carried off by their companions.</p> + +<p>Of course those on the boat understood where the fire which had assisted +them had come from. Jimmie and Jack were the only persons on the island +who would be apt to come to their aid.</p> + +<p>"Come out of that!" Frank called, as the last Filipino disappeared. +"Don't stay there in the thicket all day! We've got to get out!"</p> + +<p>"Why don't you get out, then?" demanded Jimmie, with a grin. "We'll stay +here an' run things while you are gone."</p> + +<p>The boys were soon on board and the <i>Manhattan</i> was worked out into the +channel. But before she was far away from the shore a volley of shots +came from the jungle, doing no damage except to the beauty of the craft.</p> + +<p>"Now run!" advised Jack. "The steamer over on the other side can chase +the legs off us if given half a chance."</p> + +<p>Frank took charge of the engine, and Jack stood by to see that he did +the right thing, and the boat purred through the waters at a speed which +she had never been called upon to make before. Presently the steamer +showed up, pumping great columns of smoke into the sweet air, and the +chase was on in earnest.</p> + +<p>Ned directed Frank to seek the shelter of a group of islands not far +away and sat down to talk with Jimmie, first explaining to the two who +had just come aboard how the Filipino Boy Scout came to be there.</p> + +<p>"We can't miss 'em!" Jimmie exclaimed, shaking the Filipino warmly by +the hand. "We found Boy Scouts in Mexico, and in the Canal Zone, and now +in the Philippines. They hop out on us wherever we go, like 'skeeters!"</p> + +<p>There was now a long and serious talk concerning the course to be +pursued. Jimmie and Jack told of meeting the man who had been followed +to Yokohama, and also of the senator's son and the box he carried. The +Filipino told what he knew of the plans of those on board the steamer, +now gradually drawing away from them.</p> + +<p>"Are you sure that the men in charge of the steamer are American +military men?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Sure!" was the reply. "I came from Manila with them."</p> + +<p>"And they are in the service of the government?"</p> + +<p>"Sure!"</p> + +<p>"Then what are they doing on that island, in company with the insurgent +chiefs?" demanded Frank, but the Filipino only shook his head.</p> + +<p>He insisted that Lieutenant Carstens, who was in command of the vessel +from which the steam launch had come, was a fine officer, and high in +the esteem of the Manila authorities.</p> + +<p>"Then what is he monkeyin' with the rebel chiefs for?" demanded Jimmie. +"It looks to me like Uncle Sam was goin' to get the double cross."</p> + +<p>"Why don't you go back to the steamer," asked Pat of Ned, "and go on +board?"</p> + +<p>"That would be fine!" cried Jack.</p> + +<p>"What could they do to him?" demanded Frank.</p> + +<p>"That boat is here to make trouble for me," Ned said, in a moment. "I +can't understand what is going on, but I know that it would not be safe +for me to go on board."</p> + +<p>"For why?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"I should be accused of murder," was the grave reply.</p> + +<p>"For shootin' the dagoes who were shootin' at you?" demanded Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"That will be the charge," Ned replied.</p> + +<p>"Then we'll become pirates!" Jack cried. "We'll sail the raving deep and +get a new plank for prisoners to walk as soon as the old one wears out. +We'll be bold, bad men on the Spanish main!"</p> + +<p>"Cut it out!" Frank said. "This is no joke. They've got the goods on us +for that shooting, and we've got to keep out of the way until Ned +discovers the inner workings of this red tape machine."</p> + +<p>The truth of this statement was so apparent that there was little more +argument on the subject. It seemed that, in trying to defend the +government against a gang of conspirators and traitors, Ned had indeed +come to a point of open rupture with some of the men in authority.</p> + +<p>For some unknown reason they were chasing him down. Twice he had come to +the spot where the treasonable document was to be executed, and twice he +had been driven away without accomplishing the object he sought to +accomplish.</p> + +<p>About the middle of the afternoon the government steamer disappeared +entirely, leaving the <i>Manhattan</i> alone in the network of tiny islands +which came down pretty close to the northern shore of the island of +Luzon. Ned watched the last trace of her smoke disappear with much the +same feeling that one experiences when an enemy he has been fighting +passes from view but does not leave the vicinity.</p> + +<p>"She's getting ready to spring out on us," he said to Frank. "She is +either waiting for night, or she has gone back to dig up a gunboat. +Those on board of her have good ground for arresting us, and before we +could prove the true state of affairs at the time of the shooting the +treaty would be signed and war would be on."</p> + +<p>"If we only had that treaty box!" Jimmie exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"And the senator's son with it!" Jack put in.</p> + +<p>The steamer gave them no more trouble that day, and when night fell the +<i>Manhattan</i> nosed into a creek which rippled into the channel and the +boys prepared to pass the night there. It was a still night and there +was no moon, but would be later on. The air, heavy with tropical scents, +scarcely stirred, the light breeze having gone down at sunset.</p> + +<p>The island which the boys had selected as a resting place for the night +was well up to the north of Luzon and faced the China Sea. There seemed +to be no land between its western coast and the shoreline of China. Far +out in the sea the lights of a liner gleamed for an instant as the boys +carried provisions ashore, then the great expanse of water showed only +the light of the stars.</p> + +<p>"We may have to lug this stuff back to the boat with a rush," laughed +Jimmie, as he carried a basket of tinned provisions from the rowboat to +the little glade where they were to prepare supper. "I don't believe the +government steamer went very far away. If she did, she'll come back with +a gunboat."</p> + +<p>"Imagine a gunboat out here after the <i>Manhattan</i>!" scoffed Jack. "All +the steamer people wanted was to drive us away. Don't you think they +could have caught us if they had set out to? You bet they could! But +they didn't want to show up before us. There are people on board of her +who do not want to be seen in the society they have been in during the +past few days."</p> + +<p>Ned looked the speaker over thoughtfully for a moment.</p> + +<p>"I think," he said, "that you've about hit the nail on the head. They +wanted to drive us away, and they didn't want their own boat in the way +to-night."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by that?" asked Frank.</p> + +<p>"I'm not very clear in my mind as to what I did mean," laughed Ned. +"However, it is plain that the steamer did not relish staying about +here."</p> + +<p>Ned watched the supper preparations for a short time and then walked +away toward the interior. The island was a very small one, and consisted +chiefly of a round rim of white sand—which was rock pounded up by the +beating of the waves—and a rocky, cone-like elevation which lifted +above the waters of the China Sea like a signal tower.</p> + +<p>In some distant epoch the bit of rock had been cast up from the bottom +of the ocean, and the rains and suns of countless years had formed from +the volcanic material the thin soil which here and there supported +tropical growths.</p> + +<p>Sailors called the island "Elephant's Head," because the central +elevation was said to resemble in some remote degree the head of an +elephant, and because two great ridges of rock jutted out into the +water, pointing toward the coast of China. These ridges formed an +excellent harbor, and were known as "The Tusks."</p> + +<p>The <i>Manhattan</i> was not anchored in this secure harbor, but in a bay +which was formed by a break in the rock just around the south corner of +the island. There were springs high up on the mountain, and these formed +the river which had in turn worn away the rock and shaped the bay.</p> + +<p>Ned reached the place where the climb began in five minutes after +leaving the campfire. There was no jungle to speak of and he walked +rapidly. He passed on up the steep side of the mountain for some +distance and then paused on a little shelf of rock which faced the west +and took out his glass.</p> + +<p>Before him lay the quiet waters of the great China Sea, while back of +him loomed the rugged bulk of the mountain, the summit indistinct in the +darkness of the moonless night. The growths of the tropics came up to +where he stood and then died out from lack of soil. Elephant's Head +stood out boldly, its rugged lines unsoftened by the growths which +flourish almost everywhere in the Philippines.</p> + +<p>Below, Ned could see the red of the campfire, sheltered from the sea +side by a screen of bushes. Away to the west he could see, at first, +nothing, and then a light came dancing over the waves. At first he +thought he must be mistaken, but the light remained stationery except +that it seemed to rock with the slow movement of the waves.</p> + +<p>While the boy was wondering over the matter Pat came scrambling up the +side of the mountain. He threw himself on the shelf of rock by Ned's +side and pointed out to the west.</p> + +<p>"You see that light?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes; I was just wondering about it," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"It is at the top of a tall mast," Pat went on to explain, "and is a +signal. I can't read it, of course, but it seems to me that it means +mischief."</p> + +<p>"I have no doubt of it," was the reply, "but we've got to wait for +developments for a time. This seems to me to be a waiting game," he +added with a laugh which did not sound at all merry.</p> + +<p>The boys sat for a long time, watching the light, which grew nearer, and +the campfire below, which was still glowing brightly. Then Ned turned +his glass to the north and an exclamation of surprise escaped him. Where +he looked there was a duplicate of the light to the west, and that, +also, was drawing closer.</p> + +<p>"I think," Ned said, after calling Pat's attention to the second light, +"that we'd better have that fire out. Go down and ask the boys to finish +their suppers and make everything dark."</p> + +<p>"Why," Pat said, "you haven't any notion those ships are coming here, +have you?"</p> + +<p>"There's a pretty good harbor here," Ned said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but—"</p> + +<p>"And the insurrectos must have arms," Ned went on.</p> + +<p>Pat thumped his hands down on his knees half a dozen times and then +brought one palm down on Ned's shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Sure!" he said. "Sure, sure, sure! The game is to land arms and +ammunition here to-night! Now, what do you think of tumbling headfirst +into the center of the disturbance like this? Say, we'll have to receipt +for those guns!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<h3>FOR PIRACY ON THE HIGH SEAS.</h3> + + +<p>The boys hastened down to the campfire and quickly extinguished it, much +to the disgust of Jimmie, who had begun the preparation of an elaborate +meal—at least as elaborate as could be gotten together out of tin cans.</p> + +<p>This precaution taken, the <i>Manhattan</i> was towed into the mouth of the +little creek and climbers and creepers drawn over her until no one would +have suspected her presence there. The engine was not set in motion in +making this change because of the danger from the explosions.</p> + +<p>All this accomplished, Ned and Pat climbed back to the shelf of rock and +again looked out over the mysterious China Sea. There were the two +lights, one to the west and one to the north. They were closer to the +island than before, however, and the light up toward Formosa was drawing +to the south rapidly.</p> + +<p>"They are going to meet here, all right," Pat said, "and I'll go apples +to snowballs that they've got arms for the insurrectos. The manager of +this enterprise never let all those chiefs get away from that other +island without signing the treaty, and now he's sneaking in guns to help +them out."</p> + +<p>The boys discussed the situation for some moments, the lights coming +nearer with astonishing rapidity. At length another light showed away to +the south and west, but not such a light as the others.</p> + +<p>It was not high up in the air, like the others, and directly it seemed +to divide itself into half a dozen points. Its progress toward the +island seemed to be even faster than that of the others.</p> + +<p>"That's a steamer," Ned said, after a long look through his glass.</p> + +<p>"The other lights are on steamers, too," Pat replied. "No wind-jammer +could make the time, in this calm, that those boats are making."</p> + +<p>While the boys looked the lights went out, or appeared to, and there was +only the glimmer of the unfamiliar constellations of the heavens over +the China Sea.</p> + +<p>"That's strange!"</p> + +<p>Pat turned to Ned and grasped him by the arm.</p> + +<p>"What do you make of it?" he continued.</p> + +<p>"That may be a signal," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"If it is, the glims will show again directly."</p> + +<p>"They may," was the reply.</p> + +<p>But the lights did not show again, and, after waiting for an hour or +more, the boys started back to the camp. Half way down, the dull, +reverberating boom of a cannon came to their ears, over the water.</p> + +<p>"What does that mean?" asked Pat.</p> + +<p>"It may be the gunboat Jimmie insisted would be sent for me," smiled +Ned.</p> + +<p>"You don't really think that?"</p> + +<p>"Hardly," was the reply, "but I don't know what to make of it."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps it was a command for the other ships to show their lights," Pat +suggested.</p> + +<p>"I hope Uncle Sam is becoming wise to the game that is being played down +here," Ned said, "and has sent a gunboat to look into it."</p> + +<p>"That's it!" cried Pat. "That's just it! If she doesn't pass the ships +in the dark there'll be something doing here."</p> + +<p>The dull boom of the gun came again, and, far out, the low lights of the +gunboat showed above the water. She seemed to be passing swiftly to the +north.</p> + +<p>"She's going to pass us, all right!" Pat cried. "Now, what did she make +that noise for? To warn the ships that she was coming, and to get out of +the way?"</p> + +<p>"There's some good reason," Ned replied.</p> + +<p>In a moment a searchlight shot out from the gunboat and prowled over the +sea. The boys could see it moving about, but could not see that it +picked up the ships which had previously shown the lights. One of the +vessels, it appeared, was too far to the south and the other too far to +the north to be reached by the traveling rays from the gunboat.</p> + +<p>"She's slowing down!" Pat cried, in a moment. "She's going to search the +islands. Glory be!"</p> + +<p>"You may not want to meet her people, after you find out what they +want," said Ned. "Remember that battle with the Filipinos back there."</p> + +<p>"I'm willing to take chances with them," was the reply.</p> + +<p>The boys now hastened back to camp and Ned passed on to the creek where +the <i>Manhattan</i> lay in hiding.</p> + +<p>"Jimmie," he said, turning to face that young gentleman, "do you +remember whether those rockets we bought at Manila were put on board?"</p> + +<p>"Sure they were!" was the reply. "Want 'em?"</p> + +<p>Ned replied that he did, and the boy went prospecting in the lockers of +the boat.</p> + +<p>"Got 'em!" he cried presently.</p> + +<p>"Do you know how to send them off?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Do I? Well, if you'd ever seen me bossin' the fireworks at Tompkins +Square, in little old N. Y., I guess you wouldn't ask that!"</p> + +<p>Just then Jack came blundering along through the brush and half fell +into the boat.</p> + +<p>"You'd make a fine scout!" Jimmie said. "You move through the thickets +with the stealth and grace of an elephant!"</p> + +<p>"What's that firing about?" asked Jack, paying no attention to the boy +and facing Ned anxiously, his face only half seen in the semi-darkness.</p> + +<p>"That is what I want you to find out," was the reply. "I want you and +Jimmie to put the boat in running condition, everything ready for a +spurt of speed. And I want you to remain here in the boat, ready to +shoot out in a second."</p> + +<p>"All right! That's easy."</p> + +<p>"You may have to wait a long time," Ned went on, "and you may have to go +inside of five minutes. When you go, muffle the engine as much as +possible, but run like the Old Nick was after you—run for the gunboat +out there!"</p> + +<p>"They'll pinch me!" wailed Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"And when you get to the gunboat," Ned continued, "tell the officer in +charge that Nestor is a prisoner on this island, and that the +insurrectos are about to land guns and ammunition here."</p> + +<p>"You a prisoner!" Jack echoed. "What's the use of lying about it?"</p> + +<p>"I shall be a prisoner by the time you reach the gunboat," Ned said, +coolly—as calmly as if he had been announcing that he would be taking +his supper at that time.</p> + +<p>"If you go in the <i>Manhattan</i>," Jack said, "you won't be a prisoner +here."</p> + +<p>"But I've got to stay here," Ned said, "and besides, the boat must not +be loaded down. She may have to make a hot run for the gunboat."</p> + +<p>"I don't know what you're up to," Jack said, doubtfully, "but I guess +you do, so I'll do just as you say."</p> + +<p>"What about the rockets?" asked Jimmie.</p> + +<p>"They are to be used in signaling the gunboat," Ned replied. "She may be +a long ways off when you get out there."</p> + +<p>When the boys at the camp had finished their supper, eaten in the +darkness, and watched the sea for signs of the ships for half an hour, +they started toward the boat. Then another shot came over the water, +followed by two more, fired in quick succession. Ned joined them +instantly, for, following the shots, the rattle of sailing gear and the +thud-thud of boxes or boards on a deck echoed over the sea.</p> + +<p>"One of the ships is close in," Ned said. "Now we'll see if the owners +are unloading missionaries here!"</p> + +<p>The vessel close in looked like an old-fashioned top-sail schooner; +still there was an engine and a propeller. She was a three-master, and +looked, in the uncertain light, as if she had been in service in the +East for a long time.</p> + +<p>She glided into the harbor between the Tusks as if she knew every inch +of the channel, and brought up close to a flat surface of rock on one of +the Tusks, which formed a natural pier. Then the hatches were opened, +and shaded lanterns gleamed about the deck.</p> + +<p>Ned glanced back over the mountain, and was astonished at seeing a green +signal light there, almost at the top. The men on the schooner saw the +signal, too, for Ned could see them pointing at it, could hear them +laughing as if a great point had been gained.</p> + +<p>"Wonder why we didn't see that?" asked Frank. "It must have been there +when the lights showed from the ships."</p> + +<p>"We didn't go up high enough, or it might not have been there when we +were looking," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Well," Frank said, then, "if we didn't see the chap who is tending that +light on the mountain, he must have seen us; or if he didn't see us he +must have heard the engine of the <i>Manhattan</i> doing her talking stunt."</p> + +<p>"Probably," replied Ned.</p> + +<p>The matter was more serious than his manner indicated, for he turned +quickly and walked toward the <i>Manhattan</i>, calling out softly to Pat as +he did so. There was no answer for a moment, and then it came in the +shape of a dozen pistol shots.</p> + +<p>Ned dropped down behind a clump of bushes and waited for an instant, +resolved to know what was going on at the boat before advancing. Then +the boys from the camp came running up, asking questions, and all made a +rush for the boat.</p> + +<p>When they came within sight of the spot where she lay, they saw that she +was moving out into the bay, and that Pat was standing by the engine +whirling the fly-wheel. On the shore were a score of Filipinos, standing +with guns turned toward the boat.</p> + +<p>The boys saw Ned and Frank spring forward, saw them hesitate an instant, +and then drop to the ground. The <i>Manhattan</i> swung out into the bay with +engines snapping and propeller churning the smooth waters.</p> + +<p>"Whoop—ee!" shouted Pat from the deck.</p> + +<p>"Got her off all right!" shouted Jimmie. "Nobody hurt!"</p> + +<p>"Straight to the Northwest," shouted Ned, "and keep your rockets going!"</p> + +<p>"I wish we had been able to get on board," Frank said, regretfully, as +the <i>Manhattan</i> showed a clean pair of heels out of the bay. "I saw Jack +on her."</p> + +<p>"The boys on board have their instructions," Ned said, "and now we may +as well be getting out of range of these little brown men! If Pat and +the others hadn't been on their guard the boat would have been +captured."</p> + +<p>The moon was rising now, almost at full, and brought the natives, +standing on the beach, out in full relief. They were well armed, and +seemed very angry at the turn matters had taken. They had evidently been +sent out to capture the boat, and were not pleased at the report they +would now be obliged to make.</p> + +<p>They stood looking out at the fast receding boat for only a moment +before opening fire on her. Directly, however, the <i>Manhattan</i> was out +of range, and then they turned their attention to Ned's party, which, +being hidden by the thicket, might not have been discovered at that time +only for the instructions shouted out by Ned as the boat slid away.</p> + +<p>Knowing that he would be between two fires if a battle opened, Ned made +no show of resistance when the natives approached him with leveled guns. +There was a great bustle between the Tusks now, showing that the cargo +of the schooner, whatever it was, was being landed, and it was natural +to suppose that there existed an understanding between the crew and the +men on the island.</p> + +<p>"Don't try to shoot!" a voice said in good English. "My men have you +covered."</p> + +<p>"Who are you?" asked Ned, not much surprised, after what had taken +place, to find the party officered by an American.</p> + +<p>"An officer in the United States army," was the unexpected reply.</p> + +<p>"Then what are you doing all this shooting for?" demanded Frank. "Why +did you molest the <i>Manhattan</i>, here on government service?"</p> + +<p>"We'll see about the service she is on later," replied the officer. +"Beat it for the harbor, all of you."</p> + +<p>When the party reached the Tusks the crew of the schooner was busy +unloading long pine boxes which looked as if they contained shovels and +hoes, and seemed to be very heavy. The second vessel, the one which had +been observed in the north, lay close in.</p> + +<p>"Where's the officer in charge?" asked Ned, as they approached a group +standing at the head of the harbor.</p> + +<p>The officer who had captured the boys pointed out a tall, rather +fine-looking man who was standing, pencil and paper in hand, checking +off the boxes as they crashed down on the beach.</p> + +<p>"There he is," was the information given. "Lieutenant Carstens, and a +mighty good man at that!"</p> + +<p>The Filipino boy stepped forward, as if anticipating a friendly greeting +and then drew back in confusion. Lieutenant Carstens had looked him +fairly in the face and had not recognized him.</p> + +<p>Ned did not step forward to present his side of the case to the man +pointed out to him, for there was no need to do so. The man was the one +he had met in the tea house in Yokohama, in the Street of a Thousand +Steps.</p> + +<p>"Go on and give him a talk," Frank said, as Ned drew back.</p> + +<p>"There is not a bit of use," Ned replied. "The man is a crook, and is +not acting for the government here."</p> + +<p>"Then why these vessels?" asked Frank. "He must be a good deal of a wise +crook if be sails about with a fleet like that."</p> + +<p>"I rather think he is a good deal of a wise crook," Ned replied. "He's +the man whom Jimmie saw mixing with the rebel chiefs."</p> + +<p>"But look here," Frank insisted, "look at the blue coats unloading the +boxes. They are in the service, for sure. This Lieutenant Carstens may +be a crook, but he has a command in the United States navy, all right."</p> + +<p>One of the men who was assisting the Lieutenant in the tally now called +his attention to the prisoners and the Filipino boy standing by their +side. He listened for a moment to what was said to him, then motioned +for the Filipino boy to approach. The two talked for a moment in +Spanish, and then the boy, evidently much against his will, was sent on +board the ship.</p> + +<p>In a few moments the Lieutenant turned to Ned, a smile of victory on his +lips.</p> + +<p>"Well," he said, "your career as a pirate has been brought to a sudden +close."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by that?" demanded Ned.</p> + +<p>The question was a natural one, but was entirely unnecessary, for the +boy knew what was meant—knew on what desperate chance the lives of +himself and his friends rested.</p> + +<p>"I mean," answered the Lieutenant, "that you are under arrest for piracy +on the high seas. Also for deliberate murder. Also for the larceny of +the <i>Manhattan</i> from Manila."</p> + +<p>"Very well," Ned replied, coolly, "take me back to Manila for trial. I +am willing to go with you."</p> + +<p>"We don't take pirates back to Manila for trial," was the sneering +reply. "We give them a hearing and shoot them down on the spot. I'll +attend to your case directly."</p> + +<p>"You've got your nerve!" cried Frank.</p> + +<p>The Lieutenant turned with a snarl and pointed the end of his pencil +toward the two boys.</p> + +<p>"Put them in irons," he said. "We'll give them a drum-head when we get +the goods out of the <i>Clara</i> and will shoot them at midnight."</p> + +<p>The boys made no resistance. That would have been useless, for there +were twenty to one against them.</p> + +<p>"And," continued the officer, "send for the relatives of the natives +this man Nestor murdered on Banta Isle. We'll have them for witnesses."</p> + +<p>"They attacked me," Ned said, in a second sorry that he had spoken at +all.</p> + +<p>"They were ordered to recover the <i>Manhattan</i>, property stolen from the +government," was the reply, "and you resisted them. Put a stick in his +mouth, Ben, if he talks any more."</p> + +<p>Ben, a muscular, scar-faced fellow of thirty, stepped forward and took a +seat on the rock near the captives. He had the mild, soft eyes of a +student of theology and the square jaw and hard hands of a prize +fighter.</p> + +<p>"You're to keep your face closed—see?" he said, nudging Ned in the side +with an elbow. "You're to keep your clapper tied," he went on, "or I'll +tie it up for you. And how in the name of the Seven Seas did you ever +get in such a scrape, Ned Nestor?"</p> + +<p>The last words were spoken very softly, but before that Ned had +recognized the man as one he had known and liked on the water front in +New York.</p> + +<p>"You're in a bad box," Ben went on, "for that slob means business."</p> + +<p>"There's just one chance for us," Ned whispered. "If the rockets are all +right, and the gunboat is not too far away to see the signals!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<h3>THE FLARE OF A ROCKET.</h3> + + +<p>Ben looked at Ned in astonishment.</p> + +<p>"You never got the <i>Manhattan</i> away, did you?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"The boys got it away," replied Ned.</p> + +<p>The sailor remained silent for a moment, his face turned away from the +man he was supposed to be watching. When he spoke it was in a very low +tone, with little movement of the lips, and with his face still turned +toward the lieutenant.</p> + +<p>"You should have gone with it," he said.</p> + +<p>Ned did not reply. He had, at the last moment, made a rush for the boat, +but had been kept away from her by the natives.</p> + +<p>"Carstens has been after you for a long time," the sailor went on. "He +got his orders at Manila."</p> + +<p>"What was he doing on the island with the rebels?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"I'm sure I don't know," was the whispered reply. "There's something +mighty funny going on here. More mischief, I'm afraid. No one knows what +is in the boxes that are now being unloaded."</p> + +<p>"What does he say they are?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Supplies, to keep the chiefs good-natured."</p> + +<p>"He brought them from Manila?"</p> + +<p>"No, he picked them up over on the China coast."</p> + +<p>"I thought so," Ned answered.</p> + +<p>"Now, what is the answer to that remark," asked Ben.</p> + +<p>"You'll get the answer directly," Ned replied. "Listen to the rattle of +the alleged supplies when a box is thrown down hard!"</p> + +<p>"I was noticing that."</p> + +<p>"Sounds like guns?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"Yes, indeed, but why should the government be supplying the dagoes with +guns? We have all we can do to keep them decent when they have no arms +at all."</p> + +<p>"You sailed from Manila with Carstens?" said Ned, putting his statement +in the form of a question.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I left Manila on the <i>Clara</i>. He seemed to be all right until +after we picked up the boxes on the China coast. He was a good fellow, +when we left Manila, but he was confined to his cabin for a day and a +night and has been ugly as sin ever since. He came out of the sickness +looking a bit seedy but that ought not to cause him to turn into a +red-handed brute, had it?"</p> + +<p>"He has been acting badly, has he?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"As if the very Old Nick was in him," was the reply. "You heard what he +said about a drum-head court martial for you?" the sailor added.</p> + +<p>"Of course."</p> + +<p>"Well, he means it. He's got something against you that doesn't show on +the outside. He'll try you in five minutes and shoot you within the next +ten."</p> + +<p>"That would be murder."</p> + +<p>"Well, he has the authority, under the general instructions regarding +the treatment of pirates," said the sailor.</p> + +<p>"But you know that I'm not a pirate, and so does Carstens," Ned said. +"You know that I came here in the <i>Manhattan</i> without the consent of the +officers at Manila, but you know that I was only defending myself when +those natives were shot."</p> + +<p>"I don't know anything about it," was the discouraging reply. "I've +heard you spoken of as a pirate for the past few days, and the members +of the crew all believe you to be one. If he orders them to shoot you, +they'll do it."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I presume so," Ned said, soberly.</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do about it?" asked the sailor, after a short +pause.</p> + +<p>"The question," Ned replied, "is what are you going to do about it?"</p> + +<p>"I couldn't do a thing if I tried," was the reply. "When Carstens hears +that the <i>Manhattan</i> got away he will be red-headed, and will order the +trial to proceed at once. I'll see what I can do with some of the men I +know well, but the chances are that I'll only get myself into trouble +without doing you any good."</p> + +<p>"All you can do," Ned said, "is to delay the trial, and the execution, +if it comes to that."</p> + +<p>The officer who had made the arrest, after failing to seize the boat, +now approached the Lieutenant and said something to him in a low tone.</p> + +<p>"What?" the latter almost screamed. "You let the boat get away?"</p> + +<p>"They were too quick for us," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Too quick for you?" howled the Lieutenant. "Do you know what you've +done? You've ruined all my plans—the plans of the government. +Inefficiency is worse than open disobedience, and you may consider +yourself under arrest!"</p> + +<p>The officer saluted and turned away, a scowl on his face.</p> + +<p>"There is a likely man to talk with first," Ned suggested to the sailor. +"He will doubtless listen to you."</p> + +<p>The Lieutenant now turned sharply toward the prisoners.</p> + +<p>"What's going on there?" he demanded. "What are you talking to that +pirate for?" he added, approaching Ben threateningly.</p> + +<p>"Trying to see what I could get out of him, sir," Ben replied, saluting.</p> + +<p>"Well?"</p> + +<p>"Not a thing!"</p> + +<p>"Then cut it out," said the officer, moving away.</p> + +<p>By this time the boxes were all out of the <i>Clara</i>, and the other vessel +was brought up to the Tusks. A great pile of boxes lay in the sandy +beach, and these the Lieutenant counted over for the second time. Then +he beckoned to a dignified looking native and went over the ranks of +boxes with him.</p> + +<p>"Is it correct?" asked Carstens.</p> + +<p>The other nodded and passed a slip of paper to the officer.</p> + +<p>"Yokohama exchange," Ned heard him say.</p> + +<p>"It must be that the native is paying for the guns," Ned said, and Ben, +looking half frightened, half angry, nodded his head.</p> + +<p>The Lieutenant now turned to the unloading of the <i>Martha</i>, which was +now at the north Tusk. The hatches were soon lifted and the unloading of +the cargo began. It consisted principally of boxes and barrels.</p> + +<p>"Ammunition," Ned whispered.</p> + +<p>Again the sailor nodded.</p> + +<p>"Nice old government officer he is!" Frank said, in a half whisper.</p> + +<p>"He doesn't act like himself," Ben said, "not since he came out of the +cabin after being ill for a day and a night. And the boxes coming out of +the hold now do not look like the boxes that were put in it on the China +coast. I don't know what to make of it all."</p> + +<p>During all this talk Ned had been listening intently for the shriek of a +rocket, casting his eyes up the mountain side in the hope of seeing the +green light of a signal reflected there. But no reports of rockets in +the sky had come to his ears, and there were no signal lights reflected +on the mountain.</p> + +<p>The moon was well up in the heavens when the unloading of the <i>Martha</i> +was completed. Then the Lieutenant called the dignified native to his +side again, and once more the toll of the boxes was taken and a slip +passed over to the officer. This done, the men went back into the hold +again and began unloading small boxes, evidently containing tinned +provisions.</p> + +<p>"There," whispered Ben, "those are the goods Lieutenant Carstens took on +board at the Chinese port."</p> + +<p>"Then where were the guns and the ammunition taken on?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"That is what gets me," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Tinned goods were also put into the <i>Clara</i>?" Ned asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes; and they are going to take them out."</p> + +<p>"Thought they'd get the guns out first," said Ned. "Don't you see," he +added, "that this man Carstens is a traitor! Can't you see that he is +turning guns, undoubtedly stolen from the government, over to the rebel +chiefs, and getting his pay for them?"</p> + +<p>"It looks that way," was the slow reply, "but what am I to do about it?"</p> + +<p>"Talk with some of the men," urged Ned. "If those arms are taken away +from this island by the natives they will be used to murder soldiers and +sailors."</p> + +<p>"I know it," said the sailor, "but what can I do?"</p> + +<p>"Go and talk to the officer he just ordered under arrest."</p> + +<p>"And have him report the conversation in order to get back into the good +graces of the Lieutenant!" said Ben. "I'm not quite so green as that."</p> + +<p>"What sort of a reputation does this man Carstens bear in army circles?" +asked Ned, presently, seeing that it was of no use to argue with the +sailor, who was afraid of being brought into trouble if he tried to aid +the boy.</p> + +<p>"First-class," was the reply. "He is known as a brave and dependable +officer."</p> + +<p>"And any action he might take here would be endorsed at Manila?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; I think so."</p> + +<p>"Then," Ned said, grimly, "if the <i>Manhattan</i> doesn't get within +speaking distance of the gunboat very soon there will be a couple of +funerals on this island."</p> + +<p>"I am afraid you are right," said Ben. "If I could do anything for you I +would, but—"</p> + +<p>"Stop that clatter there!" shouted Carstens, pointing the end of his +pencil toward Ned. "Didn't I tell you to put a stick in his mouth if he +opened it again?"</p> + +<p>Ben saluted and said that he was trying to get a confession out of the +prisoner, and the Lieutenant turned back to the work of tallying the +tinned goods. It was quite evident that he did not intend to leave that +important duty to any subordinate.</p> + +<p>Ned knew that he was in the tightest hole his love for detective work +had ever fitted him into. He knew that the Lieutenant suspected him, and +would not hesitate to order him shot after a mock trial. He had little +doubt that the officer had, after his return from Yokohama, managed to +poison the minds of the officers at Manila against him. That was why, he +thought, he had been ordered by Major John Ross to remain at Manila +until instructions could be received from Washington.</p> + +<p>He understood that Carstens might murder him there at will and so close +his mouth forever. After the murder there would be no one to tell of the +secret meetings on the islands where the rebel chiefs were assembled, no +one to tell of the murder of Brown at the Yokohama tea house, no one to +tell of the arms unloaded there and turned over to the Filipinos—unless +the sailors should take it into their heads to investigate the long +boxes and take their lives in their hands by reporting their +discoveries.</p> + +<p>Lieutenant Carstens certainly had everything to his taste there, and Ned +was of the opinion that he would not be very long in exercising his +authority to the limit. While the boy was thinking over the situation, +trying to find some way out of the peril he was in, a sleepy-looking +young man came out of the cabin of the <i>Clara</i> and stepped ashore. He +was neatly dressed, with a handsome face and alert figure. Lieutenant +Carstens bowed to him as he approached the place where he stood and +pointed to the prisoners.</p> + +<p>"Do you know who that is?" whispered Ned to the sailor.</p> + +<p>"No," was the reply, "except that he is the son of a prominent +politician in the United States."</p> + +<p>Ned did not need to ask another question then. Jimmie had described the +senator's son, and Ned knew that the young man who had held possession +of the treaty box was there, in conference with the Lieutenant.</p> + +<p>"I guess," the boy mused, "they've got the top hand. The Lieutenant has +his military authority, and also has the senator's son here to swear to +anything he asks him to!"</p> + +<p>"You should have made a getaway in the <i>Manhattan</i>," Ben said, in a +moment.</p> + +<p>"Then I wouldn't have seen the unloading of the arms," Ned answered.</p> + +<p>Ben arose and stood yawning by the side of his prisoner. The Lieutenant +and the senator's son approached and stood for a moment looking down on +the two captives.</p> + +<p>"Why not call the drum-head now?" asked the senator's son. "It will help +to pass a couple of hours which might otherwise be dull."</p> + +<p>"Call it, then," said the officer. "The sooner it is over the better."</p> + +<p>Ned looked up to the mountain as one looks to a friend for assistance +and cheer when things are going hard, and the mountain did not +disappoint him. For there, high up, was the green light of a distant +rocket.</p> + +<p>The <i>Manhattan</i> had found the gunboat and was using the signals.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<h3>THE MAN BEHIND THE DOOR.</h3> + + +<p>It was a second later that the puff of the exploding rocket reached the +ears of those gathered about the boxes on the island, for sound does not +travel as rapidly as light. When it came, Lieutenant Carstens made a +dash for the side of the mountain and began the ascent. After ten +anxious minutes he was back again with a malevolent grin on his face.</p> + +<p>"The gunboat has captured the <i>Manhattan</i>," he said, facing Ned.</p> + +<p>Ned made no reply, for he was not a little puzzled at the remark. It +indicated that the speaker believed that he had as complete control over +the actions of those on the gunboat as he had over the conduct of those +on board the <i>Clara</i> and the <i>Martha</i>. If this was true, there was +nothing more to hope for. The gunboat would bring Pat, Jack, and Jimmie +back as prisoners, and the drum-head would deal with five prisoners +instead of two.</p> + +<p>The Lieutenant now dispatched a man to the shelf of rock on the mountain +which Ned had previously occupied, instructing him to report the +progress of the gunboat, supposed to be bringing in her prize. From time +to time the watchman called out that the two boats were rapidly nearing +the harbor, and Ned listened to the reports with varying emotions. Now +he was certain that the officer in charge of the gunboat would +understand the situation; now he was almost sure that the officer and +Carstens had had an understanding with each other from the first.</p> + +<p>Two chiefs, evidently men of distinction among the native tribes, now +approached the Lieutenant and spoke to him in Spanish. After replying +Carstens turned to the son of the senator.</p> + +<p>"Clem," he said, "perhaps you would better bring the box from the cabin. +These men are satisfied with the goods they have received, and are ready +to sign."</p> + +<p>And so the treaty was to be executed there—after the receipt of +sufficient arms and ammunition to make the revolt against the government +formidable. Ned saw the craft with which the game had been played, and +wondered if the officer who was coming on the gunboat could be induced +to make an examination of the boxes on the beach and the box about to be +brought from the cabin.</p> + +<p>If he could, that would end the trouble so far as Ned and his companions +were involved in it. If he stood hand-in-glove with Carstens, however, +he would pretend to doubt the statements offered by the prisoners and +refuse to make any investigation at all. In this case, there was likely +to be murder done before morning.</p> + +<p>"Gunboat rounding the point!" called the lookout.</p> + +<p>The critical moment was near at hand, and Frank and Ned looked into each +other's faces with apprehension in their eyes. Still, there was no +weakening, no outward sign of the mental commotion within.</p> + +<p>Presently the gunboat rounded the point to the north and slid into the +harbor between the Tusks, followed closely by the <i>Manhattan</i>. Ned saw +that the boys were still on the <i>Manhattan</i>, but that two men in uniform +were there with them. It looked to him as if the lads had been placed +under arrest, for they did not appear as jubilant as they would +doubtless have looked if their story had been taken at its full face +value.</p> + +<p>Lieutenant Carstens appeared to be astonished and decidedly out of +temper when the commander of the gunboat stepped out on the north Tusk. +He was nervous, too, and cursed roundly at one of the men who crossed +his path as he advanced to meet the officer. The three boys, who did not +now act like prisoners, flocked off the <i>Manhattan</i> and gathered around +Ned and Frank. Their faces, however, still showed anxiety rather than +joy at the success of their efforts to bring the gunboat to the island.</p> + +<p>"I presume you have your instructions regarding the <i>Manhattan</i> and her +crew?" Lieutenant Carstens said, after the formalities had been gone +through with.</p> + +<p>"I understand that the boys took the boat out without permission," was +the reply. "I am ordered to return her to Manila and to place the boys +under arrest."</p> + +<p>This was encouraging, for Ned knew that they would be safer under the +guard of the captain of the gunboat than that of Carstens. Everything +could be explained if they were taken back to Manila, and not shot like +dogs, without a trial.</p> + +<p>"Since leaving Manila," Carstens went on, "they have attacked several +native settlements and murdered several persons. I already have them +under arrest for piracy."</p> + +<p>"What is the proposition?" asked the other.</p> + +<p>"In my judgment they should be tried here, and, if convicted, executed +at the scene of their latest crime."</p> + +<p>"I protest against that," said the other.</p> + +<p>"See here, Curtis," Carstens said, roughly, "these fellows are my +prisoners, and I am here with special orders. That will be all."</p> + +<p>"Hardly all," was the cool reply, "for I have my gunboat in the harbor."</p> + +<p>Encouraged by this statement, Ned stepped forward and raised his bound +hands.</p> + +<p>"May I speak a word?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Certainly not!" said Carstens.</p> + +<p>"Go ahead!" the captain of the gunboat, Frederick Curtis, said. +"George," he added, addressing an officer, "go to the boat and train her +guns on this delightful party."</p> + +<p>Carstens turned deadly pale but smiled, and saluted.</p> + +<p>"I'm sure you will do nothing rash," he said.</p> + +<p>"I shall not overstep my instructions," was the reply. "What have you to +say?" he continued, facing Ned.</p> + +<p>"I want a few words with you in private," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"I protest!" shouted the Lieutenant.</p> + +<p>"Best speak here," was the decision of the captain.</p> + +<p>At this moment the senator's son made his appearance on the Tusk with a +steel box under his arm. He advanced quickly to the group and passed the +box to Lieutenant Carstens.</p> + +<p>"First," Ned began, "I ask you, Captain Curtis, to take charge of the +box just given to Lieutenant Carstens."</p> + +<p>Captain Curtis extended his hand for the box, but the Lieutenant drew +back.</p> + +<p>"This is unusual," the lieutenant said, "irregular and discourteous."</p> + +<p>"I waive the point for the present," Captain Curtis said, "but I insist +that the box shall not leave your hands until it passes into mine."</p> + +<p>"Next," Ned went on, encouraged by the words and manner of Captain +Curtis, "I want you to have the cabin of the <i>Clara</i> searched."</p> + +<p>Lieutenant Carstens approached the speaker in a threatening manner, but +Curtis stepped in front of him.</p> + +<p>"Why shouldn't the cabin of the <i>Clara</i> be searched?" the latter +demanded.</p> + +<p>"You shall pay for this indignity!" Carstens roared, turning away from +the group, with the box still under his arm. Ned pointed to the box, and +Captain Curtis stopped him.</p> + +<p>"I want that box," he said, calmly.</p> + +<p>Lieutenant Carstens hastened his steps and lifted the steel box in his +hands, as if about to toss it into the sea. Before he could execute his +purpose, however, the box was seized by the Captain.</p> + +<p>"If you wish to assist in the search of the cabin," Captain Curtis said, +"we will go there together. Come along, Nestor," he added, turning to +Ned and cutting the cord which held his wrists. "You suggested the move, +and you shall see what is discovered in the search."</p> + +<p>The Lieutenant moved along with the others, but paused at the head of +the stairway leading down into the little stern cabin.</p> + +<p>"I protest against this!" he roared, his face bloodless with passion or +fright.</p> + +<p>"By the way," Captain Curtis said, lifting the steel box high in the +air, "this appears to be quite heavy. Suppose we open it here?"</p> + +<p>"There is no key," Carstens replied.</p> + +<p>Ned held up the odd-shaped key he had found on the island first visited.</p> + +<p>"I think I can open it," he said, "but you'll find that Carstens has a +key if you'll take a look through his clothes."</p> + +<p>"Will you surrender the key?" asked Captain Curtis of the Lieutenant.</p> + +<p>"The boy lies!" thundered Carstens. "I have no key."</p> + +<p>"What does the box contain?" asked the Captain.</p> + +<p>"I don't exactly know," Ned replied, "but it is my opinion that it +contains a treaty pledging certain tribes to unite in rebellion against +the United States provided they are supplied with guns and ammunition."</p> + +<p>"Your opinion is of little account!" gritted the Lieutenant.</p> + +<p>"And I believe," Ned went on, "that other papers are in the box—papers +giving a history of the plot, also papers stolen from the government. +Anyway, if you say so, Captain, I'll open the box with my key and we'll +soon find out."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we would better retire to the cabin," suggested Captain Curtis, +noting the curious faces gathering about. "We can settle the whole +matter there."</p> + +<p>Lieutenant Carstens would not have entered the cabin if one of the +officers of the gunboat had not crowded him down the stairway.</p> + +<p>"This is an outrage!" he shouted.</p> + +<p>The senator's son now came hastily down the steps, his face red with +rage, his fingers working convulsively, as if already playing about the +throat of an enemy.</p> + +<p>"That box is mine!" he cried. "I demand that it be returned to me +unopened. I am the son of a United States senator."</p> + +<p>"If what I suspect is true," Ned said, "you will need all the political +pull a member of the senate has in order to keep yourself out of the +penitentiary."</p> + +<p>"Put that boy out of this cabin!" snarled the young man. "This is my +private room. I paid for its use during the cruise."</p> + +<p>Ned whispered a few words to the Captain, and the latter turned with a +smile to a door opening at the rear of the little room where the excited +group stood.</p> + +<p>"Well," he said, "there is a question here as to whether the box +contains any treasonable documents. If the box belongs to you, open it +and we'll see if the charge is true or false. If it is false the box +shall be returned to you."</p> + +<p>"I have lost my key," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"How long ago?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>The young man turned a supercilious face on the boy, but answered:</p> + +<p>"Several days ago. What is it to you?"</p> + +<p>"Where were you when you first missed it?" Ned persisted.</p> + +<p>"That does not concern you," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"If you lost it in Captain Godwin's station," Ned said, with a smile, "I +presume I have it."</p> + +<p>He held up the key he had found on the river bank, among the bushes, on +the morning following the abduction of Lieutenant Rowe, and the other +lunged for it.</p> + +<p>"Never mind!" Ned laughed, dodging away, "I don't care to part with the +key just now. After the investigation of the box is over you may have +it."</p> + +<p>"Unlock the box," ordered the Captain.</p> + +<p>Ned stepped forward with his key, but was brought to a stop by a beating +on the door of the rear cabin.</p> + +<p>"I forgot," the boy said, "and the man in there doubtless desires his +liberty. If some of you will unlock the door you will find the man the +government sent away in charge of this expedition."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean?" asked the Captain, while Carstens sank back in his +chair with a groan.</p> + +<p>"I think," Ned replied, "that you will find the real Lieutenant Carstens +on the other side of that door."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<h3>BOY SCOUTS UNEARTH PLOT.</h3> + + +<p>The door was opened instantly, and a man in the uniform of a lieutenant +in the United States Navy, stepped forth. He was pale and haggard, and +there was a bandage about his head, but his eyes were clear and bright. +Even in his emaciated condition his resemblance to the man crouching in +his chair was striking.</p> + +<p>There was a silence in the cabin for an instant as the man stepped +forth. Surprise was depicted on every face except those of Ned and +Captain Curtis.</p> + +<p>"You see I was right," Ned said.</p> + +<p>"You are Lieutenant Carstens?" asked the Captain.</p> + +<p>"I am," was the slow reply, "and I ask that the traitor cowering in the +chair be placed under arrest."</p> + +<p>"That has already been done," the Captain said. "How long have you been +confined in the cabin?"</p> + +<p>"Several days," was the reply, "ever since the first day out, and each +day seemed an eternity of years, for I knew that a treasonable scheme +was afoot. If you will open that steel box," he added, "you will find +the proof of my words."</p> + +<p>"So they tried to corrupt you, did they?" asked Ned, applying the key to +the box.</p> + +<p>"Indeed they did," was the reply, "and failing, they determined to take +my life. Why they delayed doing so is more than I can understand."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps it may be well to use the key held by this man Keene, who has +been personating me for so many days," Lieutenant Carstens said.</p> + +<p>"I know nothing about the box or its contents!" Keene shouted. "It was +given to me by the senator's son, and now I command you to restore it to +him as I received it, unopened."</p> + +<p>Captain Curtis raised his hand and three men sprang upon Keene, who +struggled violently for a moment and then dropped back, inert and almost +lifeless. A search of his pockets revealed a key which was the exact +duplicate of the one in the possession of Ned, and with this the steel +box was opened.</p> + +<p>Captain Curtis took a sheaf of papers from it and handed them to Ned.</p> + +<p>"See if your guess had any merit," he said, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>"Here," Ned began, separating the papers one by one, "is a treaty signed +by many native chiefs. Under its provisions, a thousand islands in the +Philippine group would have been in open revolt within a week."</p> + +<p>"This is all news to me!" gasped the senator's son, pale and frightened.</p> + +<p>"And yet you claimed the box!" Ned said.</p> + +<p>"But only as a piece of property placed in my possession as a sacred +charge," the young man answered. "I didn't know what it contained. This +man Keene, who has been posing as Lieutenant Carstens, alone knew what +was in the box."</p> + +<p>"That is false!" shouted Keene, "for you wrote the treaty, and witnessed +the signing of it. It was all done in the interest of that gigantic +corporation of which your very honorable father is the head!"</p> + +<p>"Are you ready to tell the truth at last?" asked the Captain.</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Keene, "I'll tell all I know about it. I was poor and in +disgrace in army circles, and this senator offered me more than I could +refuse. That is all there is to it. I'll tell the truth, fast enough."</p> + +<p>"You're a fool!" shouted the senator's son. "Who will believe what you +say? As you said a moment ago, you are in disgrace in army circles now, +having been cashiered for cheating at cards. No officer would take your +word, or your oath, for that matter."</p> + +<p>"And he," Keene faltered, pointing a shaking finger at the young man, +"was sent out here to pay me the price of my treachery and to see that I +delivered the goods!"</p> + +<p>"It is false!" the young man replied. "All a lie! Wait until you hear +from Washington! Then you'll see who is a traitor!"</p> + +<p>"And this," Ned went on, holding up another paper, "is the order which +followed Lieutenant Rowe to Captain Godwin's headquarters. Why they kept +it, I do not know, but keep it they did."</p> + +<p>"Read it," commanded the Captain.</p> + +<p>"It orders Lieutenant Rowe," the boy summarized, "to arrest Tag, Captain +Godwin's servant, and half a dozen other Filipinos at Godwin's +headquarters and place them in irons. It informs Lieutenant Rowe that he +must remain at Godwin's quarters until further instructions are sent to +him."</p> + +<p>"That paper," Keene said, "was retained to prove to the native chiefs +what difficulties we, their friends, were encountering in trying to +assist them in building up a confederacy of their own."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me that there is nothing more to say about this matter," +Ned said. "We boys came to the Philippines to assist the government in +unearthing this plot and bringing the leaders to punishment, and there +seems to be nothing more to be done."</p> + +<p>"But I don't quite understand it yet," Captain Curtis said. "How did you +know that this box contained the treaty? How did you know that Keene was +personating Lieutenant Carstens?"</p> + +<p>"This man Keene," Ned laughed, "played his hand awkwardly. Through spies +in the offices at Manila, doubtless, he learned that the treachery of +the Filipinos at Godwin's island had been discovered. He knew that the +government would look there first, and determined to block the +investigation until he could accomplish what he had set out to do and +get his blood money."</p> + +<p>Keene frowned up from his chair at the boy, but said nothing. The +senator's son smiled weakly and kept his eyes on the floor.</p> + +<p>"Go on!" the Captain said, greatly interested.</p> + +<p>"Lieutenant Rowe was detailed to investigate the matter, and ordered to +the Godwin island. If the isle has another name I have never learned of +the fact."</p> + +<p>"It is called Penalty Island," smiled the Captain, "because the man sent +there is supposed to be given the detail for some oversight of duty. +However, in the case of Captain Godwin, I do not think this holds good."</p> + +<p>"After the Lieutenant left for Penalty Island, then," Ned went on, +"Keene discovered what was going on and feared that Tag and his fellows, +if arrested, would snitch, as the boys have it. Then the messenger was +sent after Rowe with more definite instructions. That is, he was given +more positive instructions and sent out in haste. On the way to Penalty +Island the instructions were stolen and another paper substituted.</p> + +<p>"While the original order required Rowe to arrest Tag and his fellow +conspirators, the false one required the Lieutenant to return at once to +Manila. This would indeed have blocked the investigation and given Keene +and his confederates time in which to complete their work of organizing +the tribes.</p> + +<p>"But the messenger knew what the papers he had been given contained, and +when they were read by the Lieutenant—exactly opposite to the +instructions given him—there was a pretty row. He informed Rowe of the +substitution and advised him not to obey the orders delivered.</p> + +<p>"Tag and his men, clustered about the windows and porch of the nipa hut, +heard what was going on and decided to get rid of Lieutenant Rowe and +his party by assassination. This plan was not carried out because this +young man Clem, whom we know only as the senator's son, arrived with a +party of Americans and Filipinos.</p> + +<p>"This man Keene might have been with the party, but I'm not sure of +that. I don't know the date when he left Manila, or when he took charge +of the <i>Clara</i> as Lieutenant Carstens."</p> + +<p>"I was not there!" Keene gritted out.</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, you were!" insisted the senator's son. "You were in command of +the <i>Clara</i> at that time, with Lieutenant Carstens locked up in his +cabin."</p> + +<p>"That is a falsehood," Keene said, turning to Ned. "I was there at +Penalty Island, but I was not at that time in command of the <i>Clara</i>."</p> + +<p>"And only for me," Clem went on, "the Lieutenant and his men would have +been shot instead of being taken prisoners."</p> + +<p>Keene settled back into his chair without replying to this.</p> + +<p>"Why did you go to Yokohama?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>"So you recognized me?" growled Keene. "You knew me when you saw me in +the tea house? Well, I went there to kill Brown!"</p> + +<p>The assertion was made so savagely, so recklessly, that the listeners +gazed at the speaker in wonder.</p> + +<p>"Brown," continued Keene, "was blackmailing me. He was at Penalty Island +and was threatening to reveal what he knew unless I gave him a large sum +of money. He went to Japan and I followed and caused him to be killed."</p> + +<p>"And then you went back to Manila and went aboard the <i>Clara</i>?" asked +Ned.</p> + +<p>"Yes; and came down to witness the signing of the treaty."</p> + +<p>"Where did you get the guns?" asked Ned.</p> + +<p>Captain Curtis gave a quick start at the question.</p> + +<p>"The guns?" he asked. "What guns?"</p> + +<p>"The guns which were unloaded here to-night," was the reply, "and turned +over to the chiefs. If you will look through Keene's pockets again you +will find drafts in payment for them."</p> + +<p>"Where did you get the guns?" demanded the Captain.</p> + +<p>"Stole them from the government!" was the reply. "We caused them to be +loaded on board at Manila, before Carstens went aboard. He never knew +they were in the hold. We were to pick up a lot of tinned provisions on +the China coast—left there by a wrecked supply boat—and carry them to +natives supposed to be on the verge of starvation. I took Carstens' +place just before we reached the place where the tinned goods were. What +I want to know is this," he added. "How did you learn so much about what +we were doing, and intended to do?"</p> + +<p>"This young man," pointing to Clem, "had a battle with one of the men at +the nipa hut," was the reply. "He was not so strong as his opponent, and +was dragged about the floor. If you will look at his heels you will see +three large nails protruding from the right one. I saw them when he +first came out of the cabin, when he lifted his shoe to strike a match +for his cigarette.</p> + +<p>"During this struggle his right hand was injured a bit, cut so that the +blood ran from the wound. Now, after getting the prisoners to the canoe, +he opened the treaty box in order to place therein the original +instructions given to the messenger. If you will look at the paper you +will observe a slight smear of blood.</p> + +<p>"When he opened the box he took from it a very rough draft of the treaty +and threw it away, after burning it about half up. I found what was left +of it, bearing his mark, the bloody smear, and so learned what was in +the box—beyond all reasonable doubt. He lost his key there, and I found +it. The other key was in the possession of Keene, as you know."</p> + +<p>"But why did you go to Yokohama?" asked Keene.</p> + +<p>"I followed Brown there. At least I followed you and him to Manila. +There you both disappeared, and I was told that Brown had gone to +Yokohama. Do you remember of having trouble with him in a saloon at +Manila, and threatening him? Well, I found that out, and I found out +that you had been having trouble with him ever since returning to the +city.</p> + +<p>"It was easy to get his description, and so I followed him to Yokohama, +believing that I could get his confession. He fled to Japan because of +his fear of you, I take it?"</p> + +<p>"He went to Japan because I promised to meet him there and give him a +large sum of money," was the sullen reply. "I went there to kill him!"</p> + +<p>"And then you got the <i>Clara</i>, and circulated about the islands in her +launch, and conferred with the native chiefs. I frightened you away from +a couple of the conferences, as you know. You were betraying your +country, and trying to place the crime on the hands of Lieutenant +Carstens!"</p> + +<p>"I should have succeeded, and got away with a fortune only for you!" +growled the fellow. "Well," he added, "it is all in the game. I lost out +and you won out. Good luck to you!"</p> + +<p>They were too late to stop the sudden lifting of the hand to the mouth, +and when they lifted him from the floor of the cabin he was dead. The +senator's son stood over the body for a moment and turned to Captain +Curtis.</p> + +<p>"You know all about it now," he said. "If I am under arrest, take me to +Manila. I can get bail there."</p> + +<p>The guns were reloaded on the <i>Clara</i>, the ammunition on the <i>Martha</i>, +and the ships sailed at once for Manila, with half a dozen native chiefs +who had come to receive the arms locked up in the cabin formerly +occupied by Lieutenant Carstens. The removal of the arms and the capture +of the leaders brought the conspiracy to a close and the matter was +hushed up. Tag and his companions were arrested and punished.</p> + +<p>The young man who claimed to be the son of a senator pleaded guilty to +receiving stolen arms, stolen from the government, and was sentenced to +a long term in a federal prison. When it was all over, after Major John +Ross had condescendingly admitted the great value of Ned's services, +after the government had paid the boy a large sum for his work, the five +lads, Ned, Frank, Jack, Jimmie and Pat, arranged to spend a month among +the islands in the <i>Manhattan</i>.</p> + +<p>"Bounding from isle to isle!" Jack cried. "Lying in the boat when you +don't know whether the sea is the sky or the sky is the sea, both being +so blue!"</p> + +<p>"Well," Jimmie said, "I'll go along to see that you don't get captured +again."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to know whatever became of that man French," Ned said, +laughing.</p> + +<p>"Oh, he ducked," Frank said. "I heard Captain Curtis asking about him +last night. He was just a paid thief, and jumped his parole."</p> + +<p>"And we'll take Pat along," Jack said, "to leave signs in grass and send +up smoke signals of distress. How did you get the two columns to +working, Pat?" he added.</p> + +<p>"The natives are lazy and didn't like to work, so I offered to bring the +wood for them and build a fire. Well, I built two fires, as you know, +and they suspected something and tied me up again."</p> + +<p>"You're a handy Irishman, all right!" laughed Jack. "What have you done +with the Filipino Boy Scout? I saw him with you last night!".</p> + +<p>"He's going back to Washington," was the reply. "We may meet him over +there."</p> + +<p>On the following morning the boys would have been away in the +<i>Manhattan</i>, but that night Captain Curtis visited them and left a +sealed envelope with Ned.</p> + +<p>"You are to open that at Portland, Oregon," he said.</p> + +<p>Ned did not look altogether pleased when he read the papers contained in +the sealed envelope.</p> + +<p>"There's going to be trouble up in the Northwest," he said, "and we're +going there on government service. And we're going to have aeroplanes! +Think of it!"</p> + +<p>There was a shout, and Ned was almost buried under a collection of legs +and arms.</p> + +<p>"Whoop—ee!" cried Jack. "Me for the aeroplanes!"</p> + + + +<p>THE END.</p> + + +<p>The story of the Boy Scouts' adventures in the Northwest will be found +in the next book of the series, "Boy Scouts in the Northwest, or, +Fighting Forest Fires." Chicago, M. A. Donohue & Co.. publishers.</p> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1_1"><span class="label">[1]</span></a> Boy Scouts In Mexico; or, On Guard with Uncle Sam. Boy +Scouts in the Canal Zone; or, The Plot Against Uncle Sam.</p></div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="Other_Books_by_M_A_DONOHUE_CO" id="Other_Books_by_M_A_DONOHUE_CO"></a>Other Books by M. A. DONOHUE& CO.</h2> + +<h3>701-727 S. Dearborn Street,<br /> +CHICAGO</h3> + +<p><i>ASK YOUR BOOKSELLER FOR</i> THE DONOHUE COMPLETE EDITIONS and you +will get the best for the least money</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>Boy Scouts <i>SERIES</i></h2> + +<h4>EVERY BOY AND GIRL IN THE LAND WILL WANT TO READ THESE INTERESTING AND +INSTRUCTIVE BOOKS</h4> + +<h3>WRITTEN BY That Great Nature Authority and Eminent Scout Master G. +HARVEY RALPHSON of the Black Bear Patrol.</h3> + + +<div class="poem"><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts in Mexico; or, On Guard with Uncle Sam<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts in the Canal Zone; or, The Plot Against Uncle Sam<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts in the Philippines; or, The Key to the Treaty<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts in the Northwest; or, Fighting Forest Fires<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts in a Motor Boat; or, Adventures on the Columbia River<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts in an Airship; or, The Warning from the Sky<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts in a Submarine; or, Searching An Ocean Floor<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Scouts on Motor Cycles; or, With the Flying Squadron<br /></span> +</div></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>Alger Series</h2> + +<h4>For Boys</h4> + +<h3>The public and popular verdict for many years has approved of the Alger +series of books as among the most wholesome of all stories for boys.</h3> + + +<div class="poem"><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Adrift in New York<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Andy Gordon<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Andy Grant's Pluck<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Bob Burton<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Bound to Rise<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Brave and Bold<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Cash Boy, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Charlie Codman's Cruise<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Chester Rand<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Cousin's Conspiracy, A<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Do and Dare<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Driven From Home<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Erie Train Boy<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Facing the World<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Five Hundred Dollars<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank's Campaign<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Grit; The Young Boatman<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Herbert Carter's Legacy<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Hector's Inheritance<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Helping Himself<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">In a New World<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Jack's Word<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Jed, the Poor House Boy<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Joe's Luck<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Julius, the Street Boy<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Making His way<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Mark Mason's Victory<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Only an Irish Boy<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Paul Prescott's Charge<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Paul, the Peddler<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Phil, the Fiddler<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Ralph Raymond's Heir<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Risen from the Ranks<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Sam's Chance<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Shifting for Himself<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Sink or Swim<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Slow and Sure<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Store Boy, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Strive and Succeed<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Strong and Steady<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Struggling Upward<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Telegraph Boy, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Tin Box, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Tom, the Boot Black<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Tony, the Tramp<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Try and Trust<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Wait and Hope<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Walter Sherwood's Probation<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Wren Winter's Triumph<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Young Aerobat<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Young Adventurer, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Young Explorer<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Young Miner<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Young Musician<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Young Outlaw<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Young Salesman<br /></span> +</div></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>WOODCRAFT <i>for</i> Boy Scouts and Others</h2> + +<h3><i>By</i> OWEN JONES <i>and</i> MARCUS WOODMAN <i>With a Message to Boy Scouts<br /> + by</i> SIR BADEN-POWELL, +<i>Founder of the Boy Scouts' Movement</i>.</h3> + + +<p>One of the essential requirements of the Boy Scout training is a +Knowledge of Woodcraft. This necessitates a book embracing all the +subjects and treating on all the topics that a thorough knowledge of +Woodcraft implies.</p> + +<p>This book thoroughly exhausts the subject. It imparts a comprehensive +knowledge of woods from fungus growth to the most stately monarch of the +forest: it treats of the habits and lairs of all the feathered and furry +inhabitants of the woods. Shows how to trail wild animals; how to +identify birds and beasts by their tracks, calls, etc. Tells how to +forecast the weather, and in fact treats on every phase of nature with +which a Boy Scout or any woodman or lover of nature should be familiar. +The authorship guarantees it's authenticity and reliability. +Indispensable to "Boy Scouts" and others. Printed from large clear type +on superior paper.</p> + +<p>Embellished With Over 100 Thumb Nail Illustrations Taken From Life</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>Oliver Optic Series</h2> + + +<h3>For a full generation the youth of America has been reading and +re-reading "Oliver Optic." No genuine boy ever tires of this famous +author who knew just what boys wanted and was always able to supply his +wants.</h3> + +<div class="poem"><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">All Aboard<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Brave Old Salt<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boat Club, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Fighting Joe<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Haste and Waste<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Hope and Have<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">In School and Out<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Little by Little<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Now or Never<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Outward Bound<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Poor and Proud<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Rich and Humble<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Sailor Boy, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Soldier Boy, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Try Again<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Watch and Wait<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Work and Win<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">The Yankee Middy<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">The Young Lieutenant<br /></span> +</div></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>THRILLING, INTERESTING, INSTRUCTIVE BOOKS</h2> + +<h3>By HARRY CASTLEMON</h3> + + +<h4>No boy's library is complete unless it contains all of the books by that +charming, delightful writer of boys' stories of adventure, <span class="smcap">Harry +Castlemon</span>.</h4> + +<div class="poem"><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Boy Trapper, The<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank the Young Naturalist<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank in the Woods<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank on the Lower Mississippi<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank on a Gunboat<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank Before Vicksburg<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank on the Prairie<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Frank at Don Carlos Ranch<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">The First Capture<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Struggle for a Fortune, A<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Winged Arrows Medicine<br /></span> +</div></div> + + + + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Boy Scouts in the Philippines, by +G. Harvey Ralphson + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY SCOUTS IN THE PHILIPPINES *** + +***** This file should be named 20208-h.htm or 20208-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/2/0/20208/ + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +book was produced from scanned images of public domain +material from the Google Print project.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/20208-h/images/bsp0001.jpg b/20208-h/images/bsp0001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4900bdd --- /dev/null +++ b/20208-h/images/bsp0001.jpg diff --git a/20208-h/images/bsp0002.jpg b/20208-h/images/bsp0002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..55947c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/20208-h/images/bsp0002.jpg diff --git a/20208-h/images/bsp0003.jpg b/20208-h/images/bsp0003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..26c8d81 --- /dev/null +++ b/20208-h/images/bsp0003.jpg diff --git a/20208.txt b/20208.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f533aa --- /dev/null +++ b/20208.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6965 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Boy Scouts in the Philippines, by G. Harvey Ralphson + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Boy Scouts in the Philippines + Or, The Key to the Treaty Box + +Author: G. Harvey Ralphson + +Release Date: December 29, 2006 [EBook #20208] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY SCOUTS IN THE PHILIPPINES *** + + + + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +book was produced from scanned images of public domain +material from the Google Print project.) + + + + + + + + + + Boy Scouts in the Philippines + + Or + + The Key to the Treaty Box + + By Scout Master G. Harvey Ralphson + +Author of "Boy Scouts in Mexico; or On Guard with Uncle Sam." "Boy +Scouts In the Canal Zone; or The Plot Against Uncle Sam." "Boy Scouts in +the Northwest; or Fighting Forest Fires." + + +Copyright 1911. +M. A. Donohue & Company. +ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. + +Eleotrotyped, Printed and Bound by M. A. Donohue & Co. + + + + +[Illustration: Boy Scouts in the Philippines; or The Key to the Treaty +Box.] + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I. Black Bears and Wolves + + II. It's Up to the Boy Scouts + + III. The Midnight Visitor + + IV. The Signals in Grass + + V. On the Rim of the China Sea + + VI. The Low Call of a Wolf + + VII. A Missing Motor Boat + + VIII. Wigwags from the Beach + + IX. Two Keys to the Treaty Box + + X. A Hot Night in Yokohama + + XI. A Fairy History of Japan + + XII. Pat Takes a Big Chance + + XIII. Of the Wild Cat Patrol, Manila + + XIV. The Senator's Son Seeks a Key + + XV. Signal Lights in the China Sea + + XVI. For Piracy on the High Seas + + XVII. The Flare of a Rocket + + XVIII. The Man Behind the Door + + XIX. Boy Scouts Unearth Plot + + + + +Boy Scouts in the Philippines + +OR + +The Key to the Treaty Box + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +BLACK BEARS AND WOLVES. + + +"Wake up--wake up--wake up!" + +Frank Shaw, passenger on the United States army transport _Union_, San +Francisco to the Philippines, awoke in his cabin to find the freckled +face of Jimmie McGraw grinning above him. + +"What's the use?" he demanded, sleepily and impatiently. "It will be +only another roasting day on a hot deck on an ocean fit to stew fish in. +What's the use of getting up? I'm going to sleep again." + +Frank's intentions were all right, but he did not go to sleep again. As +he turned over and closed his eyes, Jimmie seized him deftly by the +shoulders and dumped him out on the scarlet rug which covered the floor +of the stateroom. + +Frank was seventeen and Jimmie was younger, and so there was a mixture +of legs and arms and vocabulary for a moment, at the end of which Jimmie +broke away and made for the door, which he had thoughtfully left open as +a means of retreat. + +Left thus alone on the tumbled blankets of the bunk from which he had +been hustled, Frank rubbed his eyes, threw a pillow at his tormentor, +and began making his way toward his cozy nest, much to Jimmie's disgust. + +"Aw, come on!" the boy urged, still standing in a safe place by the +doorway. "It's hot enough to melt brass in here, an' the siren's been +shoutin' for half an hour! That means land--the Philippines! Perhaps you +think you're lookin' for Battery Park, in little old New York! Get up +an' look out of the port, over the rollin' sea, to the land of the +little brown men!" + +Looking through the doorway, over the boy's shoulders, Frank smiled +serenely at what he saw and sat waiting for something to happen. Then +Jimmie was propelled headlong into the room, where he landed squarely on +top of the drowsy boy he had dragged out of bed. There was another +scramble for points, and then two boys of about seventeen showed their +faces in the doorway, laughing at the mix-up on the floor. + +The transport's siren broke out again in its long, shrill greeting of +the land which lay above the rim of the sea, and Frank, catapulting +Jimmie against the wall at the back of the bunk, hastened to the open +port and looked out. + +The boys who had entered the cabin so unceremoniously were Ned Nestor +and Jack Bosworth, who were traveling with Frank and Jimmie to the +Philippines, the party being under the direction of Major John Ross, of +the United States Secret Service. + +They had left Panama about the middle of April, and it was now not far +from the first of June, the transport having been delayed for a week at +Honolulu, where she had put in for supplies. The boys had enjoyed the +trip hugely, but were, nevertheless, not displeased at the sight of +land. + +Leave it to the lads themselves, and this was a Boy Scout expedition, +although there was a serious purpose behind it. Ned Nestor and Jimmie +McGraw were members of the Wolf Patrol, Ned being the Patrol Leader, +while Frank Shaw and Jack Bosworth were members of the famous Black Bear +Patrol, both of the city of New York. + +Those who have read the first two books of this series[1] will readily +understand the object of this journey to the Philippines, but for the +information of those who have not read the books it may be well to state +here that while in Mexico and the Canal Zone Ned Nestor had been able to +render valuable services to the United States government. + +[Footnote 1: Boy Scouts In Mexico; or, On Guard with Uncle Sam. Boy +Scouts in the Canal Zone; or, The Plot Against Uncle Sam.] + +At the close of his work in the Secret Service department of the Canal +Zone government, he had been invited to accompany Major Ross to the +Philippines for the purpose of assisting in the uncovering of an alleged +treasonable plot against the peace of the Islands and the continued +supremacy of the United States Government there. + +Knowing little of what there was to be done, or of what was expected of +him, Ned had accepted the invitation to enter the Secret Service, +stipulating only that his chums should be permitted to accompany him to +Uncle Sam's new and somewhat unruly possessions in Asia. + +"I won't go if we can't make a Boy Scout outing of it," he had insisted. +"I shall be glad to be of service to the government, but I want the boys +to have a jolly time, too. There must be plenty of opportunities for +adventure in the Philippines," he had added, thinking of the many odd +customs of the tribes of natives on the twelve hundred islands that +constitute the group. + +"I shall be only too glad to have your friends go," the Major had +replied, "for I understand that they contributed not a little to the +success of your efforts in Mexico and the Canal Zone." + +"I couldn't have done a thing without them," had been Ned's generous +reply, and so it was all arranged. + +However, only three of the boys who had accompanied Ned from New York to +the Canal Zone had been at liberty to go to the Philippines, the others +reluctantly turning back home. The three to go were now assembled in the +cabin occupied by Frank Shaw, looking out to the dim line of land. + +Frank Shaw was the son of the owner and editor of an influential daily +newspaper in New York, Jack Bosworth was the son of a wealthy board of +trade man, and Jimmie McGraw was a Bowery newsboy who had attached +himself to Ned Nestor, his patrol leader, just before the visit to +Mexico and had clung to him like a puppy to a root, as the saying is, +ever since. + +"Come on, boys," Ned said, after an inspection of the ocean through the +port, "let's go on deck. We can see the whole show from there." + +The boys trooped up to the rail and were soon joined by Major Ross. It +was now a little after dawn, and a sunrise breeze was lifting little +ripples on an otherwise motionless sea. Spread out, a couple of miles +away, was the outline of shore the siren was greeting. + +It was a low coast, stretching away to right and left until lost in the +mists of the morning. It looked monotonous and furry with forests, +deserted and still, but in time the presence of man became observable. + +A river wound down out of the trees and broke over a bar set against its +mouth in the sea. On the right bank of the stream a tin roof glistened +in the early sunlight. Wherever there is a tin roof there is +civilization in some degree, though this seemed to be a sleepy one. + +Presently the call of the siren brought forth a boat, not in the little +bay, but up the river a few hundred yards. It moved down to the +coastline with only the canopy, which was of faded scarlet cloth, and +the heads of the rowers in view above the tops of the bushes and +creepers which lined the stream. + +The land smoked under the rising temperature brought on by the climbing +sun, and Jimmie chuckled as he nudged Frank's arm. + +"I see your finish there," he said. "A boy as fat as you are will melt +over there. There's nothin' left of the brown men in the boat but their +heads!" + +Frank looked along the bow-shaped shore, over the palms, now touched +with the red light of a hot morning, and wiped his streaming forehead. + +"This doesn't look good to me!" he said. "I thought we were going to +Manila!" + +"Didn't Ned tell you about it?" asked Jack Bosworth. + +"Not a word." + +"Well, we're going to disembark here; I don't know the name of the +place, or even if it has one, and make our way among some of these +islands in a motor boat. There are a lot of secret service men at Manila +who don't want to mix with us kids!" + +"That's nice!" Jimmie cried. "We won't do a thing to 'em! We'll put it +over 'em good, you see if we don't! I reckon Ned Nestor can give any of +'em half a string an' win out, at that!" + +"Of course he can," Jack replied, "but I'm not kicking at this way of +doing things. I'm thinking of the motor boat, and the long days and +moony nights in the seas among these islands!" + +"It will be great!" Jimmie admitted. + +There was a short pause, and then he added, thoughtfully: + +"Who's goin' to run the boat?" + +"I can run it," was the reply. + +"Yes, you can!" + +"I own one," insisted Jack. + +"Yes, an' you hire a man to run it!" Jimmie grinned. "I don't believe +you can run a hand cultivator!" + +"Of course not!" laughed Jack. "But I can operate a motor boat," he +added. + +"You can?" demanded Jimmie, with an exasperating grin. "Then perhaps you +can tell me if the motor boat we're goin' to have has pneumatic brakes?" + +"Sure it has!" laughed Jack. "And it also has a rudder that you can +unship and use as a safety razor. You might open up a barber shop with +it, only the eminent citizens over here don't have any more whiskers +than a squash." + +"You're gettin' dippy!" Jimmie shouted, darting away to the spot where +Ned and the Major were standing. + +Directly a flag broke out over the tin roof and in a short time the boat +was at the transport's side. Full of enthusiasm, and with high hopes for +the immediate future, the boys and the Major descended to the shaky +little craft and the transport steamed off, her rails lined with +soldiers and civilians cheering the boys and wishing them good luck. + +The last voice they heard as the boat crossed the bar and swung into the +sluggish current of the river was that of Captain Helmer, who had made +chums and companions of the boys on the way over. + +"Good hunting!" he cried, through his megaphone, and the marine band +struck up "Home, Sweet Home," "just to give us a cheerful mood on +entering this desolate land!" as Major Ross declared. + +"Do they all think we're goin' huntin'?" asked Jimmie, as the windrows +of salt water heaped up by the transport grew smaller and lapped on the +beach. + +"Sure they do," replied Jack. "Do you think the Major told them we were +going into the jungles to catch a few recruits for the federal prison at +Manila? Nice thing, that would be!" + +"There are just two persons, so far as I know, outside of the Secret +Service headquarters at Washington, who know what we are up to," Major +Ross said. "These are Colonel Hill, of the Canal Zone force, and Captain +Godwin, who is to receive us here." + +The brown oarsmen tugged and strained at the oars, and the waters of the +river came up to the rim of the native boat and crept in and spread +themselves over the rotten floor. The boys were all glad when the prow +touched the little dock at the lone pueblo where Uncle Sam's flag +snapped in a breeze which was coming over the trees, bringing with it a +musty smell of decaying undergrowth. + +Captain Godwin met them at the landing with great hand outstretched. He +was a stout, brown-faced man of fifty, with muscles like iron and a mind +all stuffed and tucked in with the glory of the United States. He was +proud of the service he had passed the greater part of his life in, and +was proud of the record for efficiency he had made. A kindly, bluff, +seasoned old man of war, with soft blue eyes and a hard hand. + +"I should have sent the _Manhattan_ after you," he said, after +introductions had been made, "only there's something the matter with her +batteries." + +"You bet there is!" laughed Jimmie. "The only battery that never gets +under foot or loses a shoe is at the foot of Broadway, in little old New +York!" + +"Hardly at the foot of Broadway," Jack began, but Jimmie interrupted. + +"Never mind," he said, "if we know where it is! You go an' fix up this +motor boat of the name of _Manhattan_, an' we'll have a ride." + +"The boat will be ready by to-morrow morning," the Captain said, smiling +at the friendly arguments of the two boys. "I presume you have your +instructions?" he added. + +"I have them here," Major Ross said, rather sternly, as he took a sealed +packet from his pocket. + +"When and where are you to open that packet?" asked the Captain. + +"On my arrival at this place," was the dignified reply. + +The Major seemed to be of opinion that the Captain was stepping on his +official rights. + +"Then we'll go up to the house and you look them over while I see what +can be found to celebrate this auspicious event! I don't often have the +pleasure of meeting four happy, husky, hungry boys fresh from the United +States!" + +"You're the goods, all right!" shouted Jimmie. "But how did you guess we +were hungry?" + +Captain Godwin laughed and clapped both his broad palms on his knees. + +"How did I know?" he roared. "That's a good one! As if the boys weren't +always as hungry as black bears!" + +"There are two Black Bears in the party!" Jimmie said. + +"And two Wolves!" Jack added. + +Captain Godwin looked from face to face in smiling wonder, and the boys +thrust all kinds of Boy Scout signs and words at him. + +"I see," the Captain said, then. "I've heard of the Boy Scouts! And now +we'll go up to the house. Never saw a Black Bear or a Wolf that wasn't +hungry!" + +The jolly Captain gave instructions to his servants and they promised, +with many native grimaces and a waste of tribal vocabulary, to have a +satisfying breakfast ready in half an hour. Then Godwin drew Major Ross +and Ned to one side, his good-natured face assuming a grave expression +as he seated them in a private room of the rambling and wobbly old +house. + +"There's something unexpected here," he began, as the Major sat with his +sealed instructions in hand, "and I wish you would open your packet +immediately. To tell you the truth, I'm not a little worried." + +The Major opened the packet and glanced hastily through several typed +sheets. Then his keen eyes grew puzzled and he arose to his feet and +looked out of the window. + +"Something here I don't understand," he said. "Where's this Lieutenant +Rowe?" + +"You are to confer with him here?" asked the Captain, and Major Ross +nodded assent. "Do you know what information he possesses?" continued +the Captain, "what papers he has in his possession?" + +"My instructions say he has important documents." + +"Well," said the Captain, arising to his feet, "now I'll take you to the +place where I last saw Lieutenant Rowe. He came here in the launch +_Manhattan_, which you are to have use of, last night, and went to bed +without talking much with me. I suspect that he brought the boat from +Manila, though I can't be sure. Anyway, he brought with him only two +young men who did not seem to know much about the boat--Americans." + +"Have you seen him, the Lieutenant, or either of the young men, this +morning?" asked the Major, impatiently. "And why do you say you will +take us to the place where you saw him last? What is wrong here?" + +"I don't know," was the reply. "There are no known hostile elements +here, and yet the little nipa hut where Rowe and his men lodged last +night was found empty this morning--empty and the contents in disorder, +the floor spotted with blood." + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +IT'S UP TO THE BOY SCOUTS. + + +"Do you mean that he has been murdered?" asked the Major, his face, +flushed before, looking gray and old. + +"I don't know," was the reply. "I have tried to look on the bright side +of the thing, but there's a subconscious warning in the back of my brain +somewhere. I've tried to be jolly, this morning, but I've about reached +the end of my store of optimism. It looks to me as if the Lieutenant had +been made way with." + +"This leaves me stranded," the Major said. "I am ordered to act only +after acquiring later information concerning the situation, the same to +be delivered by Lieutenant Rowe. In the absence of that information, +what am I to do? My present orders may be all wrong." + +"Perhaps," Ned suggested, "it may be well to visit this hut and see what +we can discover there. The Lieutenant may have gone out for a morning's +hunt." + +"No such good luck as that," replied the Captain. "Why, the little +furniture the hut contains is broken to bits, and the floor is streaked +with blood! There was a fight in there last night, depend upon it!" + +"And no one heard anything unusual during the night?" asked Ned. + +"Not that I know of." + +"Are the usual residents of this place, so far as you know, all here +this morning?" was the next question. + +"I will ascertain that," said the Captain. "I learned of the strange +happening only a few minutes before your arrival." + +The three left the house, the only one of size there, and proceeded down +a mushy street between huts and thickets until they came to a little +nipa hut set high on poles. They climbed the bamboo stairs and stood on +the swaying porch in front, seeing no one about the place. + +The door stood wide open, and Captain Godwin was first to enter. There +was only one room in the hut, but there were two alcoves opening from +it--narrow little alcoves in which, evidently, bedding and articles not +wanted for immediate use were tucked away during the day. + +As the Captain had stated, the apartment was in disorder. The mosquito +wiring had been torn from the three windows and the door and now lay in +a tangle on the floor. Bamboo chairs had been broken, and there was a +faint odor of whisky in the room. Major Ross glanced casually over the +interior and turned away. + +"I can't stop here now," he said impatiently. "I've got to write a +report of this happening and get it to Manila. I suppose I can depend on +one of your men to deliver a letter for me?" he added, turning to +Captain Godwin. + +"Yes, but it will mean a great delay," replied Godwin. "It will take at +least a week for a man in a swift canoe to go to Manila and return +here." + +"It is unfortunate," grumbled the Major, "but I must, I suppose, endure +the delay. Unless," he continued, a sudden smile coming to his face as +he thought of the cozy club-life he had formerly enjoyed at Manila, +"unless I go with the messenger and receive my instructions verbally." + +"And in the meantime--" + +Captain Godwin was about to protest against being left alone there under +such tragic circumstances, but Ned caught his eyes and stopped him. He +had no idea what the boy had in mind in checking his expression of +regret at the proposed departure of the Major, but he liked the +appearance of the lad and closed his teeth on the words he was about to +say. + +"And in the meantime," he repeated, "we can look about for some traces +of the missing man," the Captain completed the sentence. + +"Exactly," replied the Major. "I regret exceedingly the peril of the +situation so far as Lieutenant Rowe and his companions are concerned, +and sincerely hope that they are all alive and not in serious trouble, +but it appears to me that my place is at Manila at this time, and not +here. We must start in on this remarkable case right, and I must confer +with my superior officers." + +"We can put in the time very well, looking up clues in the vicinity," +said Ned. He wanted to handle the matter in his own way, knowing that +while Major Ross might be an expert in military matters, he did not +possess a particle of the detective instinct so necessary at that time. + +"Yes," the Major replied, with his mind fixed on a few days of lazy +routine at Manila, with all the comforts of civilization within reach of +his hand, "yes, you may be able to accomplish a great deal in the way of +discovering clues, and may even be able to locate the missing men--I +have no idea that they have been murdered, but understand this: You are +not to take any important action without consulting with me." + +"Of course not," Ned replied, chuckling in his sleeves at the thought of +waiting in an emergency for instructions from Manila. "I hope we shall +be able to report good progress upon your return. Shall you go in the +launch?" he added, hoping with all his strength that the officer would +not take the motor boat with him. + +"Certainly," was the quick reply. "I must make progress, you know!" + +Jimmie and Jack, who had followed their chum to the nipa hut, now +entered and stood by the door. Ned saw them winking knowingly at each +other when the Major spoke of going away in the motor boat, and decided +to prod their inclinations a bit. + +"I shall be sorry to have the _Manhattan_ away just now," he said, "for +we might use her to good advantage during your absence. However, there +seems to be no other way." + +Jimmie and Jack slid out of the doorway and down the oscillating bamboo +stairs, and when, an hour later, the Major went to the little dock where +the _Manhattan_ lay he found the two boys working over her, sweating and +complaining in loud voices against the inefficiency of modern motor boat +manufacturers. The Major went on with his preparations for departure, +never doubting that the _Manhattan_ would be ready for him in a few +minutes. At last Jimmie turned an oil-smeared face toward Ned. + +"No use," he exclaimed, "she won't go! The batteries are off and there's +something wrong with the carbureter, and the spark-plug is twisted, and +the delivery is all to the bad. Perhaps Major Ross can bring new parts +down from Manila." + +"Shut up, you dunce!" whispered Jack. "You'll give yourself away!" + +Captain Godwin nudged Ned with an elbow and turned his laughing eyes +away. He saw what the boys were doing, and rather approved of the idea +of journeys among the islands in the motor boat during the Major's +absence. + +"Preposterous!" shouted the Major. "You must get the boat in shape to +make the voyage to Manila! My mission will not endure delay. Captain +Godwin, see what you can do with the boat." + +Captain Godwin knew about as much of the running gear of a motor boat as +did Jimmie, but he at once oiled up his hands and his face and tugged +and pulled at the wheel, tapped on the supply pipes, investigated the +electric appliance, and finally announced that the boat was not in +running order. + +The Major blustered about for a few moments and then set forth on his +mission in the canoe in which the party had landed. + +"Perhaps," he said, at parting, "I may be able to catch a ship at +Banglo, or whatever the name of that little pueblo is on the island to +the west. In that case I shall return inside of ten days." + +And so the Major went away, urging the rowers to greater exertions and +wiping his red face with a red handkerchief. Then a strange thing +happened. Jack drove Jimmie away from the _Manhattan_, asked Captain +Godwin to bring him a wrench, and in ten minutes, or as soon as the +canoe bearing the disgusted Major was conveniently around a bend, the +boat was sailing about on the river like a bird in the sky. + +Captain Godwin started to censure the boys for the deception they had +practiced on the Major, but his severe words ended in a laugh. + +"You helped!" Jimmie said, accusingly. "You knew what was up! Why didn't +you tell him?" + +"We'll discuss that later," was the smiling reply. + +"Anyway," Jimmie said, "we're rid of the old bluffer, and may be able to +do somethin', if he stays away long enough." + +"You came near spoiling the whole thing," declared Jack, grinning at +Jimmie. "You and your talk about twisted spark-plugs! You'd have been +finding worn places in the spark next! You know about as much of a motor +boat as a pig knows of the hobble skirt. Good thing the Major knows less +about a boat than you do!" + +"Why didn't he use the wire, instead of going off on that long journey?" +asked Jimmie. + +"The government can't lay cables to all these tiny islands," Captain +Godwin replied, "but we are promised a wireless outfit before the season +closes. Now, if you are ready," he added, turning to Ned, "we'll go back +to the hut and make the examination suggested. I'm afraid there was a +tragedy there last night." + +"Are any of the people missing from the pueblo?" asked Ned, as the boat +came to the dock and they all stepped ashore. + +"Not a man missing," was the reply. + +"Have you talked with the man who was sent to the hut to wait on the +Lieutenant and his companions?" + +"Only briefly," was the reply, "but he will be at the hut when we get +there. He is rather above the average native in intelligence, and may be +able to throw some light on the mystery." + +"Is he dependable?" asked Ned. + +"I think so. He has been with me for a long time, ever since I came to +this out-of-the-way jumping-off place." + +"Well," Ned said, "you go back to the hut, if you will be so kind, and +take the boys with you. I want to look about a little." + +Captain Godwin hesitated, but Jack started away. + +"Let Ned alone," he said. "He'll be giving us the shape of the aeroplane +the Lieutenant and his men sailed away in before long!" + +"He wants to consult the dream book," added Jimmie. + +Frank Shaw, who had been sitting on the bridge deck of the _Manhattan_ +during this conversation, now sprang ashore and followed along after +Ned. + +"You ginks do a lot of talking!" he said. "Run along with the Captain +and I'll take care of Ned." + +Ned and Frank examined the ground around the pier and walked up and down +the river bank for some distance. Save here and there where the natives +drew up their canoes, and where the women came down with the meager +family washing, the bank on the pueblo side was covered with a growth of +bushes except where the little pier ran out in front of the house with +the tin roof. + +Several times Frank saw his companion take out a rule and measure +impressions he found in the soft earth under the thickets, and once he +saw him put something he had picked up in his pocketbook. Knowing well +the methods of his chum, Frank looked on with interest and maintained a +discreet silence. + +When the two reached the hut at last they found Captain Godwin and +Jimmie and Jack sitting on the porch with a government map of the +islands before them. + +"That is just what I was thinking of," Ned said, taking a seat by their +side. "I have yet to learn in what portion of the Philippines we are +stopping." + +"Strange the Major did not inform you as to that," Captain Godwin said. + +"I have an idea that he knew very little of our future movements when we +landed here," Ned said. "His instructions were unopened, remember, +besides being a month or more old." + +"I see," observed the Captain. "Well, you are on a little island of the +Babuyan group, in the Balintang channel, north of the island of Luzon +and southeast of the coast of China and Hong Kong. The transport sailed +due west from Honolulu and to the north of Luzon. The nearest station of +any size is Pata, on Luzon. The Major left without informing you as to +his instructions?" + +"Yes, he was in such haste to get away that he left us here without a +word of information as to what we were to do. Rotten, don't you think?" + +"He was in a hurry to get back to the soft side of military life at +Manila," laughed the Captain. "Well, before you investigate the hut it +may be well for me to give you some idea as to the situation. What I +have to say may give direction to your search of the place." + +"Everything is as when the discovery of the absence of the men was made, +I hope," Ned said. + +"Nothing has been touched," was the reply. + +"Then go ahead with your story," Ned replied. "I have come a long way on +speculation, and am anxious for something tangible." + +"Some months ago," the Captain began, "it was discovered that hostile +influences--hostile to the United States Government--were at work among +the outer islands of the Philippine group." + +"I was told that much." + +"Yes; well, investigation--and a crude and indifferent investigation it +was--developed the fact that the tribes on some of the islands were +forming an alliance against Uncle Sam." + +"Now," said Ned, "you have come to the end of my information of the +subject. What comes next?" + +"At first little attention was given to the matter. Some of the native +tribes are always in revolt, though the news of the battles and +skirmishes are kept off the wires. Finally, however, it was learned that +rifles were being received by the tribes belonging to this alliance." + +"Then some nation alleged to be civilized must be at the bottom of the +matter," Ned suggested. "I am anxious for you to come to that point." + +"Well," hesitated the Captain, "I don't know what nation to suspect. It +seems that no one does. I think that is the problem you were brought +here to solve." + +"It seems to me that the wise men at Washington ought to be able to +secure information on the subject," Ned ventured. + +"I half believe that the state department does know a lot about the +matter," the Captain replied, "but does not see fit to act in the +absence of conclusive proof." + +"But how can a mess of Boy Scouts get the truth?" demanded Ned. + +"By being Boy Scouts," was the smiling reply. "The launch was brought +here for your convenience, and you are to go floating about among the +islands north of Luzon, hunting, fishing, gathering specimens, and all +that until you find out what sort of people it is that is doing this +trading with the natives." + +"That was the idea in the Canal Zone," laughed Ned, "but we had little +hunting to do! It was quick action down there." + +"And I hope it will be here," said the Captain. "Military detectives +have been sent down here, but have gone back as ignorant as when they +came, for the seasoned secret service man shows what his occupation is +and betrays himself at the start. Now it is up to you. And you must go +ahead without further instructions, for Lieutenant Rowe, who was to have +posted you as to recent developments, is either dead or a prisoner in +the hands of the plotters!" + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +THE MIDNIGHT VISITOR. + + +There was silence on the unsteady porch of the nipa hut for some +moments, and then Frank Shaw asked: + +"Is there any proof at all that any government is trying to arm the +native tribes against the United States?" + +"If there is," the Captain replied, "I do not know of it." + +"It may be simply a commercial conspiracy," said Jack. + +"Go on!" exclaimed Jimmie. "If anybody should ask you about it, it is +the Japs, or the Chinks!" + +"When a play fails in New York, or a man jumps off one of the East River +bridges, if you leave it to Jimmie, the Japs or the Chinks are at the +bottom of it." + +This from Jack, who ducked low to avoid a blow from the newsboy, and +wandered off down the stairs leading to the porch. + +"Yes," the Captain said, "it may be a conspiracy for the acquisition of +wealth. I am not an anarchist, but it is my belief that there are many +corporations in the world who would set the nations at each other's +throats if a profit could be made out of it. But, after all, there is no +need of guessing. You boys are here to find out what is going on, and +you may now do it in your own way." + +Ned left the Captain talking with Frank and Jimmie on the porch and went +into the one room of the hut. Everything was in disorder there, as has +been said, and Ned moved about cautiously in order that nothing might be +disturbed. The Major and Captain Godwin, on their visit of the morning, +had been careful to leave the place just as it had been on the discovery +of the strange happening. + +There was a rough table in the center of the room, and three bamboo +chairs were overturned beside it. It was in front of one of the chairs +that the spots of blood had been found. The light matting which had +covered the floor here was torn and twisted, as if a heavy person had +clung to it and had been dragged away by superior strength. + +Under the edge of this piece of matting Ned found long scratches, as if +shoe heels had slipped there and protruding nails had furrowed the +floor. There were also various oblong papers and numerous match ends. On +the floor, under the rolling back of another chair, were the scattered +remnants of a pack of playing cards. Mixed with these, and lying between +the ace of clubs and the jack of diamonds, were half a dozen pieces of +gilt paper, seemingly torn from an official seal. + +In a corner of one of the alcoves, where it had been thrown or wafted by +the fan which swung from the ceiling at the middle of the room, was a +twisted piece of letter paper burned at one end. It seemed to the boy +that the paper had been twisted in the form of a torch and lighted to +give a more satisfactory illumination than that provided by the matches +which had been burned. It was about half consumed. + +After spending half an hour in the room Ned went back to the porch and +sat down. + +"What about it?" asked Frank. + +"The mud is settling," laughed Ned. + +"But not so the bottom can be seen?" asked Captain Godwin with a smile. + +"Not yet," was the reply. "Perhaps a little talk with the servant who +was sent here with Lieutenant Rowe last night might help to clear the +case," he added. + +Captain Godwin beckoned to a short, squatty Filipino who stood leaning +against a tree not far away and the fellow advanced deferentially up the +bamboo stairs, evidently much in awe of the Americanos. + +"Tag," the Captain said to him, as he stood with one brown hand clinging +to one of the roof supports, "this gentleman wants to ask you a few +questions about what took place last night." + +"Yes; I have been waiting." + +The English was almost perfect, and the fellow's appreciation of the +gravity of the situation was apparent. It was later explained to Ned +that Tag, as he was called by the Captain, had been educated in an +English school at Manila, and had lived in army circles nearly all his +life until he had taken service with Captain Godwin. + +"First," the Captain put in, "I want to say that it was not my fault +that Lieutenant Rowe did not lodge in my own quarters last night. I +proposed that to him, and he said that he had a great deal of work to +do, should be moving about more or less during the night, might be +detained here several weeks, and so preferred to set up a small +establishment of his own. This was the best that could be provided on a +moment's notice." + +"He was served with supper at your house?" asked Ned. + +"Yes; and he was to have _desayuno_ there this morning. That is, he was +to have his first breakfast with me. Later he was to arrange for a table +of his own." + +"You came here with them?" asked Ned of the Filipino. + +"I came on in advance to clear up the place." + +"I see. Who came with you?" + +"Two servants." + +"Did they come into this room--the room occupied by the Lieutenant and +his companions, I mean?" + +"No; they were working the fan from the porch." + +"Are those men in the place to-day?" + +"Yes; but they know nothing." + +"But they were to remain here during the night?" + +"They did, but they slept." + +"Drugged?" + +"I don't know. From the complaints they have of their heads I suspect +that they were." + +"And you were to remain here during the night?" + +"Yes, that was the understanding, but I was sent away about midnight." + +"By whom?" + +"By Lieutenant Rowe." + +"Did he give any reason for sending you away?" + +"He said they were going to bed and would not need me." + +"And did they go to bed as soon as you left? You, of course, remained +about the hut for a short time?" + +"Yes, I remained about the hut for half an hour. They did not go to +bed." + +"What were they doing?" + +"The Lieutenant was working over papers and the others were playing +cards." + +"Could you hear what they were talking about?" + +"Yes, until the other man came." + +Ned and the others bent forward with new interest. Here was a fresh +feature in the case--a man who had not been referred to before coming +into the hut about midnight. + +"Who," asked Ned, "was this other man?" + +"An Americano." + +"Had you seen him about the place before?" + +"Never. He came in the night and went in the night." + +"Was he in uniform--the uniform of a soldier?" + +"No; he wore citizen's clothes." + +"Which way did he come from?" + +"I don't know," was the surprising reply. "I first saw him when he was +climbing in at the window." + +"Climbing in at the window!" repeated Captain Godwin. "If he climbed in +at the window when the others were awake, he must have been expected!" + +"Yes; I should think so." + +"I can't understand this at all!" exclaimed Captain Godwin, his +good-natured face looking anxious. "Lieutenant Rowe said nothing to me +about expecting company. And why should he conceal the fact from me? +Why, indeed, should a visitor come crawling in at a window at midnight? +Are you sure it wasn't one of the three men I conducted to the hut that +you saw at the window?" he added, turning to the Filipino. + +"Oh, yes; I am quite sure it was a fourth man. He mounted to the +window-ledge on a ladder, pushed the screen aside and vaulted over the +sill." + +"And how was he received?" asked Ned. + +"He was welcomed, and given a chair at the table. But first he went back +to the window and made some sort of a signal to those waiting outside." + +"Oh, so there were others waiting outside!" grated out the Captain. "Why +didn't you come and tell me what was going on? Why didn't you tell me +about this the first thing this morning? That is the trouble with these +made-over men," he continued, half angrily as he looked at Ned. "You can +teach them to do things by rote, but when an emergency comes they are +like putty." + +"I had no instructions to report what I saw at the hut--no orders to +play the spy," answered Tag, indignant that his conduct should be +criticized. "And this morning you gave me no chance to talk with you." + +"How many people were there outside?" demanded the Captain. + +"I don't know," was the reply. "There was the flash of a match to show +that the signals from the hut were understood, and then I went to bed. +There is no accounting for the freaks of these military Americanos, so I +went to my bed. If I sat up at night taking note of the movements of the +soldiers sent here, I should get no rest at all, besides laughing myself +sick over the foolishnesses of them." + +Ned was watching the fellow with interest. He had no doubt that he was +telling the truth about what he had seen there the previous night--that +is, the truth so far as he went in the recital. Still, Ned did not trust +the fellow. He believed that he had seen more than he had described, +even if he had not been a party to what had taken place. + +"What else did you see here last night?" he asked. + +"Nothing--nothing at all." + +"And you say you went to bed without satisfying your natural curiosity +as to what you had seen?" roared the Captain. "I don't believe it! Buck +up now, and tell us what was done after the fourth man entered the hut, +or I'll send you to the military prison at Manila." + +"I have told everything," said Tag with a sniffle. "You Americanos +expect us to see everything and know everything! If we are so wise and +capable, why don't you permit us to govern ourselves--send away your +soldiers and let us handle the situation here?" + +The Captain frowned and fumed about for a moment, and Ned was afraid he +would carry out his threat of placing the Filipino under arrest. This, +he believed, would be about the worst move that could be made. Seeking +to conciliate the fellow, he said: + +"There is a great deal of sense in what you say, and I honor you for not +playing the spy on the officers. Captain Godwin will not send you to +prison, I am sure, as we need you here. For instance, we want the story +of the men who worked the fan. Will you talk with them and tell us what +they say?" + +Tag hastened away, somewhat mollified, and Ned turned to the Captain. + +"The fellow knows more than he pretends to," he said. "We must keep him +here, and make him think that we trust him." + +"I can talk with the fanmen myself," grunted the Captain, not very well +pleased with Ned's interference. "I know the lingo." + +"Of course," Ned replied, "but I want to know if Tag will tell us the +same story, as coming from them, that they will tell you under a rigid +cross-examination. In other words, I think Tag, as you call him, will +shape their stories to suit his own purposes." + +"And so you want to set a trap for him? All right! Go ahead, lad, and +make what you can out of this mess. What do you think those visitors +came here for at midnight? And do you believe they are responsible for +the disappearance of Lieutenant Rowe and his companions?" + +"Here comes Tag," Ned said. "Suppose we wait and see what he says of the +experiences of the fanmen." + +The Filipino had in a measure recovered his good humor and was very +respectful to the Captain. He addressed him instead of Ned when he +spoke. + +"They say they were given drink after the fourth man arrived and went to +sleep." + +"That accounts for the strange odor about the place!" cried the Captain. +"Now, what the dickens does it all mean?" + +"Cripes!" broke in Jimmie. "I wish I had as many dollars as times I +don't know. Say, when we goin' to get a ride in the _Manhattan_? Me for +the rollin' deep whenever you get this thing doped out." + +"It looks like we had work cut out for us here," Ned replied. "Now, +Captain," he went on, "it looks as if the late arrivals last night +drugged the servants and took the secret service men away by main +force." + +"Main force!" roared the Captain. "Why didn't they shoot, or yell, or +make some sort of a row that would have brought help? I've got a lot of +old women here who could have stood off an attacking party! +Force--nothing! Lieutenant Rowe was in the deal. He wanted to disappear +with something he had in his possession, and he worked the abduction +dodge." + +"You may be right," the boy replied, "still, that does not change the +fact that there were enough men about this hut last night to make just +such a capture--with the assistance of a clever man on the inside--a man +pretending to be friendly to the Lieutenant--say, for instance, the +fourth man, or--Tag." + +"How do you know how many men there were about here?" asked the Captain. + +"If you will go to the river bank a few rods south of the pier," was the +reply, "you will discover that a large canoe beached there last night. +You will see that it was drawn far up into the thicket, a task which +must have taxed the strength of at least eight men. Then, about the hut, +and especially under the windows which the visitor entered, there are +plenty of footprints." + +"Footprints!" echoed the Captain. "My people don't wear footgear that +leaves prints!" + +"There were at least three pair of European shoes in the group," Ned +went on, "Now, the next query is this: Why did the visitor enter by the +window? If you will notice the floor in there, below the two front +windows, you will see that the shades were drawn there last night, and +that they were pulled down when this other wreck was produced and torn +from the rollers." + +"I hadn't noticed that," the Captain said. + +"This shows that some one in this hut was expecting a visit, and also +that the visit was to be kept a secret from you. The front windows +overlook your quarters, and the window entered is the one most protected +from view from your place. Now, this precaution may have been taken by +the midnight visitor, coming here as a friend, or by an enemy, for the +purpose of concealing from you what went on here." + +"And that is why the Lieutenant did not sleep under my roof!" said the +Captain. "He was expecting the fellow. Well, what do you say, did the +fellow betray his confidence and bring enemies to carry him away?" + +"His friend might have been followed here," Ned replied. "He might have +been the person sought by the intruders. The next question is: Who was +this visitor?" + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE SIGNALS IN GRASS. + + +Captain Godwin turned to the Filipino. + +"Can you give us a description of him?" he asked. + +Tag shook his head. + +"I saw only his figure at the window," he said, "and only for an +instant. He was assisted in, and then after a time, the lights were +lowered, or extinguished entirely." + +"So that is why you didn't loiter around!" cried the Captain, "You +thought they had gone to bed! Are you sure you did not stop and listen +to what was said?" + +"I went to bed at once," was the sullen reply. + +"Did you see them burning matches after the lights were out?" asked Ned. + +"I could not see the interior of the hut from my bed," replied the +Filipino, with flashing eyes. + +"Well, don't get hot about it," advised the Captain. "Go on, Ned." + +"The matches burned," Ned went on, "were not of the kind kept in stock +here, the sort supplied by you to your guests. There is a difference in +the shape and size of the stick. The paper which I found in the alcove +is part of an official letter dealing with the situation we came here to +look into. It is more than half burned, so little can be learned from +it." + +"It is a wonder they didn't see that it was entirely destroyed," +suggested Frank. + +"It may be," Ned replied, "that they intended to burn the hut after +their departure, and left the paper blazing." + +"That is just about it!" cried the Captain. + +"Then we have to take it for granted that the visitor came here with +instructions for Lieutenant Rowe. Secret instructions, probably. He +either betrayed his trust and assisted in what was done, or was followed +here and attacked with the others. It is a great puzzle. One might ask a +dozen questions without finding an answer. For instance: Why was the +interior of the hut wrecked?" + +"There was a fight, of course," Frank said. + +"And not a shot fired!" cried the Captain. "I don't believe it! A fight +would have led to shooting; shooting would have attracted attention. No, +sir, you will find that Lieutenant Rowe stood in with this game! Why +should official communications follow so closely on his heels? If the +officials who sent him here had anything to add to his orders, they +might have sent a messenger on after him, of course, but there are no +cables here, so he could not have been notified that the man was coming. +Yet it is clear that he expected this man! Oh, he was in it, all right!" + +"Did you size him up for that sort of a man?" asked Ned. + +"I didn't see much of him," was the reply. + +"You may be right," Ned said, "although I can't see why he came here at +all if he was to make so sensational a disappearance." + +"He wasn't thinking of disappearing when he came here," insisted the +Captain. "Something in the instructions the fourth man brought changed +his line of action. I'll bet my head on it!" + +"Will you kindly talk with the two men who were put to sleep and see if +they confirm the story told by Tag?" + +The Captain agreed to this, and went away to look the men up. He was +back in a few minutes with the report that the men were not to be found. + +"They left just after talking with Tag," he added, looking angrily at +the Filipino. + +"They said nothing to me of going," Tag hastened to say. "They certainly +were not alarmed at what took place under their noses last night." + +"Did they tell you who gave them the drink?" asked Ned. + +"Yes; they said it was the fourth man." + +"And there you are!" the Captain roared. "The fourth man! It is a wonder +he didn't stick a knife into them!" + +"How old were the men with the Lieutenant?" asked Ned. "You said they +were young fellows." + +"Well, they were tall and stoutish, but they looked young. Anywhere from +sixteen to twenty, I should say." + +"Did you notice a locked box in the party?" + +"No; they carried nothing of the kind." + +"They carried some baggage?" + +"Yes; one suitcase. Came away in a hurry, they said. I saw the suitcase +opened, on the table in there, and there was no box." + +Ned took a thin, flat steel key from his pocket and held it out to the +Captain. It was a key of peculiar construction, evidently made of +individual pattern. In fact, it was such a key as usually goes with a +strong cash box, having no duplicate. + +"This was not used to open the suitcase?" he asked. + +"Certainly not," was the reply. "Where did you find that?" + +"On the river bank, where the canoe the men came in was beached," was +the reply. + +"Well," observed the Captain, "if we can't learn why they went away, or +how, we may at least be able to discover where they went. Let us be +about it." + +"Unfortunately," Ned replied, "we can't track them through the waters of +the channel. Water shows no footprints!" + +"But they might not have gone away by water," insisted the other. "If +they had, they would have taken the motor boat." + +"They did send a man to get it," Ned replied, "but he couldn't operate +it. That is why it was out of order this morning." + +"How do you know that?" + +"The man used matches there--the same kind of matches used in that +room." + +"Some day," laughed Jimmie, "some guy will come here an' move the +bloomm' place away without bein' caught at it. Why didn't some one wake +up?" + +"I didn't wake up," said the Captain, "but that is no proof that others +did not. You can't trust these Filipinos. The people of the pueblo might +have helped them away." + +"Exactly!" said Ned. + +"If they left in a canoe," Frank suggested, "we may be able to overtake +them." + +"In this maze of islands!" cried the Captain. "I should say not." + +"We'll get a ride anyway," Jimmie observed. + +"If you'll tell Jack to get the _Manhattan_ ready," Ned said, "we'll +take a run out toward that rough-looking bit of land over there toward +the coast of China." + +The boy darted away, and Ned directed the Captain's steps to the spot +where the canoe had been beached. After inspecting the thickets into +which the canoe had been drawn when taken from the water, the two, Ned +in the lead, pressed through the tangle which lined the bank until they +came to a clear space strewn with food tins which had the appearance of +having been opened within a few hours. + +"They waited here," he said, "and ate while they waited. I found the key +here, and not at the point where the boat was pulled from the river. The +box to which it belongs was opened here and new papers put into it. At +least some papers which it had contained were removed. They were burned +one by one in that thicket ahead." + +The Captain looked Ned over from head to foot and laughed. + +"My boy," he said, "you surely know what your eyes were given to you +for. Can you tell by looking at my coat how much money I have in the +pocketbook in the breast pocket?" + +"Hardly," laughed Ned, "but I can tell by looking at that light coat you +have on that you went to sleep in your chair last night, with the lower +part wrinkled up under you! Did you sleep that way all night? Own up, +now!" + +Captain Godwin blushed through his coat of tan like a schoolgirl. + +"To tell you the truth," he said, "I did sleep in my clothes last night. +After I left the Lieutenant at the hut I went home and mixed a little +drink and sat down to read a bit. Well, sir, I fell asleep!" + +"And woke up at daylight?" asked Ned. + +"Pretty close to it," was the reply. "I awoke with a headache, too!" + +"You mixed the drink yourself?" asked the boy. + +"Yes; I always do." + +"But your servant brought the glass?" + +"Why, yes." + +"Have you seen the servant to-day?" + +"Sure! He got my early breakfast. We have two here, you know." + +"Ever sleep like that before?" + +"Not here." + +Ned looked serious. This was something new. The Captain had without +doubt been drugged, but who had contrived the thing? + +"What are you getting at?" demanded Captain Godwin. "You don't think I +was doped, do you?" + +"Looks like it," was the reply. + +"Then the whole native population is up to something!" shouted the +Captain. "I've noticed a good deal of whispering lately. Do you think +the tribe on the island has gone over to the insurrectos?" + +"I don't know," Ned said, "but it seems to me that something is going to +happen here before long." + +"I'll watch out," declared the Captain. + +"How long have you been in charge here?" asked the boy. + +"Two years. There's really nothing to do, but Uncle Sam thinks he needs +a man in charge here, and pays pretty well, and so I've remained. It is +a dull life, and I'm not certain that I don't enjoy this little +excitement." + +"Unless I am mistaken," Ned smiled, "it will not be so dull here in the +future. I see trouble for the whole group." + +"About a thousand of these brown leaders will have to be killed off +before there will be any security of life or property here," said the +Captain. "The natives would behave themselves if let alone." + +"Now," Ned said, "you have been insisting all along that Lieutenant Rowe +voluntarily left the island. Let us see about that." + +"I never said he left the island. He may be here still, plotting with +the natives, for all I know." + +"You are mistaken there. Whether voluntarily or not, his party left the +island last night, with the men who came here in the canoe." + +"If he left the island, why didn't he go in the launch he came in? That +would have been the most comfortable mode of leaving the place." + +"Because, as has been said, the man who was sent to seize the motor boat +could not make it move." + +"How do you know that?" + +"The fellow burned matches like those used In the hut as already stated, +and threw the sticks about. He left the electric apparatus out of order, +and that is why it would not run this morning when the Major wanted to +use it." + +"Originally that might have been the reason," laughed the Captain, "but +I have an idea that the boys--" + +"Never mind that!" Ned said. "We are not supposed to know anything about +it. For if the Lieutenant had been a willing member of the party, +wouldn't he have taken charge of the motor boat and got the party away +in it?" + +"Oh, all right! Have your own way about it!" smiled the Captain. "Let us +suppose, solely for the sake of argument, that the Lieutenant was taken +prisoner and went away against his will. Does that prove that he was +taken from the island?" + +"I was coming to that point," Ned replied. + +He then called the attention of the Captain to the food tins which lay +scattered about. + +"These tins," he said, "have been opened within a few hours, which shows +that the intruders rested and waited here and ate their suppers, perhaps +their early breakfasts also. There were several of them, as you will see +by the number of tins opened. The party embarked here. You can see where +the nose of the canoe struck the mud." + +"I reckon, as I remarked before," the Captain said, "that you don't need +any instructions as to the use of your eyes! And the gray matter back of +them seems to know what to do with the material unloaded on it! What +next?" + +"About the Lieutenant going away voluntarily," Ned went on. "Now step +down here to the river bank. You notice the footprints in the mud, close +to the water's edge?" + +"Yes; they are plain enough." + +"And some are heavy and some are light. See that? Some are faint +impressions in the mushy soil, while some sink in a couple of inches. +Some of the deep ones are clean cut, while others show that the foot +wobbled in the track." + +"There must have been a fat man who was unsteady on his feet," observed +the Captain. + +"Yes, there was a heavy man, but his tracks are cut sharply in the mud. +His step was quick and firm. Now these other deep tracks show a +staggering foot. What does that mean?" + +"Blessed if I know!" cried the Captain. + +"It means, to my mind, that the men who made these deep, wobbly tracks +carried a burden into the boat. What do you think that burden was?" + +"You will be telling me next that it was a wounded man--perhaps the +Lieutenant himself," said the Captain, his face alive with interest. + +"It was a wounded man, all right," Ned replied, "but we have no means of +knowing whether it was the Lieutenant. See, there are drops of blood +close to the margin of the river!" + +"You're a genius!" roared the Captain. + +"Just observation," Ned said modestly. "There is nothing unusual about +the faculty of seeing things. We all draw the same conclusions after the +facts are pointed out. So, you see, there was a struggle in the hut, +after all, and some one was cut with a knife, for there were no shots +fired. As there would have been no fight if the Lieutenant had been in +the game, as you express it, the inference is that he was taken +prisoner." + +"Granted--for the sake of argument!" + +"Now," Ned continued, "you have seen Indian service, I understand, so +you will no doubt recognize these signs in grass. Read them!" + +"Sure I can read them," exclaimed the Captain, "but I never would have +discovered them. Indian signals in grass, eh? Now, who do you think put +them there?" + +At the edge of the thicket were two bunches of grass, each tied tightly +at a point near the top. On one the grass stood straight up beyond the +band. On the other the top was bent toward the river. + +"'Here is the trail,'" Captain Godwin read, pointing to the first one, +"and the trail leads this way," he added, pointing to the other. "They +left by the river!" + +"There is one more," Ned said. "Read this," pointing to three bunches of +grass, each tied near the top and standing in a row. + +"That is a warning. It says, 'Be careful,'" read the other. "What does +it mean?" + +"Just what it says. It also means that there is a Boy Scout with the +party!" + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +ON THE RIM OF THE CHINA SEA. + + +The rain fell heavily, persistently, provokingly. Now and then came a +crash of thunder which seemed to shake the earth; vivid lightning cut +zigzags in the murky sky. The little islands of the Babuyan group in the +Balintang channel seemed to rock in the arms of the storm. + +The motor boat _Manhattan_ lay tossing and drawing at her anchor in an +obscure bay of tiny dimensions on the west coast of a small island which +is a member of the Babuyan group and faces the China Sea. Ned, Frank, +Jack and Jimmie sat sweating in the little cabin, which was in the back +of the boat, the engine being located toward the center. The day was +dark because of the clouds and the downpour of the rain, and the heavy +foliage of the trees which came down to the very lip of the bay made it +dim in the little cabin, but there was no artificial light. + +The boys were waiting for the storm to subside. They knew the moods of +the weather man of the Philippines well enough to understand that the +rain was likely to continue for several days, it being the opening of +the rainy season, but they preferred not to face the initial tempest. In +a few hours comparative quiet would come, and there would be only the +steady fall of rain. + +Since leaving the little island where the transport had landed them, +they had visited three little dots of land in the channel, and on each +one they had found signals in grass pointing to the north and west. + +"That Boy Scout, whoever he is," Jimmie said, as they discussed the +signals in the almost stifling atmosphere of the cabin, "is strictly +next to his job! He's showing the way, all right!" + +"I'll bet you a can of corn against a bite of canned pie that he's from +New York," Jack Bosworth observed. + +"Speaking of pie," Frank cut in, "there's a little restaurant on Beekman +street where they serve hot pies at noon for a dime. You go in there at +twelve and get a peach pie, and an apple pie, and a berry pie, hot out +of the oven, and buy a piece of cheese, and go back to the office and +consume your frugal repast. What?" + +"If you talk about hot pie here," Jack said, threateningly, "I'll tip +you out of the boat. Pie! When I go back to little old New York I'm +going to have mother meet me at the pier with a pie under each arm!" + +"I won't take your bet, Jack," Jimmie said. "I'd lose. I know he's from +New York, an' he belongs to the Wolf Patrol." + +"I thought you left your dream book at home!" cried Frank. + +"There was a boy named Pat Mack," Jimmie went on, "who enlisted and went +to the Philippines a year ago. He was sixteen when he enlisted, but +looked older, and so they let him in, he bein' a husky chap. He belonged +to the Wolf Patrol, an' was a chum of Ned's. You remember him, Ned?" + +"Pat Mack?" repeated Ned. "Who would ever forget him? Why, that +red-headed Irishman is not a person to be forgotten, if once known. Why +do you think he is with the party we are following, Jimmie?" + +"Because Captain Godwin said one of the young men with the Lieutenant +has hair so red that he didn't need a light to go to bed by. That's Pat +Mack! And if he is with that bunch there'll be something doing before +long. That boy will fight a rattlesnake an' give him the first bite." + +"He is all to the good as a pugilist," Ned said. "That was the trouble +with him in New York. He was always in some kind of a mess because of +his quick temper and his ready fists. I hope it is Pat who is leaving +these signs." + +"You bet it is," Jimmie insisted. "Say, look here! Who's rockin' this +boat?" + +The boys were all sitting quietly in their seats, but the _Manhattan_ +was rocking in a manner not accounted for by the storm. Motioning the +others to remain where they were, Ned arose and passed out of the cabin. + +The boat was still swaying violently, and Ned could at first see no good +reason for it, but presently a commotion in the water, a commotion not +caused by the wind and rain, caught his eyes and he advanced to the +stern. After looking into the water for a moment he went to the cabin +and beckoned to the boys. + +"If you don't mind getting soaking wet," he said, "come out here." + +"What is it?" asked Frank, lazily. + +"Is it anything good to eat?" asked Jimmie. + +Jack made no response but bounded forward and looked over the edge of +the boat into the bay. What he saw was a great head with protruding jaws +and a long, dark back covered with enormous half defined scales, like +armor plate. + +"What is it?" he asked, drawing a revolver from his pocket. + +Ned pushed his hand back and the weapon was returned to a pocket. + +"Don't shoot," he said. "We are not yet ready to announce our presence +here." + +"But what is that thing?" demanded Jack. "Is he trying to eat up the +boat?" + +"That is a crocodile," Ned replied. "Corker, eh?" + +"Will he bite?" asked Jack, reaching for a boathook. + +"Jump in and see," laughed Ned. "They live on fish, but eat dogs and men +when they feel just right. The rivers and lakes of the Philippines swarm +with them." + +Jimmie and Frank now came out of the cabin and looked down at the +crocodile. + +"He's scratching his old nose on the boat!" Jimmie said. "That's what +makes it rock so!" + +"He thinks it's a sandwich, with meat inside," laughed Frank. "Suppose +we give him a poke in the ribs?" + +He reached forward with the boathook, which he took from Jack's hand, +and jabbed at the creature, which did not appear to mind the presence of +the boys at all, but continued his nosing of the boat. + +"His hide is as tough as the crust of the pies Bridget used to make!" +the boy said, jabbing harder than before and throwing his weight on the +handle of the hook. + +Just then the boat shunted to one side, the crocodile swished away, and +Frank fell headlong into the agitated waters of the little bay. Jack saw +him going and tried to catch him, but did not succeed. + +The crocodile had turned away from the boat when Frank struck the water +with a great splash, but he turned back and surveyed the submerged +figure with some degree of interest. + +Frank of course went down under the surface as he fell, and remained +there for a second. When his body rose toward the surface the crocodile +approached him. Jimmie and Jack drew their revolvers. + +"Don't shoot!" commanded Ned. + +"He'll eat Frank alive!" whispered Jimmie. + +"He's making a grab for his leg now!" Jack added. + +Frank came to the surface and struck out for the boat, which was only a +few strokes away, the crocodile following in his wake, the giant +armor-plated body moving through the water stolidly and without visible +means of motion. The rough back looked like a log which had lain long in +the waters of a swamp and had caught rust from mineral deposits and a +nasty brown from decaying vegetation. + +Frank knew the danger he was in, but did not seem to understand that the +boys on the boat were aware of his peril, for he swung his body out of +the water and whirling, pointed to the crocodile. As he did so the +monster speeded forward and snapped at his arm. + +"Shoot! Shoot!" cried Jimmie. + +But no shots were fired. When the great mouth of the monster opened +something shot out from the boat and landed squarely between the +extended jaws of the crocodile. There was a snap, a crunching sound, +then the water was whipped into commotion by the writhing body of the +monster. + +A rope was thrown to Frank and he was soon on board, not much wetter +than his chums, standing in the driving rain, and not at all injured by +his adventure. + +"Cripes!" Jimmie cried, as Frank stood panting by his side, "I thought +he had you where the whale had Jonah." + +"What was that you fed him?" asked Frank of Ned. + +"Just a bottle of gasoline which lay here," was the reply. + +"You couldn't make a throw like that again in a hundred years!" Frank +said. + +"If you're goin' to feed gasoline to the crocodiles," grinned Jimmie, +"I'll notify the government." + +"If the breed listens to what that fellow has to say of gasoline as an +article of food," Ned laughed, "there won't be much demand for it." + +"He'd have had my arm if you hadn't hit the mark," Frank said. "I'll owe +you an arm as long as I live, old man!" + +"And that big fish owes Uncle Sam a quart of gasoline and a good blue +glass bottle," laughed Jack. "I wonder how it will set on his tummy?" + +"Now," Ned said, "I'm as wet as it is possible to get, so I'm going on +shore to see if our Boy Scout left any mail for us. I'm getting anxious +to catch up with the Lieutenant and his abductors." + +"I'm goin' too!" said Jimmie. + +"You're not," Ned replied. "I'm not going to the trouble of keeping +track of you in that wilderness." + +"All right!" Jimmie grunted, apparently resigned to his fate, but when +Ned rowed ashore and disappeared in the thicket which skirted the bay +the little fellow recklessly slipped into the water and came out +unharmed on the beach farther to the south than Ned had landed. He stood +for a moment with the salt water running out of his hair and over his +freckled face, made an amusing grimace at the boys in the boat, and +scurried into the jungle. + +"The little dunce!" Jack exclaimed. + +"If he keeps close to Ned he will be all right," Frank observed, "but if +he goes to wandering about on his own account he will get into trouble. +I've got a hunch that the people we are following are on that island." + +In five minutes Ned made his appearance, rowing swiftly out to the boat. + +"They are there!" he exclaimed. "I found the trail mark and the +direction. A yard from the last direction I found the triple warning +three times repeated. You know what that means?" + +"Life or death," was the reply, and the three boys stood looking into +each other's faces for a moment without speaking. + +"I guess they're going to murder the prisoners," Jack said, presently, +breaking the painful silence. + +"That is what the sign seems to read," Ned said, gravely. + +"Then we may as well be getting out our guns," Frank said. + +Ned nodded, and turned toward the shore again. In a moment he faced his +chums again, his eyes startled and anxious. + +"Where's Jimmie?" he asked. + +"He went ashore!" + +"Didn't you see him?" + +Ned turned from Frank to Jack and then pointed toward an elevation +toward the center of the island. + +The clouds hung low and the rain was still falling in torrents, but +under the gray sky and through the downpour of the rain two columns of +smoke lifted an eloquent voice. + +"That's a Boy Scout call!" exclaimed Jack. + +"Two columns of smoke," Frank said, "mean 'Help'! Jimmie couldn't have +kindled two fires since he has been gone, could he?" + +"Of course not," Jack replied. "That's Pat Mack, the red-headed rascal!" + +"I bet he wishes he was back on Chatham Square!" observed Frank. + +The boys waited ten minutes, but Jimmie did not make his appearance. + +"He's in trouble!" cried Frank. "We better go and see what kind of a fix +he's gotten into." + +"It may be," Ned said, after a short pause, "that he has seen the call +for help, and is making his way in that direction." + +"That is just like him!" Jack burst out. + +"Are we going in there after him?" Frank asked. + +"We are likely to lose him in the thicket if we go," Ned cautioned, "and +it seems to me that we ought to wait a short time. He is wise enough not +to go butting into a camp." + +"What sort of a place is it in there?" asked Jack. + +"It is one of the nameless islands of the Babuyan group," Ned answered. +"Like most of the others, it is of volcanic formation. There is a +central elevation, and a stream of good size starts up there somewhere +and runs into a bay farther north. I was thinking of speeding up and +trying to get into the interior by way of the river." + +"With the engine barking like a terrier in a rat pit!" said Frank. + +"For once," said Ned, with a smile, "you have said a good thing! We've +got to lie here and wait until dark. Then we can advance through the +jungle and look for their campfire." + +"Perhaps they won't build a fire." + +This from Frank, who was stuffing his pockets with cartridges. + +"Of course they will!" Jack put in. "They will have to keep the wildcats +away." + +"Wildcats!" laughed Frank. "There isn't a wildcat within a thousand +miles of this island." + +"Don't you ever think it," Jack insisted. "There are plenty of wildcats +in the Philippines, and snakes, and lizards. In fact, the islands are +not unlike the Isthmus of Panama in this regard. And monkeys! Well, +we've heard enough chattering already to put us wise to them." + +As the boy spoke a great chattering broke out in a thicket only a few +rods away from the beach. The monkeys seemed frightened, and moving +toward the shore. + +"Jimmie is in there!" Ned exclaimed. "I wish I could chloroform the +little pests. They will betray the presence of the lad." + +While the boys waited, wondering what was to be the outcome of the +dangerous situation, the sharp whistle of a launch came from the +opposite side of the island. The first blast was followed by three +others, in quick succession, and then a shot was heard from the +interior. + +"This must be receiving day for the little brown men!" said Jack. +"There's a boat over there talking to them. What about it, Ned?" + +"If you boys will promise not to leave the boat," Ned said, "I'll go +ashore and try to find out what is going on. This island lies on the rim +of the China Sea, and that boat may be from the land of the Celestials!" + +"Bringing arms to put Uncle Sam to the bad!" exclaimed Frank. "I'd like +to pull their pigtails!" + +The boys promised not to leave the _Manhattan_, and Ned rowed ashore and +struck into the jungle. There was now an uproar of chattering all over +the island, it seemed, and he walked swiftly under cover of the racket. +In half an hour he was on an elevation which gave him a view of the +China Sea. What he saw caused him to drop suddenly to the ground. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE LOW CALL OF A WOLF. + + +When Jimmie left the _Manhattan_ he thought it would be perfectly easy +to follow Ned into the jungle. Before leaving Captain Godwin's charge +the boys had been provided with bolos, and the youngster slipped one +under his jacket before leaving the motor boat. This he used to good +purpose, though with great caution, as he crept through the thickets. + +As is well known, it is almost impossible to make headway in a +Philippine forest without chopping down creepers and tangled vines. The +bolo is always in use by parties hunting or exploring. It is a short, +heavy sword, or knife, similar to the machete of Cuba, and is frequently +used in warfare. In the hands of an expert it becomes a very effective +weapon. + +Gaining the thicket, Jimmie stood still and listened for some indication +of the presence of his patrol leader. But the patter of the rain, the +rustling of the great leaves, the scolding of the wet and alarmed +monkeys in the trees about him, served to shut out any other sounds. + +He walked as fast as he could through the jungle toward the center of +the island, or in the direction which he believed to be the center. +Always his way was uphill, and now and then he was obliged to draw +himself up some acclivity by pulling, hand over hand, on a creeper +trailing from a tree. + +Certain that he could find his way back, he did not blaze the way. Here +and there he hewed down a thorny limb which tore at his clothes, or cut +a creeper from a tree, but he made no effort to mark his path. + +Occasionally he came to a little glade, a space clear of trees but +hemmed in by the eternal jungle just the same. Here the way was choked +with rank cogon grass, growing from eight to twelve feet high. He found +this as mean a growth to pass through as any briar patch or cane-brake. + +Cogon grass seems a useless parasite on the bosom of old Mother Earth, +and yet it presents a compensation in its gorgeous white bloom, for, +like the poppy, the cogon is a show-piece of nature, and she flaunts it +in places where beauty is needed, too. Jimmie had never seen a field of +buckwheat in blossom, or he might have compared the cogon stretches to +fields in the United States at certain seasons of the year. + +Even in his haste, in the uncomfortable day, the boy stopped to gaze in +wonder at the wonderful balete tree, which is a representative of the +fig family. This tree begins life as a parasite, at least it springs to +life in a crotch of some other tree. Here it thrives on the humus and +decayed vegetable matter and sends long, winding tendrils down to the +ground. + +These tendrils take root and grow with such vigor that the supporting +trunk is rapidly enveloped in a coalescing mass of stems, while its own +branches are overtopped by the usurper, which kills it eventually as +much by stealing its sunshine as by appropriating the soil at its base. +When very old these trees possess a massive trunk, usually, with a large +cavity in the middle where the trunk of the other tree rotted out. Some +of the younger trees, however, seem to stand on stilts. + +Jimmie saw many things to marvel at, for a Philippine forest is not at +all like a forest in the states of New York or Illinois. In the glades +he saw plants of enormous size, with leaves seven feet long. He came +upon rattan or bejuco thickets, where thorns, pointing down the stems +like barbs on a fish-hook, snatched at his clothes and clung to them +too. + +A variety of this plant has a stem, trailing on the ground, five hundred +feet long. This stem is hollow and divided into compartments by +diaphragms at the joints, like the bamboo. Each compartment contains +about a mouthful of pure water. + +Jimmie climbed upward for half an hour, thinking every moment that he +would come upon some trace of Ned, but Ned, as the reader knows, was at +that time waiting in the cabin of the _Manhattan_ for the return of his +friend. Unconsciously he wandered off to the right, or north, and +presently came to an elevation from which he could overlook the +rain-splashed waters of the China Sea. + +By the time he reached this position Ned was also in the forest, hoping +to meet Jimmie as well as to learn the meaning of the signals from the +unknown launch and the firing on the island. Ned, however, for a long +time kept to the left, and when at last he came to an elevation he was +at least a mile away from that to which Jimmie had ascended. + +From the hill--it could not be termed a mountain, though it was of +volcanic formation--Jimmie looked into a glade from which the smoke of a +fire ascended. He would have observed the two columns of smoke which had +been seen from the motor boat had he reached the position earlier, or if +he had not been surrounded by the thicket when the Boy Scout signal rose +to the sky. + +He could see people moving about the fire, which was partially protected +from the storm by a heavy canvas on the windward side. A crude shelter +composed of great leaves and canvas was also seen, and in this he +thought he saw several reclining figures. By this time the boy had given +up all hope of coming upon Ned, and also of finding his way back to the +_Manhattan_ without a careful study of the location. + +From the place where he stood he could look over a large portion of the +island. He could see a river running to the east, and wondered if the +bay in which the motor boat was lay not near the mouth of the stream. +Still, there were many indentations in the shores of the little isle; he +could not discover the _Manhattan_ in any of them. + +He studied over the situation for a time and then arrived at the +conclusion that he could best find his way back to the boat by following +the line of the coast. That, however, necessitated a long journey and, +perhaps, the swimming of streams which would doubtless take him far into +the night, and a Philippine jungle is no place to travel in the +darkness. Besides being decidedly uncomfortable, such a trip would be +dangerous. Even if there were no wildcats on the island, there were +plenty of reptiles. Then he caught sight of a launch off to the east and +changed his plans. + +His idea was to circle the camp and gain a position between it and the +place where the launch had made its appearance. If the people on the +boat were planning to land he wanted to see them before they reached the +camp. If they were enemies he thought he could avoid them readily +enough; if they were friends they might assist him in releasing the +prisoners. + +"Of course they're in with the game that's goin' on, though," he mused, +as he made his way around the hill. "If they wasn't, what would they be +comin' to the island for? There's no one here to visit--or wouldn't be +if this party of dagoes hadn't landed. The men in the launch are here to +meet the others, and that's all there is to it. I'm goin' to see what +their business is!" + +It was growing dim over the forest when Jimmie gained the position he +sought, and there were lights in the launch down in a little bay and +lights in the camp halfway up the hill. The rain still came down +heavily, driven with considerable force by the wind, and the boy was, of +course, soaked to the skin and suffering from the stings of the insects +which swarm in Philippine forests, but still he waited patiently for +some signs of communication between the people on the boat and those in +the camp. + +There was no stir in the thicket which lay between the two, and Jimmie +concluded that he had arrived too late to witness the meeting of the two +parties. The next thing to do was to get as close to the camp as he +could without danger of detection and observe what was taking place +there. It might be even possible, he thought, to get near enough to hear +something of the conversation. + +With this object in view he moved as stealthily as possible through the +jungle, up the hill, toward the fire, shining dimly in the rain. Much to +his surprise he found no guards posted about the camp. When fifty yards +away, concealed from any possible view of those about the fire by a mass +of creepers, he saw that the inhabitants of the camp were hustling about +in the work of building a good-sized shelter of the huge leaves which +grew about. The reclining forms in the shelter he had first seen were +now only partly in sight. + +"They are tryin' to keep the prisoners dry, anyway," the boy thought. + +The shelter last spoken of was at the right of the fire, and Jimmie +circled off so as to reach it from the rear, his purpose being to learn +if the persons lying there were really the men who had been carried away +from the island where Captain Godwin had his headquarters. + +Presently he came upon a group of four people, standing, somewhat +protected from the storm, under a great tree. He drew as close as he +dared, even risking discovery, and listened. He could hear voices above +the wailing of the wind and the patter of the rain, but could not +understand what was being said. The conversation was being carried on in +a tongue with which he was unfamiliar. + +"Three of them are Chinks," he mused, when, in moving about, the men +came between his line of vision and the slow flame of the fire. "They +wear their shirts outside their trousers and have their hair done up +like the Chinese in Pell street!" + +Directly the fourth man of the party, who seemed to be an American, or, +at least, an Englishman, asked: + +"And the treaty? Will they sign?" + +The others nodded and chattered away in their own tongue. + +"When will they be here?" he then asked. + +More chattering followed, and then the four hastened to the shelter +which was being constructed. Jimmie gathered from the two questions he +had heard that the island had been chosen as a meeting place, and that +the shelter was being built for the accommodation of those expected. + +He had heard something of the purpose of the government in sending Ned +to the Philippines, and remembered now that there had been talk of a +possible organization of the native tribes against the United States +government. Now he suspected that the chiefs were to meet there to +execute the treaty which was to tie the tribes together and bring about +an armed revolt against American occupancy. + +"It looks to me," he thought, "like the Chinese were at the bottom of +the trouble. I guess China would like to get a foothold here!" + +There was nothing more to be learned from the position he occupied, and +so he moved on, always keeping to the right of the campfire, blazing +dimly in the rain and requiring constant care, until he came out in a +thicket close to the rear of the shelter where the men he believed to be +prisoners lay. In five minutes he was at the canvas wall of the refuge, +listening. + +All was still inside, and it was evident that the conspirators did not +suspect that they had been followed to their retreat. Looking about, he +saw that most of the men of the party were still busily engaged in +constructing the shelter and that no one was near the place he wished to +investigate, so he cautiously lifted a corner of the canvas and looked +inside. + +The men there were four in number, and all seemed to be bound hand and +foot! The captors were not taking any chances on escape, although they +evidently believed themselves to be in full possession of the little +island. All was still inside the shelter except that the rain descended +steadily on the leaf roof and now and then a low moan came from the +front of the place. + +"That must be the man they cut up," thought the boy. "I wonder if it is +Lieutenant Rowe who is wounded?" + +While the boy waited, uncertain what course to pursue, another signal +came from the shore and was answered by another pistol shot. + +"Another bunch of Chinks!" he thought. + +The signals brought considerable excitement to the camp, and Jimmie +concluded that the new arrival must be a person of some importance. In a +short time nearly every person in the camp rushed away down the hill +toward the bay where the first launch was anchored, as if to welcome the +new arrivals. + +"Now's my time!" thought the boy, and in an instant his inquisitive head +was thrust under the canvas, and then the low, snarling call of a wolf +penetrated the shadowy place where the men he believed to be prisoners +lay. + +The effect of the signal was instantaneous. A figure half arose and +dropped back again, only to roll over and over in the direction from +which had come the Boy Scout signal used by all members of the Wolf +Patrol. As the bound figure came awkwardly rolling on, Jimmie saw, with +what joy may be readily understood, a red head shining in the firelight! +Never in all his life had any color looked so good to Jimmie as that +brilliant red did at that time! + +"Pat Mack?" he whispered. + +The figure wiggled and twisted vigorously, but there was no verbal +reply. + +"I'll bet dollars to doughnuts they've put a stick in his mouth," said +Jimmie, and this whispered observation was answered by another muscular +demonstration. + +"Sure," muttered the boy, "it is Pat an' he's tryin' to talk to me with +his feet, an' them tied up plenty!" + +Bolo in hand he crept into the shelter, although the sound of voices +told him that the people who had gone down the hill were now returning. +He could not see the cords which held the still struggling man, but he +found them with his fingers and cut them, not quite certain that he was +serving a friend, but willing, under the circumstances, to take the +risk. First the cords which held the feet were severed, then those which +held the wooden gag in place, then that which confined the hands. + +When this last cord was cut two muscular arms flew up and seized the boy +about the neck, drawing his head down until his nose was buried in the +wet clothes of the man he had released. + +"Let up!" he muttered in a smothered voice. + +Still the powerful arms drew him down, and the boy was beginning to +wonder if he had not better use his bolo when a voice whispered: + +"Jimmie! Is it dead we both are?" + +"We will soon be if you don't let up!" answered Jimmie. + +"Jimmie from the Bowery?" demanded the other. + +"Sure!" was the reply. "What is this, anyway, a catch-as-catch-can? If +you don't let up I'll take a rib out with my bolo." + +With a spring which almost keeled the boy over the figure sprang up, +ducked under the dripping canvas, and crouched in the thicket from which +Jimmie had observed the tent. Jimmie's first thought was to follow, then +he thought of the remaining prisoners and turned to cut their bonds. + +But he was too late. As he turned three men came to the front of the +shelter and bent low for the purpose of entering. To have hesitated +longer would have been to invite capture, and so, with a sigh of regret, +the boy shot under the canvas and joined the other in the thicket. + +"It's leg bail for it!" came the familiar voice of Pat Mack, and the +boys poked their faces into the thicket and kept going, regardless of +the thorns and creepers which tore at their garments and tripped their +feet. It was so dark now that they could not see a hand held two inches +from their eyes, but they kept on, making as little noise as possible. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +A MISSING MOTOR BOAT. + + +"You rapscallion," Pat Mack whispered, as the two came together in the +embrace of a particularly tough creeper, "how did you ever get here? I +saw you last on the good old Bowery!" + +"I didn't fly over," replied Jimmie. "Here," he added, "take this bolo +an' cut that rope! What did you mean by chokin' me when I cut you +loose?" + +"A hug of affection!" retorted the other. "You looked like an angel to +me! Did you flutter down from the sky in the rain?" + +"I ought to give you a good punch for it!" Jimmie replied. "You near +took the hide off me beautiful nose! Have you got that bloomin' steel +cable cut? Seems to me they are comin' after us!" + +The boys stood perfectly still and listened. Above the patter of the +rain, above the murmur of the trees, above the chattering of the aroused +monkeys, came the crash of heavy bodies through the bushes, the sound of +human voices. + +"Sure they are!" whispered Pat, and they set off again. + +Working their way painfully through the jungle, falling now and then +over long vines, coming into contact with great trees and swinging +parasites which brushed against their faces like snakes, the boys +pressed on as rapidly as possible, but ever the sounds of pursuit came +closer! The pursuers were more familiar with jungle methods than they, +and no pretense of secrecy was made. + +"Have you got a gun?" whispered Jimmie. + +"I haven't even got a toothpick," was the reply. + +"We'll have to fight before long," Jimmie said, panting with the +exertion of the unfamiliar struggle with the jungle. + +"There's plenty of hollow trees about," suggested Pat. "Why not hide in +one of them until they pass?" + +The suggestion seemed a good one, for a moment. Then the uselessness of +such an effort at concealment became apparent. With sinking hearts the +boys heard the low whine of a hound! + +"I wonder how they managed to track us so easily," Jimmie said. + +"Give me the bolo," Pat said. "I'll split the dog's head open if he +comes near us. Use your gun on the men." + +The boys did not give up hope of final escape, but pressed on for a +time. However, the acclivity they were ascending grew steeper as they +advanced, and they were obliged to stop now and then to rest. On one of +these occasions they heard a commotion in the jungle just ahead of them. +This was disheartening! + +"They've flanked us!" whispered Pat. + +The pursuers were carrying a torch which, in the rain, gave a dim light, +but still served to direct their steps, and the glow of the flame now +reached to the very spot where the lads stood. The bushes behind them +parted and the glowing eyes of the hound looked up in their faces. Then +the call of the beast told the men following that he had at last sighted +his prey. + +The boys turned to flee again, but came up against an almost +perpendicular wall of rock. The pursuers saw them now and came on with +cries of victory. + +"Guess they've got us!" Pat said. + +"Not yet!" Jimmie answered. + +But, however courageous the lads might have proved themselves to be, +they would have been taken in a moment had they not received unexpected +assistance. The hound was almost at their feet when a shot was heard and +the great beast fell to the ground, struggled for an instant, and lay +still. + +Another shot followed the first instantly, and the torch dropped from +the uplifted hand of the evil-faced man who was carrying it in the lead. +An intense, uncanny darkness followed the extinction of the torch, and +the two boys took advantage of it to edge around the face of the rock +which had blocked their progress. Without the help of the dog, and +without the torch, the pursuers could do little, and stood on equal +terms with the pursued. + +It was impossible, of course, for the boys to make their way through the +jungle without making any noise, and in a moment the pursuing party +showed its temper by firing revengeful shots at the spots from which the +sounds of their progress proceeded. After half a dozen bullets had +clipped the bushes about the heads of the lads two shots came from in +front, the lead whizzing over their heads. A sharp cry of distress was +heard in the rear at the second shot, and then all was still. + +The boys crouched in the open space between the "legs" of a balete tree +and waited for some possible explanation of the strange thing that had +taken place. Who had killed the hound, and who was it that was shooting +at the enemy over their heads? These questions were hard to answer. + +"It is one of the boys from the _Manhattan_," Jimmie concluded, at last. + +"Then why don't he show up?" demanded Pat. "Who is in the _Manhattan_?" + +"Ned Nestor and two members of the Black Bear Patrol," was the reply. +"We came over here to sleuth." + +"To what?" + +"To sleuth. To do the Sherlock Holmes stunt. To put down an insurrection +in the Philippines!" + +"You seem to be putting it down," Pat said, in a sarcastic tone. + +"We've got it by the neck!" insisted Jimmie. + +"Ned's being along will help some," said Pat. "He's the boy to get to +the bottom of a tough case. If he's on this side of the world, that's +him in the shrubbery just ahead. Did you hear the signals a short time +ago?" + +"Of course." + +"Well, that's the bunch coming." + +"What bunch?" demanded Jimmie. + +"Why, the Chinks, of course." + +"What they coming here for?" + +"I guess they expect to take the Philippines home with 'em," was the +reply. "Anyway, they're plotting to take Uncle Sam down and search him +for them." + +"Did you hear much of their talk?" asked Jimmie. + +"Quite a little, but Lieutenant Rowe made so much noise I couldn't hear +all that was said when they were near me. He's badly wounded." + +"I'd like to know just what took place at the hut Captain Godwin put you +fellows in night before last," Jimmie said. + +"There's treachery somewhere," began Pat, but just then a sound reached +their ears which drove all thoughts of that other night from their +minds. It was the low, snarling call of a wolf! + +"That's Ned!" whispered Jimmie. + +"It's a Wolf, anyway," Pat exclaimed, losing caution in the excitement +of the moment. "That will help some!" + +The boy's voice must have been heard above the rain and the swishing of +the tropical growth, for several shots came from the rear, and one of +the bullets cut into the tree near Pat's head. + +"They seem to be gettin' the range!" Pat said, scratching his head and +blessing his lucky star that a bullet had not connected with it. + +"They couldn't hit a flock of bridges!" said Jimmie, disdainfully. + +Then he straightened up and gave out a long, shrill cry, like that of a +wolf calling to the pack. Pat caught him by the arm and drew him back +into the semi-shelter of the "legs" of the balete tree. + +"You'll have a spray of lead flying this way in a second!" he said. +"Can't you give the Wolf call without alarming the people of Hong Kong, +six hundred miles away?" + +"I'm celebratin'!" answered the boy. + +Again the wolf cry echoed through the forest, and this time it was +answered from within a few feet of where the boys stood. There were no +shots this time, and it was concluded that the pursuers had returned to +the camp. + +"Ned!" called Jimmie. + +"Hey, there!" added Pat. + +"That voice sounds like Chatham Square!" said a voice close to the boy's +elbow, and in the darkness two hands fumbled together and clasped in a +hearty greeting. + +"What you followin' me about for?" demanded Jimmie, as the three started +on through the jungle again. + +"You've got your nerve!" said Pat. "Only for the darkness I'd hand you +one for that. What's he following you for? If he hadn't followed you, +both of us would have been captured back there." + +"Hereafter," Ned said, "when Jimmie goes into the woods I'm going to tie +a string to him, so he can be pulled back home." + +"Huh!" snickered Pat, "they tied plenty of strings to me, but they +didn't pull me back home!" + +It was so still in the rear, for all of any sounds of pursuit, that the +boys decided that their enemies had given up the search for them, so +they walked faster and soon came out on the elevation which Ned had +mounted on leaving the _Manhattan_ in the afternoon. The rain ceased +gradually, and a fugitive moon was seen now and then among the hurrying +clouds. + +With the first show of light Ned looked Pat Mack over with interest. The +Irish lad returned the friendly glance with interest, and the two again +clasped hands. + +"We didn't anticipate such a meeting," Ned said. + +"You knew I had gone to the Philippines," Pat said, "but I had no idea +you would ever wander off here. Tell me about it." + +The story was soon told, in condensed form, and then Ned asked: + +"That was Lieutenant Rowe who was captured?" + +"Sure! They got into our hut and geezled us good. I shall not be able to +straighten out my arms for a month." + +"Your hands must have been free when you left those signs in the grass," +said the patrol leader. + +"They caught me doing it," said Pat, "and that is why I was tied up +tighter than the others." + +"Well, you did a good job before they caught you," Jimmie said. "When +you goin' back to let the others loose?" + +"Lieutenant Rowe is in great pain because of his wound," Pat replied, +"and we ought to do something for him soon." + +"Where is the fourth man--the fellow who climbed in the window?" asked +Ned in a moment. + +"Say!" Pat answered, "there was something strange about that! He came in +with new instructions--instructions which would have sent us off to +Manila again, and the Lieutenant wouldn't stand for them, and so--" + +"They had a scrap?" asked Jimmie. + +"Did the Lieutenant doubt the authenticity of the instructions?" asked +Ned. + +"I think he did," was the reply, "and so did the messenger! Odd, eh?" + +"But he must have been expecting the messenger," Ned went on, "for the +screen at the window where he entered was left unfastened for him." + +"He was expecting some one," answered Pat, "but of course he did not +know who it would be. Anyway, he was not anticipating faked +instructions." + +"But why was he so secret about letting the fellow in? Why wasn't the +door used when he came?" + +"I don't know. The messenger the Lieutenant was expecting was to come +secretly and go secretly. That's all I know about it." + +"He was to be sent by the government officers?" + +"Of course." + +"From what point?" + +"Oh, I don't know," answered Pat. "It is all a muddle. I can't +understand how a man could follow us with instructions, anyway. We came +fast in the motor boat, and could not have been followed in a canoe. I +don't know where this messenger was to spring from, I'm sure. Anyhow, +the wrong one came, or the right one brought the wrong dispatches, and +Lieutenant Rowe wouldn't stand for it, and there was a conference, and +then the brown men came in and we were geezled. Looked like a raid on a +pool room in little old New York!" + +"But this false messenger--the wrong man, or the right man with the +wrong instructions--was captured also?" + +"Yes, he was; and he made a row about it. I'll tell you what I think. +There's treachery in the secret service somewhere. Some interest or some +nation is trying to take the Philippines away from Uncle Sam." + +"And receiving assistance from those in the employ of Uncle Sam!" Ned +said, musingly. "Well, I'm here to see what can be done in the line of +locking the traitors up in a nice hot cell at Manila." + +"You needn't look much farther," Jimmie said. "There's a second motor +boat out in a bay west of the island, and I'm tellin' you that it came +across from China. It is the washee-washee people who are kicking up +this mess, all right." + +"You seem to have solved the mystery," laughed Ned. "From the first we +have known that there was a conspiracy against Uncle Sam, but the +question has always been 'Who?' and not 'What for?' The purpose of the +alleged treaty has never been a mystery. What we are here for is to +catch the conspirators with the goods, as Inspector Byrnes used to say. +And now you've solved the puzzle!" + +"Quit yer kiddin'!" exclaimed Jimmie. "I can say what I think, can't I? +Besides, if it ain't the Chinks, who is it?" + +"That is just what we want to know," Ned replied, more soberly. "There +is a notion at Washington that it may be some financial interest. The +newspapers were saying, when we left civilization, that a certain +monopoly was financing the Mexican revolution, and there is a suspicion +that some disloyal men in the United States are doing the same with the +ignorant natives of the Philippines--urging them on and supplying them +with guns and ammunition." + +"Well," Pat observed, "whoever it is that is doing the business, there +are traitors in the secret service department. The Americans who acted +with the Filipinos who captured us are posted as to what is going on at +Washington, all right." + +"Let's go and get them," suggested Jimmie. "I guess the third degree +would make them tell all about it!" + +"Yes," suggested Pat, "you run out and get them while we find the +_Manhattan_! That will be a nice little job for you!" + +"I wouldn't let them tie me up, anyway," growled Jimmie, annoyed at the +chaffing of his friends. "Say!" he added, "here's our little bay now, +but where is that bloomin' motor boat? Some one's come and carried it +away while we've been in the woods, an' took Jack and Frank away with +it!" + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +WIGWAGS FROM THE BEACH. + + +For a long time after the departure of Ned, Jack and Frank sat in the +cabin of the _Manhattan_, looking out on the steady downpour. They were +not quite satisfied with their share in the activities of the day. +Instead of being housed in the cabin, they preferred an exciting hunt +even in the rain, over the hills of the little island in view. + +"If we stand for it," grumbled Jack, "we'll have to spend most of our +time keeping house! Jimmie will scatter himself all over the Asiatic +division of the map, and Ned will spend most of his time looking him +up!" + +Frank laughed at this outbreak of ill humor, although he was as anxious +as his chum to be on the firing line. + +"I wish we'd not taken the _Manhattan_," Jack continued. "I'm the only +one in the party that can operate it, and I'll be tied down like a +galley slave!" + +"Go it!" laughed Frank. "Growl your head off, if you want to, Mr. Black +Bear! Instead of snarling, why don't you tell me what makes the boat go +when you do something to the wheel and that switch?" + +"I thought you owned a launch?" said Jack. + +"Father bought me one," was the reply, "but I've never learned how to +run it. I'm too fat to bother my head about such things!" + +"Then what are you asking me about the mechanism of the thing for?" +asked Jack. "If you don't want to know, what's the use of my telling you +how to run a motor boat? You make me weary!" + +"If I had a nice little temper like yours," Frank grinned, "I'd go and +bump my head against a tree! Come, old man, tell me about the boat. I +may want to run it some time, after you get caught by a cat or filled +full of poisoned arrows! Come! honest! What makes it go?" + +"And you don't even know the action of a gasoline engine?" exclaimed +Jack, in better humor. "Well, I'll tell you. A jet of gasoline, which is +thinner than water, is sprayed, as one would spray any liquid from an +atomizer, into the chamber of the engine cylinder-head, which it reaches +in the form of vapor, having been mixed with air." + +"That's all simple!" + +"Here the vapor is compressed by the rising piston, and when it is +squeezed up as close as it can be an electric spark is introduced into +the chamber. That is what the electric battery and gear are for." + +"I was wondering why one had to have electricity and gasoline both," +said Frank, very much interested in the simple recital. + +"The result of the introduction of the spark is the explosion of the +compressed vapor, which sends the piston downward. The motion turns the +shaft, and that turns the boat's propeller." + +"Easy as pie." + +"This operation is repeated from two to six hundred times a minute," +Jack went on, "and that causes the continuous action of the machinery +which sends the boat along." + +"What is there about that so complicated?" demanded Frank. "Everybody +you hear talking of an engine seems to speak as if it were one of the +mysteries of the universe." + +"It is usually the electric system which gets out of order," was the +reply, "but sometimes the gasoline section balks. A man often has to try +so many different things when his engine stops that he actually does not +know which one remedies the evil and sets the thing in motion." + +"All right!" Frank said. "Now show me how to start the thing." + +"That's easy. First turn on your gasoline, as you would turn water from +a faucet into a kitchen sink. The gasoline fills the carbureter, which +is the thing which feeds the engine automatically. Then you turn on your +electricity by shifting a switch. That is to supply the spark. Then turn +the fly-wheel two or three times so as to get the vapor into the +cylinder and secure the first explosion. That is all there is to it. I +hope you do learn to run this boat, so I can get away now and then!" + +"You may get away farther than you want to!" cautioned Frank. + +The _Manhattan_ was a plain, usable boat, twenty-five feet long and ten +feet wide, with bow and stern rather square in order to make more room +inside. The cabin was ten feet long, with strong oak sides and +brass-rimmed ports for light and ventilation. The cockpit, or outdoor +sitting room, was of the same length as the cabin. + +The engine was a plain, solidly built machine, with two cylinders, and +rated at ten horsepower, with a speed of fifteen miles an hour. It was +installed under a short bridge-deck in front of the cabin, while the +gasoline tanks, holding fifty gallons, were hidden under the cockpit +seats. + +The cabin had two wide slatted berths, supplied with hair mattresses, a +movable table, an ice chest, a small coal range--the boat was not +designed especially for tropical use--an ice-chest and an alcohol stove +for cooking. The storage lockers and water tanks had a capacity of a +week's supply of stores for four persons. It was a government boat, and +was in good repute as a racer in and about Manila, in spite of its blunt +bow and wide beam. + +Frank pottered away at the machinery until he announced that it was like +taking candy away from the children to run it, and then the two retired +to the cabin to get rid of their wet garments. + +"Ned and Jimmie are having a good soaking," Jack said, his ill humor all +gone, as he soused his wet underclothing in a tub of sea water. "I wish +they'd come home." + +A dull thump, as of a canoe striking the motor boat, and a quick step on +the prow caused both boys to spring to their feet. + +"There they come now!" Jack cried, glancing out into the slanting rain, +"and it's good and wet they are." + +The boy was about to step forward and open the cabin door when Frank +caught him by the shoulder. + +"Wait!" he said. "Look there!" + +Jack followed the pointing finger with his eyes and saw half a dozen +Filipinos clambering into the cockpit, and also saw the muzzles of +American-built rifles covering the cabin door. + +"Get your gun!" Jack whispered. + +"We've got to do something besides shoot," Frank said. "They have the +drop on us. We should have been looking out for an attempt at surprise." + +There was a moment's silence, and then a man enveloped from neck to +heels in a heavy raincoat and sweating tremendously in consequence, +advanced to the cabin door. + +"Never mind the guns!" he said, through the glass. "My men have you +covered, and it would be a pity to shoot two likely boys!" + +"What do you want?" demanded Frank. + +"We want this boat," was the reply. + +"Well, you've got it!" Jack said, angrily. + +"Of course we have," was the reply. "We seem to be getting about +everything we want in this corner of the world! Where are the others?" + +"Gone after a battleship!" declared Jack. + +The man grinned and, opening the cabin door, stepped inside. He was +tall, rather slender, with clean-cut features and bright gray eyes. His +bearing was that of a gentleman, and Frank began to have an indefinable +idea that he had met him before somewhere, just where he could not +decide. The fellow evidently was an American, though his followers +seemed to be Chinese and Filipinos. + +"So he's gone after a battleship, has he?" the intruder said, shutting +the cabin door behind him, after making sure that his men were standing +at attention with their guns. "Do they pick battleships off trees up on +the hill?" + +"I don't see anything funny about it," Jack said, sourly. "Who do you +mean by 'he'? What do you know about the crew of the boat?" + +"I've heard of Mr. Ned Nestor," was the calm reply, "and was hoping to +meet him here. However, you seem to be cheerful young fellows, and a +cruise with you may not result in lost time. You are Jack Bosworth and +Frank Shaw. Which one is Shaw, and which one is Bosworth?" + +"I'm Shaw," answered Frank, somewhat amused at the cool impudence of the +man. "What is your name?" + +"I'm French," was the reply. "Not French tribally but just French. One +of the sort of Frenchmen who are born of Irish parents in the city of +Chicago! Anyway, you may call me French. That is near enough." + +"You seem to be an amusing sort of a character," observed Frank. "What +are you going to do with the _Manhattan_?" + +"Why," was the smiling reply, "there is a sort of a political convention +called for that hill over there, and some of the delegates are slow in +coming. So I thought I'd borrow your boat and go and fetch them. They +are not far away. Some of them, in fact, live on islands, not more than +four or five hundred miles off." + +"That will be nice!" Frank said, falling into the mood of the other. +"Only you can't carry many native chiefs in this boat, not if they +insist on bringing their wives and attendants along. Suppose one should +insist on appearing before the convention riding in state on the back of +a white elephant?" + +"Never thought of that," replied the other with a grin, "but how did you +learn that the delegates were to be native chiefs?" + +"I guess most everybody knows what kind of a game you're playing," Frank +said with a grin which he intended to be provoking. "When you get your +delegates assembled, Uncle Sam will give you an imitation of a man +shooting up traitors." + +"We'll have to take our chances on that," replied French, with apparent +good nature. "In the meantime, we'll have to ask you to vacate the boat +while we make our collection of delegates. I presume that you can get +along very well on shore. Only be careful that the little brown men +don't pot you with their funny little guns." + +"Oh, we'll get along with the little brown men, all right," growled +Jack. "When are you going to put us ashore?" + +"Well," was the cool reply, "I want to wait here until I form the +acquaintance of Mr. Ned Nestor and Mr. James McGraw. I have long felt a +desire to meet them!" + +"They'll feel proud, I know!" Jack said, provokingly. "Pirates and +traitors are not so thick that it is not a pleasure to meet them. We'll +all remember, after you are all hanged, that we met you here." + +"Thank you!" replied French, not at all indignant at the remark, "and +now if you'll hand over the guns you have, and tell me where the others +are hidden, you can walk about the boat in comparative freedom while we +get supper. You see it is beginning to get dark, and I'm hungry." + +There was nothing to do but to comply with the polite request, and soon +the intruders were making themselves at home all over the boat. French +brought one of the Filipinos into the cabin, where he sat with his gun +pointing ominously at the boys whenever they moved toward the door, +while the others were stationed on the prow, where they sat stolidly in +the rain, with their guns under their coarse coats to keep them dry. + +"Rather a scanty supply of provisions!" French said, as he investigated +the lockers. "I really think I'll have to send one of my men ashore for +dinner. Two men with perfectly good guns and eyesight ought to be able +to keep us on friendly terms here. Besides, it seems a waste of good +material to feed those fellows from this choice stock when they prefer +boiled dog." + +"Say, French," Jack said, "if you weren't crooked enough to make a +corkscrew look like a straight-edge, you'd be a pretty good sort of a +chap to go on a cruise with." + +"Oh, I'm all right when I'm not abused," French replied. "If Dad had +presented me with a million instead of a thirst for other people's +property, I'd have had my name in the society columns every day! Isn't +it about time for Ned and Jimmie to come home?" he added. "If you don't +mind, I'll run the boat out a little farther, so they'll have to call +and signal when they do come." + +"They should have been here long ago," was the reply. + +"I must insist that you remain perfectly quiet when they do come," +French said, after the boat had changed position, in a moment. "I don't +want to spoil this pretty boat with dark stains. Perhaps, however, they +have been captured." + +"You would know if they had, wouldn't you?" asked Jack. + +"Why, no, I think not. You see I have just arrived, coming in the second +launch, now over there in the bay. I did not go to the camp, but edged +around the hill with half a dozen men in order to see if all was safe. +We've got some pretty high-up men in this game with us, and I'm afraid +Wall street would stand up on its hind legs and howl if their names were +known. Hence this caution." + +French seemed to be a college educated man and a gentleman by instinct. +While they were preparing supper he amused them with stories of his +travels and adventures, and both boys heartily wished he was with them +as a friend instead of an enemy. When it grew dark he sent all the +Filipinos away but two, and they sat down to a good meal. + +Frank questioned French, cautiously of course, but could gain little +information from him. The fellow seemed fully aware of the purpose of +the boy, and replied to his questions with the most extravagant stories +of the empire that was to be raised in the Philippines after the United +States protectorate had ceased. + +"You're a queer chap," Frank said, at the conclusion of one of French's +stories of the grandeur of the coming empire, "and I'd like to hear you +spin yarns all night, but, if you don't mind, I'll go to bed." + +"Just as you like," was the amiable reply. "I'll sit here and smoke a +few more cigarettes and then follow your example. It is such a wild +night that your friends may have stopped at a down-town hotel!" + +"Perhaps they've stepped over to the Waldorf!" Jack replied. + +The lads occupied the same bunk, and talked in whispers all through the +night. They had no idea what had become of Ned and Jimmie except the +supposition that they had been captured by their enemies. French retired +about midnight, as calmly as if he were in his own rooms, leaving the +two Filipinos on guard in the cabin. + +Once Frank arose and tried to slip out, his idea being to reach the +shore and look for his chums, but the brown men lifted their guns +automatically as he looked out on them. All through the night they sat +unblinkingly, looking out in the dim light much as glass eyes might have +looked out of the head of a wooden image. + +"We're sure in a bad box," Jack whispered, after this attempt at escape. +"I don't believe they'll turn us loose on the island, knowing what we +know. They won't take any chance of our getting away! If Ned was free, +he'd have been here before this, so we may as well make up our minds +that he's in trouble also." + +With daylight came a cessation of the storm, and soon the sun was +shining smotheringly down on the little bay. Sweltering in the cabin, +Frank looked out of a port and saw a pole lifted above a clump of low +bushes just back from the distant beach. As he looked the pole moved +forward and back, then to the right, ducking three times and coming back +to a vertical position. The pole wavered to right and left and to the +front for a time, and the boy waved his hand from the open port. + +"Wigwag!" he whispered. "It says: 'Brace up!' That's Jimmie!" + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +TWO KEYS TO THE TREATY BOX. + + +The relief of the boys at the information conveyed by the wigwag signals +from the shore may well be imagined. The night had been a long and +trying one, and they had about abandoned hope when the signals came. + +The presence of Ned and Jimmie on the beach meant not only that they +were still safe, but that there was a possibility of rescuing the +_Manhattan_ from the courteous pirate who had seized it. They did not +know exactly how this could be accomplished, but they had every +confidence in Ned's courage and resourcefulness. + +The boys knew, however, that what was done must be undertaken at once, +for the Filipinos who had been sent away from the boat the night before +had doubtless communicated with French's friends on the island, and it +was natural that they, the friends, should hasten down to the little bay +soon after sunrise to look over the fortunate capture made by French. + +They heard French stirring in his bunk while they were talking over +plans for the rescue, and ceased whispering immediately. They knew that +Ned, probably from the presence of the Filipinos, who were drying +themselves in the scorching sunshine, understood the situation on board. +In fact, they realized that Ned and Jimmie would have come aboard at +once if they had not received an inkling of what was going on by the +change of position. + +French arose, yawning, and looked lazily out of a port. He was a +muscular fellow, evidently in first-class condition physically, so it +was useless to attempt to overpower him, regain their weapons, and drive +the Filipinos off the boat. Jack seemed to think that if they could both +get hold of him they might accomplish something, but there were the +guards to reckon with while the fight was in progress. + +So they gave up all idea of rescue until Ned should show his hand. +French glanced keenly about the cabin and then went out into the +cockpit, taking a seat on the bridge deck and scanning the shore +critically. The pole which had been used to convey the wigwag signals +was now out of sight. + +"Can you boys operate this boat?" he finally asked. + +Jack was about to reply in the affirmative but Frank lifted a warning +hand. + +"No," the latter said, telling the falsehood brazenly. "Ned is the only +one who can run it." + +"Can't you start the engine?" French asked, anxiously. + +The boys shook their heads. + +"Then I'm going to try," French said. "As I hinted last night, when I +told you I came here in a launch, there are other motor boats around the +corner, in a bay on the western side of the island. I have only to get +to them. There are plenty of men there who can do the job." + +"I hardly think it safe for one who knows nothing of engines to fool +with one," said Jack. "Suppose I see what I can do with it. I've seen +Ned work the thing, and may be able to start it." + +"Try it!" French said. "But if you make any foolishness with it, you'll +find yourself in trouble. Understand?" + +"I don't want to ruin the boat!" Jack said. "We're going to have fun +with this craft before we leave it!" he added, with a grin. + +"Then you'll have to hurry and have your fun," said French, "for you're +going to leave it as soon as we get to the bay where the other boats +are." + +Jack opened a trap in the cockpit seat and placed his hand on the jar +which supplied the electricity for the spark. French was watching him, +but he managed to draw the wires out without being seen. This, of +course, effectually crippled the boat. He fumbled for a time with his +hand on the jar, watching the shore as he did so, and then closed the +trap. + +After closing the trap Jack turned the fly-wheel a few times, pounded +away with a wrench, and inspected the gasoline tanks, but of course no +motion was transmitted to the shaft. Finally he threw down the wrench in +apparent disgust. + +"I can't do anything with it!" he exclaimed. "You'll have to wait until +Ned comes if you can't start it yourself." + +"It is my impression," said French, with a smile, "that your friend Ned +is trussed up in a camp over on the other side of the island!" + +"Then why don't you send for him, or for some one else to run the boat?" +asked Frank innocently, his purpose being to induce French to send one +of the guards away, and so reduce the force to be opposed. + +"From out of the mouths of children," laughed French. "Well, you know +the rest! I have an idea that you have solved the problem." + +He talked in Spanish to one of the men for a moment, and the fellow +rowed ashore in one of the canoes the captors had come in and set off +through the jungle. The boys watched the thickets, hoping to see some +sign of a struggle. They were sure that Ned would capture the guard, and +so, possibly, delay the appearance of French's friends. + +But all was quiet along the coast. Ned evidently had some other plan in +mind. In a few moments French proposed breakfast and entered the cabin, +relying on the guard to keep the boys out of mischief. As they had no +weapons, he did not believe they would make any trouble. Besides, he +kept a sharp lookout through the low, open doorway of the little cabin. + +Then Frank became possessed of what Ned afterwards declared to be the +one brilliant idea of his life! First he asked the guard if he could +speak English. + +"Understan' some; speak little," was the reply. + +"Well," Frank went on, "I'm going to take my morning exercises. See if +you have anything like this in your blooming land!" + +"Bloomin' lan' Good! She bloom!" + +The Filipino pointed away to the mass of tropical blossoms shimmering in +the sunlight and grinned at what he doubtless considered a very sharp +reply. French, hearing the voices, looked out of the cabin and smiled at +the antics the boy was making. + +Frank threw his body into a vertical position and bent sharply off to +the right. Then back to vertical and off to the left. Then back and to +the right again. + +"That's all right!" cried French from the cabin. "You appear to be a +nimble little chap. What are those exercises for?" + +"To bring all the muscles of the body into use!" replied Frank, winking +at Jack, who was just beginning to understand the purpose of the sudden +demand for exercise. + +"Blessed if he ain't doing the wigwag with his body!" thought Jack. +"That is the letter 'C'." + +From the vertical Frank then dropped his body over to the left, then to +the right and stopped. + +"That's wigwag for 'O'," thought Jack. "I wonder what he means to say?" + +"Well done!" shouted French, his hands full of tinned goods. "I'll get +you a job in a circus when I get done with you!" + +"That will be fine!" Frank replied, facing French with as innocent a +face as a boy ever carried. + +One to the right, two to the left, one to the right, and Jack read the +letter "M" and saw what the next one would be. One to the right, one to +the left, and Jack read the letter "E." Then three slow motions straight +in front, then to vertical again. + +"That means the end of the word," the boy thought, "and the word is +'COME.' Now, I wonder if he will?" + +Frank kept up his odd motions, at which the Filipino seemed greatly +amused, and French turned away to the alcohol stove to prepare a cup of +hot cocoa. But the motions were only for effect now, and meant nothing. +There was a light movement in the thicket, and three figures, crawling +low, entered the canoe which the guard had left the _Manhattan_ in and +moved noiselessly toward the boat. + +The Filipino's back was turned to the beach, for he was watching Frank. +French was busy with his cocoa, condensed cream, and sugar, and so the +advancing canoe was not observed until it was within a few feet of the +boat. Then the guard uttered a cry of warning and raised his gun. + +Frank was ready for this and the distance between himself and the guard +was well calculated. He launched himself like a catapult-dart against +the slim figure, and was fortunate enough to seize the gun. Frank was an +adept at the Japanese ju-jitsu game, and, much to the astonishment of +the Filipino, he soon found himself, minus his gun, dropping to the +bottom of the bay. + +French, of course, started out of the cabin, revolver in hand, but when +he stooped his tall figure in the low doorway he did not straighten it +again as readily as he had expected to. Jack was on the back of his neck +and shoulders, pressing him down to the bridge deck. But French was a +strong man and Jack would have soon been thrown aside had Frank not +engaged him. + +When Ned, Pat and Jimmie sprang out of the canoe and gained the cockpit, +the three were in a tangle, with Frank sitting on the hand which held +the weapon. French surrendered the revolver and sat up with a sickly +grin on his face when he saw the three bending over him, ready to take a +hand in the proceedings. + +"You win!" he said. "I know when I hold the low hand!" + +"Didn't I tell you," Frank said, as soon as he could catch his breath, +"that the motions you saw were calculated to bring the muscles of the +body into action? Well, they did, didn't they?" + +"Rather!" French replied. "Now, if you'll pull this ambitious young man +off my back, I'll get into an easier position." + +"You're a good fellow," Jack said, "and I'll do as you say, only you've +got to behave yourself, you know." + +French, looking as calm as when he had held the upper hand, arose and +seated himself on the bridge deck, looking Ned over keenly as he did so. + +"You didn't figure on getting into a mix-up with a lot of wild animals, +did you?" asked Ned, with a smile. "These two Black Bears gave you quite +a squeeze, eh?" + +"Rather!" was the short reply. "Say, gentlemen," he went on, "if you'll +kindly step to one side I'll time that Filipino as he plows through the +jungle. I can't see him, but I can see the bushes make way for him. +Believe me, at this time to-morrow he'll still be running!" + +"He went up in the air some!" Pat said. "How did you ever do that, +Cully? He shot up into the blue and then dove straight down into the +bottom. Most wonderful thing I ever saw." + +"That," answered Frank, with a grin, "was a Boy Scout hint that his +presence was not needed here." + +"This," said Jimmie, pointing to Pat, "is Pat Mack, the loafer we were +talkin' about the other night. He placed the signals in grass. You +wouldn't think to look at him, that he was very bright, except his hair, +but he is quite intelligent at times." + +Jimmie dodged as Pat made for him and promptly fell overboard. The boys +fished him out and Frank scolded him for mussing up the cockpit! + +"The little rascal deserved it," said Pat. "I'm deserving of a more +formal introduction, being of the Wolf Patrol, of the city of New York." + +"Huh!" said Jimmie. "I found him tied up like a calf in a butcher's +wagon, and had to cut him loose. Then Ned found him in the teeth of a +dog an' had to shoot the dog! I don't think he's so much-a-much!" + +Shouts were now heard coming from the jungle, and it became evident that +the guard who had been thrown out of the boat had encountered others who +were proceeding to the bay to inspect the wonderful prize secured by +French, as reported by the Filipinos sent away the night before. + +Ned suggested to Jack that he get the _Manhattan_ under motion at once, +as she lay within easy reaching distance of the shore. Jack replaced the +wires in the jar and the propeller was soon singing a merry tune to the +waters of the bay. + +"You got the engine in order quick!" French suggested. + +"Of course," Jack replied. "Did you have any idea that I would help you +steal our Uncle Sam's boat?" + +"Take to your heels," Ned directed, as soon as the boat was fairly out +of the little harbor. "It won't take long for the news to get to the +other boats, and they will, of course, pursue us. Can they overtake us?" +he asked, turning to French. + +"They can make about fifteen miles an hour," was the reply. "What can +you make?" + +"Rather more than that, under pressure," was the reply. + +French sat easily on the bridge deck as the _Manhattan_ glided away. He +appeared to be as thoroughly satisfied with the situation as when he was +the captor instead of the captive. When Frank related the story of the +night, in his presence, he laughed and asked for the wigwag code which +Frank had used. + +"So that is the meeting of the chiefs?" Ned asked. "They are there to +sign the treaty of rebellion?" + +"Something of the sort," was the reply. "At least, they were there to +pass upon the treaty. Now, they'll duck. That is, they will if you boys +succeed in getting away from them." + +"Do you know where they will go?" asked Ned. + +"Look here," French said, "I'm not in a position to tell you anything +about what they may or may not do. I rather like you boys, and I'd tell +you all I know if I could do so decently. But I can't. To be frank with +you, I'm wishing you'll outrun the boats that will come after you. I +have had my pay for what I've done for the rebels, and the money is +buried with a friend at Hong Kong. I don't care about meeting them +again, to tell you the truth, and this being captured is an easy way out +of it. Now, I'll give you my parole not to try to get away, not to try +any tricks, if you let me walk about as I please." + +"He's all right!" Jack put in. "He's a good fellow, all right. I vote +that we give him his freedom." + +"Here, too!" cried Frank. + +"But I don't want my freedom!" French said. "At least not until you can +land me where these pirate chiefs can't get hold of me. I imagine they +would blame me for the trouble they're in." + +"They are meeting to sign the treaty of rebellion," Ned said. "Now, +perhaps you can tell me when the war is to begin?" + +"Right away." + +"Who drew the treaty?" asked the boy. + +"Some chap high up!" laughed French. + +"And who has possession of it?" + +"There are two keys to the box. One is held by the author of the +treaty." + +"And the other?" asked Ned with a knowing smile. + +"By the American in charge of the party on the island," answered French. +"Let me tell you this, though," he added, "you'll never see the treaty, +even if you win. Also, you'll never know the name of the author of it, +or the name of the man who has the second key to the treaty box. You've +found out something about the conspiracy against the government, but +you'll never know who organized it, or why!" + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +A HOT NIGHT IN YOKOHAMA. + + +Ned Nestor stood on the deck of the steamship, and the steamship was +entering the harbor of Yokohama, which opens from Tokyo bay, the bay +from the Sagani Sea, the sea from the Pacific ocean. In the cabin of the +steamship were Frank Shaw, Jack Bosworth and Jimmie McGraw. While Ned +looked over the city they were approaching the three boys came to his +side. + +None of them had ever looked upon a Japanese city before. The scene +before them was one well calculated to excite their interest and appeal +to their imagination. The fishing junks sailing over the glassy waters +of the bay did not seem at all like any fishing boats they had ever seen +before. + +The colored wooden roofs of the town seemed to have been cut out from a +picture book of fairy tales. The narrow streets in sight from the deck +seemed steep and not too straight. The buildings seemed to lap over on +each other. To the west, standing straight up in the sky, as it seemed, +loomed the pile of Oyama mountain. To the north showed the roofs of +Kanagawa. + +Night fell while they gazed at the unfamiliar scene, and the lanterns on +the sampans, bound for the customs _hatoba_, glistened over the bay like +fireflies. The shampooer's whistles drifted out on the offshore breeze. + +"Doesn't look much like coming into little old New York!" Frank +exclaimed. + +"Queer lookin' country!" Jimmie added. + +"I'd rather be back in the _Manhattan_, among the islands north of +Luzon," Jack observed. "I don't like this smell of the Orient they talk +so much about." + +"Not much Orient about this!" Ned said. + +"I hope we'll get out of it before long," Jack went on. "I'm hungry for +the wash of the China Sea." + +"We'll have a little China Sea made for you, an' tuck it away in Central +Park," Jimmie laughed. + +"All right!" replied Jack. "I wonder why some one didn't think of that +before! Fine scheme!" + +On leaving the bay where such an eventful night had been passed, the +boys had driven the _Manhattan_ at full speed directly to Manila. The +boat was rather small for such a trip, but it had behaved nobly, and the +lads had enjoyed the trip immensely. + +They had for a time been pursued by the launches which had anchored on +the opposite side of the little island, but the chase had soon been +abandoned, as the _Manhattan_ was the fastest boat of the three. + +On the way to Manila, Ned had held several long conversations with +French, but had gained little information from him. He corroborated what +little was known regarding the conspiracy for the establishing of a +native government on the Philippines, but would not reveal what he knew +of the interests interested or of the men at the head of the movement. + +At Manila, French had been released on parole at the urgent request of +Frank and Jack, who had formed a liking for the courteous gentleman who +had treated them so kindly during the few hours he had been their +jailer. French, however, had promised to remain at Manila and to report +daily at military headquarters. + +"I don't understand what his share in the plot is, or has been," Ned had +explained, "but it is evident that he will be needed only as a witness." + +At Manila Ned had held a long conference with Major John Ross, and that +gentleman had seemed overjoyed at the report the boy had presented, +especially as it made his return to the group of islands to the north +unnecessary. After remaining in Manila one day and a night, Ned had been +directed to continue his investigation of the case in his own way. + +To tell the truth, Major John Ross and the military men with whom Ned +conferred at Manila treated the employment of the boy by the authorities +at Washington as a good deal of a joke, as a whim. They were not +discourteous to Ned, but they took no interest in his suggestions. For +some hours after his departure, his employment on the case was the +subject of many sarcastic remarks. + +However, those in charge had consented to hold the _Manhattan_ subject +to his orders, and had promised to give any communications received from +him due attention. And this was the situation when the boy, following +clues secured at the nipa hut and hints obtained from Pat, who had kept +his ears open during his captivity, and from French, had sailed away for +Japan with his chums on a steamer which was leaving Manila for Yokohama. +Pat Mack, released from service by the effort of Major Ross, at his own +request, had been left at Manila in charge of the _Manhattan_. + +The boys landed shortly after dark and proceeded to a hotel where the +English language or something like it was spoken. Everything was new and +strange, the place being as unlike a Broadway hotel as it is possible to +imagine. However, the meals were served in half-American fashion, and +the rooms were tolerably comfortable. + +"Now," Ned said, after their first meal in Yokohama was over, "we did +not come here to visit the palaces of the wealthy, or to inspect the +United States consulate. We've got to get down into the slums a bit if +we find what I want. The man who led the party that captured Lieutenant +Rowe was sent away as soon as he got to his masters. You doubtless +understand why. They did not want him implicated in the plot." + +"How do you know?" asked Jimmie. "You didn't see him go, did you?" + +"Then he must be up some," Jack said. + +"And he left Manila on a boat bound for Yokohama," Frank added. "I know +about that, for French gave me a valuable tip. And he was accompanied by +an American sailor with a thirst for strong drink." + +"I guess you've got the idea, all right," Ned said, with a smile. "But I +did not state the case exactly as it is. I said that the man who led the +party against Lieutenant Rowe was sent away. I should have said that the +man suspected of having been at the head of that expedition had +mysteriously disappeared from Manila on the very day of his return there +after an absence unaccounted for, and that it was believed he had taken +a steamer for Yokohama. I stated my conclusions as facts." + +"And there was an American sailor with him," insisted Frank. + +"Yes, an, American sailor who evidently knew too much. At least, that is +the way I figure it out. Now, we are not looking for this high-brow at +this time, but for the American sailor." + +"That makes it all the pleasanter!" Jack said. "We'll have a chance to +see life in Japan as it is. I'd feel better about this little outing, +though, if I knew just what has become of Lieutenant Rowe." + +"I often wish we had tried to release him," Ned replied, "but we were +lucky to get off with whole hides. Anyway, Pat says they were to release +him in a short time, after the plot is perfected. All they wanted was +his dispatches, and they will hold him captive only because his release +might lead to the premature discovery of the meeting of chiefs on the +island." + +"Well, let us get busy with the underworld of Japan," Jack said. "I'll +bet we find plenty of American sailors with thirsts." + +On a dark night in Yokohama the houses in the section visited by the +boys look very much alike. They are drygoods box affairs, two stories +high, with peaked roofs, paper walls and narrow piazzas. All the shops +are looking for the American sailor. + +Ned secured an interpreter, and the boys strolled through a dozen or +more cheap joints before they came to a halt and sat down. The places +were all alike. There was split matting on the floors, always, and +sailors drinking at little tables. There was always a fair grade of tea, +always _sake_, always a wheezy graphophone. + +One might also buy whiskey, ale and other intoxicating drinks. And there +were also the _geisha_ dances and the _nesans_ running up stairs and +down with their little white socks and flowery skirts, carrying +refreshments. There were also men in _kimonos_ and cowboy hats, the +former to give the Japanese color and the latter to inform customers +that the American trade was catered to! + +"How you goin' to know this American sailor when you find him?" asked +Jimmie, as the boys sat with steaming cups of tea before them. + +"I have his photograph," laughed Ned. + +"Let's see it!" cried Jack. + +"I'll bet it's a mental photograph!" Jimmie went on. "That is the only +kind Ned carries." + +"What does he look like?" asked Frank. + +"Yes; tell us. We may see him first!" urged Jimmie. + +"He's short, and very broad across the shoulders, with one shoulder +lower than the other. He is quite bald, and there is a cicatrice on his +left cheek where a Malay cut him. There is a squint in one of his eyes, +and there is a scar along the ball of his right thumb." + +"Quit your kiddin'!" said Jimmie. "You never saw him." + +"Pat saw him," was the reply, "and French and some of the military +people at Manila saw him. He left with the man whose acquaintance I want +to make, or just before him." + +"Seems like looking for a needle in a haymow," Frank said, "but I'll +wager my hat against a swipe in the jaw that we find him." + +"'We!'" repeated Jimmie, with due scorn. + +"For instance," Frank said, "what do you think of the fellow over there +talking with the man in the _kimono_ and the derby hat of the vintage of +1880?" + +"He's short and broad, and one of his shoulders is higher than the +other," Jimmie replied. + +"Don't attract his attention," Ned warned. "He sat there when we came +in, and does not seem to notice us." + +"You goin' to geezle him?" asked Jimmie. + +"If he were in Manila I certainly should," was the answer, "but it would +never answer here. Look!" the lad added. "He seems to be having trouble +with one of the waiters." + +"He's gone broke, I guess," Jimmie said, "an' there's a kick on his +bill." + +"An American friend would look pretty good to him now," Ned said +thoughtfully. + +There was in the mind of the boy a thought that circumstances were +favoring him. If he could only befriend the man! + +"You don't suppose the fellow he came here with left him in the lurch, +do you?" asked Jimmie, something like Ned's thought coming to him. "If +he did, why--" + +"That's what I've been thinking," Ned replied, "Anyway, I'm going over +there and have a talk with him." + +"Before you blow yourself on him," laughed Jimmie, "look at the ball of +his right thumb an' see if there's a scar there!" + +"If he's a sailorman from New York," Jack put in, "he'll eat corn out of +your hand, like a billy goat! Go on and talk with him, Ned." + +Ned arose to his feet and moved toward the table where the sailor sat. +Then he turned back to the boys again. + +"If I go away with him," he said, "don't attempt to follow us. Go back +to the hotel and wait for me. You understand, now, Jimmie? No chasing +out after me! This is not New York!" + +"I'll be good!" replied the boy, with a wink at Jack. + +"You bet you will!" replied Jack, seizing him by the sleeve. "You don't +get away from me to-night. Too much trouble looking you up!" + +"What are we to do with that blooming interpreter?" asked Frank, +motioning to the Jap, who sat a short distance away, where he could not +overhear the talk. + +"Take him back to the hotel with you," was the reply, "and hold him +there until I come." + +There was no little excitement around the table where the sailor sat +when Ned approached it. The sailor was talking in English, the waiter +was talking in his native tongue, and the bystanders were trying to tell +each one what the other was saying. + +Ned made out from the pigeon English brought forth by the bystanders +that the sailor had run up a large bill and was unable to pay it. + +"P'lice come!" one of the officious ones said. + +The sailor heard the words and stirred uneasily in his seat. After +wiggling about for a moment he removed his cap and scratched a bald head +thoughtfully. Ned advanced to his side and laid a hand on his arm, +whereat the sailor squirmed as if he anticipated immediate arrest. + +"What's the trouble, pard?" the boy asked. + +The sailor sat back in his chair and regarded Ned with evident suspicion +for a moment, then, observing that his interrogator was only a boy, he +extended his hand, his bleary eyes showing the pleasure he felt at the +meeting. + +"You look mighty good to me!" he said, in the tone and manner of a man +who had had educational advantages. + +"What's the difficulty?" repeated Ned, taking the hard hand of the +other. "I saw the commotion here and thought you might be in trouble. +You're an American, I take it?" + +"Proud to say yes to that!" replied the other. + +"Well, what are they trying to do to you?" asked Ned, taking a chair by +his side. "Americans must stand back to back when they meet in a place +like this!" + +"They don't all do that," was the reply. "My pardner got me here and +shook me. I'm broke, and that's all there is to it. Kept buying after I +had spent all my money. I guess it is the coop for mine!" + +"Perhaps we can fix it up in some way," Ned said. "I'm not a +millionaire, but I may be able to help you out. How much do you owe?" + +"About two dollars in American money," was the reply. "It is a small +sum, but I'm your slave for life if you get me out of this. Ever spend a +day in a Japanese jail, waiting for the American consul to get you out?" + +"Never did," was the reply. "How are you fixed for lodgings?" + +"Got a room up over a tea house," was the reply. "I'm looking for a ship +that will take me back to New York." + +"Well," Ned said, "I'll pay this bill and go home with you for the +night. I'll need free lodgings somewhere after I settle!" + +"You'll be as welcome as the flowers of May!" the sailor said, and the +boys, still sitting where Ned had left them, saw him hand the waiter +some money and leave the place with the sailor. + +A moment later, however, they saw a keen-eyed Jap come rushing through +the door and up to the table where the sailor had been seated. He talked +with the waiter a moment, speaking angrily at last, and darted out of +the door again. + +"That fellow came after the sailor," Frank said, "and will follow him. +When he finds Ned working him for his story he won't do a thing to Ned!" + +"An' we'll go back to the hotel, like good little boys, an' sit there +knittin' while they pinch Ned an' chuck him into the bay! Not for your +uncle!" + +"We'd make a hit wandering about Yokohama in the night!" Jack said. "I +reckon Ned can take care of himself. Anyway, he's had to go and find you +every time you've gone out without him." + +But before Jack had finished Jimmie had jerked away and was out in the +street. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A FAIRY HISTORY OF JAPAN. + + +The shop in which Ned had discovered the object of his search was well +down toward the water front, and the course of the sailor was now toward +the center of the city. The two passed the customs quarters and the +official offices of the city--Yokohama is the old-time treaty port of +Japan--and so on to wide streets lined with shops, still alight, though +the hour was getting late. + +Such quaint little shops Ned had never seen before, and more than once +he stopped to look at lacquered ware of rare quality, bronze work, and +fancy embroidery. Directly the sailor led the way from the wide streets +to the old-time narrow ones in the native quarter, which were not far +from the old canal which virtually makes an island of the town. + +After proceeding, with hesitating steps, down a particularly dark and +foul-smelling street, the sailor paused at a corner, glanced up at a +window in a tea-chest of a house which stood flush with the alley-like +thoroughfare, and began the ascent of a flight of stairs which swayed +under his weight. + +On the corner below the tea-house was still open, and the invariable +graphophone was grinding out some indistinguishable tune. When the two +passed up the dark stairway an attendant slipped out of the public room, +walked to the foot of the stairs, and observed the two mounting figures. +When the sailor opened the door to as miserable a room as the sun of the +Orient ever shone on, the attendant slipped back to the public room and +conferred with a keen-eyed, slender man who sat there--a man garbed in +the native costume, but bearing in manner and face the stamp of a +European! + +The sailor closed the door of his room and set a match to a candle which +he found on a shelf hanging to a wall. There was nothing in the room, +nothing but mats, as it seemed to Ned. There was no table, no chair. +Only the mats to sit on and sleep on. The walls were of paper, and Ned +saw with pleasure that the whole front of the room, which faced the +alley, might be rolled up at will! + +The sailor dropped on the floor and fumbled in his clothing for a +cigarette. + +"Have you got the makings?" he asked, giving up the search at last. + +Ned shook his head. + +"I have need of all my wits," he said, "and never befuddle my brain with +tobacco. It's the curse of the age." + +"I've got to have a cigarette," the sailor said. "I'll go crazy if I +don't have one! I won't sleep a wink, either!" he whined. + +Ned handed him a dime and pointed to the door. + +"Go and buy some," he said, knowing that the fellow would be in fighting +mood if he was not supplied with the narcotic. "Come back here and +smoke." + +The sailor looked at the dime sorrowfully, scorning the small piece of +silver because it wasn't a dollar, as Ned concluded--pitying himself, +too, because it would not buy what he wanted most--liquor! + +Ned handed him a quarter and bade him hasten back. With the man's nerves +crying out for accustomed stimulants, the boy knew that he could do +nothing with him. He must get him into a companionable mood if possible. +He dreaded the night, which seemed about to be passed in the fumes of +tobacco and liquor, but there was no help for it that he could see. + +Presently the sailor came back with a package of cigarettes, gin in a +bottle, and a jug of water. He arranged the articles in a half-circle +about him when he sat down on a mat. It seemed pitiful to the boy, the +sailor's dependence on the nerve-destroying things he looked upon as +necessary to his comfort. Only for these, only for their constant use +for years, the man might have been honored and respected and possessed a +home among his kind instead of being an object of contempt in a foreign +port. + +"Here's to the Flowery Kingdom!" the sailor said, the bottle at his +lips. "Here's life to you, not existence! What's your name?" he added, +stopping in the midst of a grin which wrinkled his dissipated face +horribly to cast a glance of suspicion on the boy sitting in pity before +him. "My name," he added, without waiting for Ned to reply to his +question, "is Brown--B-R-O-W-N." + +"Glad to make your acquaintance, Mr. Brown," Ned said. "One is always +glad to meet Americans in a place like this. Now," he went on, resolved +to have his talk out before the sailor became too befuddled to talk +coherently, "you spoke about wanting to get back to New York. Well, the +_Fultonia_ leaves for New York by way of Manila, to-morrow afternoon, +and I may be able to arrange a passage for you. I'm a friend of the +captain's." + +"Not on your life! Not by way of Manila!" the sailor cried. "I wouldn't +go back to Manila for all the gold there is in Standard Oil! I'm going +to lose myself on a wind-jammer! Manila's unhealthy for me!" he added +with a wink. + +"I wasn't thinking of remaining there," said Ned. "I'm going back to New +York." + +"Wind-jammer for mine!" Brown insisted. "Why," he added, swinging his +bottle of gin in the air, "do you know that I'd like to get inside a +boat with wide white wings and sail about the Orient forever! The more I +mix with Englishmen and Americans the more I think of the Japs. It was +an American that threw me down to-night. I did something for him, and--" + +The sailor paused, gave a slight shiver, and looked down at his right +hand. Then he brushed it, as if trying to wipe something away that was +obstinate and hard to get rid of--some stain like the stain of blood! + +"And he left you stranded?" Ned continued "I'm glad I happened along," +he added, not caring to say how glad he was, nor how much the meeting +might mean to him! + +"I did his dirty work!" the sailor went on, his tongue loosened by the +liquor. "I did for him what I never did before, what I never will do +again! And he went back on me! He threw me down! I'd like to meet him on +Roosevelt street, New York! I'd provide against his throwing anyone else +down!" + +"What did you do for him?" Ned asked, with as innocent a manner as he +could assume. + +"That's my business!" Brown answered, with a sly wink. "That's between +the two of us! If I had him here I'd cut his heart out, and show you how +black it is." + +The sailor was fast coming under the influence of the gin, and Ned knew +that he must keep him talking or he would drop off into drugged slumber. +He sounded him on half a dozen subjects, intending to lead him back to +the man's connection with the plot, but he would not talk until the +subject of Japan was brought up. He seemed to be infatuated with the +Flowery Kingdom. + +"I know the history of Japan," he said, with a brightening of the eyes. +"In the beginning, the world was like an egg in shape. The white became +heaven, and the yolk became earth. You may read about it yourself in the +book called "_The Way of the Gods_." Then two Gods descended from +heaven, and a son called Omikami was born to them, and his body was so +bright that he flew up into the sky and became the sun. + +"What do you think of that? He became the sun. And a daughter was born +to the two Gods, and she became the moon. The moon you see when the sun +goes down. Then the children that were born after these became strong +and founded the Empire of Japan. And the original inhabitants were hairy +on the body and ate raw meat. You see I know all about it!" + +"And Japan may in time acquire all Asia," Ned said, desiring to lead the +sailor back to within reaching distance of the subject he was most +interested in. "In time the Philippines may belong to Japan." + +The sailor winked at Ned mysteriously and flourished his bottle of gin. + +"I know!" he cried. "I know! If Japan gets the Philippines she'll have +to fight a thousand tribes and the monkeys in the trees! She'll have to +fight also the crocodiles in the brooks. 'I could a tale unfold whose +lightest word would harrow up thy soul--cause thy two eyes, like stars, +to start from their spheres, and thy--.' Say," he said with a laugh, +"what do you think of me anyway? You think I've got a jag on, don't you. +Never was soberer in my innocent life!" + +"If you'll describe this man that threw you down," Ned said, anxious to +have done with the by-play, "and tell me where to look for him, I'll go +and see what I can do for you. How much was he to give you?" + +"Barrels!" + +The sailor paused and stretched his hands above his head, the bottle +glistening in one of them. "He was to pile the greenbacks up so +high--for me to wade in, and wipe my feet on. You can't find him." + +There was a stealthy movement on the stairs, and a movement not so +stealthy at the door. Ned heard a hand moving over the bamboo, and made +ready for a spring. He had no idea who the visitor might be, but his +manner of approach showed him to be no friend of the sailor's. + +There were no more sounds at the door, and Ned glanced casually in that +direction. The candle on the wobbling shelf gave forth little light, and +that seemed to grow more shadows than rays of illumination. The shadows +seemed deepest and most uncertain of form at the door, but, at the +center of the odd-shape panel in the middle of the door he thought he +saw a malevolent eye looking forth into the room. + +He wondered if an eye was really there, or if, his imagination stirred +by the weird scene and the fairy history of Japan which the sailor had +repeated, he was seeing things not present to the senses! + +In a moment there was no doubt, for the malevolent eye left the aperture +and there was again a fumbling at the door. Ned made no motion, but sat +as if unconscious of any intruder being there. He knew that the person +at the door was there to watch the sailor, to see that he did not talk +too much, to see that he did not leave Yokohama until the trap of +treason had been fully set and baited. + +There was no doubt in the mind of the boy now that he had found the man +he had set out in quest of. Of course the man who had planned the +conspiracy, who was doubtless assisting the tribes to arms and +ammunition by way of the unpatrolled China Sea, was the one he aimed to +reach in time. The sailor was only a link in the chain which led to the +object sought. + +The mind of the boy was not at that time much concerned with thoughts +for his own safety although he could never be in more deadly peril than +he was at that moment when he was looked at through the opening in the +door. His one idea was to get a view of the spy, and with this object in +view he arose and stepped toward the door. + +"You're getting sleepy," he said to the sailor, "and I'll go out and get +a little fresh air while you sleep. I shall not be far away." + +"You're a good fellow," Brown cried, already half asleep. "When I get +out of this I'll tell you something that'll make your fortune. Bring +back another bottle of gin. Thish mos' gone!" + +Ned stood by the door for a moment in order to give the spy time to get +back to the bottom of the stairs. He could see no profit in a struggle +in that place, and there was certain to be one if he permitted the spy +to know that his movements had been observed. + +Finally he heard soft footsteps on the stairs. He waited only an instant +after this before passing out into the narrow hall. The staircase was +clear, but a door opening into it from the public room below was open +and a broad zone of light lay on the floor of the passage and on the +wall. + +Ned stood in the doorway and looked out on the street, now and then +turning his eyes in the direction of the public room. At a table well +toward the back end of the place he saw the man he was looking for. He +was seated at a table with two men who appeared to be American sailors. +While he stood there, wondering at the inefficiency of the disguise the +man wore, at the nerve which prompted him to wear that fragment of +native costume when his face, manner and accent bespoke the cultured +American another sailor came swaggering into the place. + +This sailor was unquestionably intoxicated. He swayed back and forth as +he walked, and would have fallen to the floor at the very door only for +the restraining hand of a boy who accompanied him. Immediately on his +appearance waiters rushed forward to attend to his wants, to give him a +chair and a table, and to pay him all sorts of little attentions. + +In such places in all foreign ports the American sailor is the easy +mark. He drinks--when he drinks at all--until he is past all wisdom +regarding the expenditure of money, with the result that he literally +throws it away. In the appearance of this sailor the attendants saw a +rich harvest, not only for the place but for themselves. + +But Ned saw more than this. He saw the freckled face and sparkling eyes +of Jimmie McGraw, steering the drunken sailor to the table pointed out +for him. The boy was in high humor, for he joked with the blundering +sailor, and instead of sitting down at the table--brought into use there +because the foreigners insist on not drinking sitting on the floor--he +sat down on it and swung his feet downward. + +"Look at the kid!" one of the men at the table Ned was watching said. +"Looks like he was on South Clark street, Chicago." + +"Don't get gay, now!" Jimmie retorted. "I'm playin' I'm a tug towin' +this 'ere sailorman to bed." + +"You've got a job on your hands," the other said, and then the three at +the table bent their heads forward and talked in whispers. Now and then +they faced toward the doorway, but Ned was then too far toward the +street for them to observe him. + +They did not seem at all suspicious of Jimmie, and Ned concluded that +such occurrences were not uncommon there. Jimmie seated his companion +more firmly in his chair in a moment and passed out, stopping at the +doorway where Ned stood. + +"You duck!" the boy said. "That man in there with the sailors followed +you here, an' I followed him here. You duck!" + +"I haven't got the information I'm after yet," Ned said. "How in the +world did you get here?" + +"Followed the chap that followed you," was the quick reply. "Out here I +come upon that beery sailor and took him in tow!" + +"Good idea," Ned said. "Now, you slip past me and go up stairs, to the +room in front, and see if the man there can be gotten away. I want to +size up the men in there. I can see them by poking my head out +occasionally, but they can't see me." + +"Well, you keep your gun ready," Jimmie warned. "This ain't New York, +with a cop every half block an' a taxicab always within reach. This is +Yokohama! Don't you forget that!" + +"Don't remain up there long!" said Ned. + +Jimmie hastened away, and Ned stood leaning against the casing of the +doorway. Then Jimmie came down the stairs at a jump, making no pretense +of secrecy, and behind him there was a rush of feet and a jumble of +foreign words. + +The three men Ned had been watching sprang up from their table and +dashed toward the front of the place, and all was confusion in an +instant. The sailor who had come in with Jimmie attempted to lean +carelessly back in his chair and toppled over on the floor, where he lay +with the slippered feet of the attendants striking him in their rush for +the door. + +"Run!" Jimmie cried as he approached Ned. "Hot foot! The man you sent me +to is dead, and there's a bunch of ruffians after us. Run! Beat it!" + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +PAT TAKES A BIG CHANCE. + + +The _Manhattan_ glided like a duck over the waters of the Bashee +Channel, South of the Island of Formosa. A week had passed since that +night in Yokohama, and Ned and Jimmie were back among the islands north +of Luzon. + +It had been a close shave that night, for the boys had been only a few +feet ahead of their pursuers when they were fortunate enough to come +upon a party of American marines on shore leave. The marines had +gathered about the panting boys and finally, after fighting off the +Japs, conducted them to their hotel. The last Ned saw of the man whom he +believed to be an American military man in the disguise of a Jap he was +running in a most undignified manner down the street, as if not willing +to look upon the uniforms of the marines. The next morning he had caught +a glimpse of the fellow, but had not been able to get close to him. On +the day before he left for Manila the man had left the port. Ned was of +the opinion that he had traveled on to Manila, and so on to the group of +islands which the _Manhattan_ was now nosing among. + +At Manila Ned had again conferred with Major John Ross, and that +dignified official had virtually dismissed the boy from the service. He +had scolded him for going over to Yokohama and for stirring up a mess +there, as he put it, between a party of hilarious marines and the local +police. + +However, Ned did not accept dismissal. Instead of remaining at Manila, +as ordered to do, until word could be received from Washington, he +joined Pat in the motor boat, provisioned her for a long cruise, and set +out to locate the island which was to see the signing of the treaty +between the tribes of the Philippines--the treaty which was certain to +bring war and starvation to the islands. + +He was sure the treaty had not yet been signed, and he could not +understand the delay. It did not seem possible that his appearance at +the island first chosen for the meeting could have caused so long a wait +in the important negotiations. He had suspicions at times that the +disappearance from the scene of the men he had followed to Yokohama had +had something to do with the delay. + +In looking over the results of the trip to the Japanese city, Ned was +fairly well satisfied with them. He believed that he had caught a +glimpse of the man who was at the head of the plot against the United +States. When he considered that the sailor who had complained so +bitterly of the manner in which he had been treated had been murdered in +his room while the suspect sat below in disguise, he did not doubt that +the crime had been committed by paid assassins for the purpose of +enforcing secrecy. + +On the whole he was well pleased with the progress of the case. He had +made his discoveries by deviating from the paths usually followed by +investigators, but he believed that he held the right clues in his +hands. It remained for him now to find the island where the treaty was +to be signed and await developments. + +It was sure that if the king-pins of the conspiracy could be captured +the whole fabric would fall to the ground. He believed that large sums +of money were being used, though he could not tell where the cash was +coming from. Sometimes he thought commercial interests guilty of the +reckless thing that was being done. Sometimes he thought the plot +original with the foxy prime minister of some nation looking for +additional possessions in the Orient. + +At Manila he had learned that Lieutenant Rowe had been restored to +liberty, badly wounded, but in a fair way to recover. The Lieutenant, +however could do little to assist the investigation, as he had learned +little during his captivity, had not been permitted to see the leading +spirits. As Ned had believed from the first, the men who attacked him +were not inclined to do murder unnecessarily. All they sought was the +sealed orders carried by the officer and the man who had followed on +after him and entered unceremoniously through the window. + +One thing Ned could not understand was the matter of the despatches +handed the Lieutenant by the man who had entered the nipa hut in so +strange a manner, shortly after midnight on the night of the attack. +These instructions, according to reports, countermanded the ones +Lieutenant Rowe had received in person at Manila, and would have turned +him back without conferring with Major Ross or the lads he had with him. + +The fourth man had declared, when seen by by Ned at Manila, that he had +managed to follow on the heels of the Lieutenant with the supplemental +instructions, and had reached the island at midnight. He said that he +had entered by way of the window because the front of the house seemed +to be watched with hostile intent, and because there was a ladder there +ready to his hand. + +This story seemed a little fishy to Ned, but he had no means of proving +that the man was not telling the truth. The fellow certainly had been +given despatches to deliver to Lieutenant Rowe, with orders to follow +him and place them in his hands personally. But the instructions +received by the Lieutenant were not, it was asserted, the ones sent to +him. + +The supplemental instructions would have taken him back to Manila at +once, as has been said, without conferring with Major Ross and the +assistants he had brought with him. It was insisted at the military +office that the instructions sent out had increased rather than +diminished the Lieutenant's authority to act. + +One of two things seemed to be true. Either there was a traitor in the +office, or the instructions had been changed. The envelope might have +been shifted after reaching the man's hands or he might have substituted +the counterfeit ones for the original ones. In this latter case the +messenger was himself a traitor, and would bear watching. + +Ned would have liked nothing better than to have remained in Manila for +the purpose of investigating this phase of the case, but he believed +that the mystery would be solved eventually where the work was being +done--on the ground with the native tribes which were being urged into +revolt. So he had provisioned the _Manhattan_ and, much to the joy of +the boys, headed for the group of islands north of Luzon. + +It was glorious there in the channel, with the green islands lifting +from the lacquered sea, bluer than any sky the lads had ever seen. From +the bow of the _Manhattan_ spread two thin emerald lines curling +transparently and tipped with foam. Upon the immensity of the sea there +would be for hours no other movement, and upon the immensity of the sky +there would not be a fleck of cloud. At night the boys slept in their +bunks with the waves whispering to the sand of some sheltered bay. + +"I hope we'll never find the island where the treaty is to be signed," +Jack said, one morning. "I'd like to stay here forever." + +"Why don't you build a hut on one of the islands and stay there, then?" +asked Jimmie. + +"I guess you'd soon get weary of doin' the Robinson Crusoe act an' get +back to the Great White Way!" + +"I'm not looking for life in the jungle," Jack replied. "The water is +good enough for me." + +One morning when the _Manhattan_ lay in a bay on the eastern shore of an +island of good size and Jack proposed a trip to the shore. + +"There's game up there," he said, pointing to an elevation not far from +the beach. "Unless I'm very much mistaken there is a line of hills on +the other side of this bit of land, with a valley in between the two. If +this is right, that valley will be well stocked with game, and I'm +getting hungry for fresh meat." + +"There's surely one class of animal life there," Frank said. "Hear the +monkeys! They must be holding some kind of a convention!" + +While the boys were talking Ned came out of the cabin with his glass. He +gazed landward for a long time and then handed the glass to Jack. + +"There's something stirring up the little chaps," he said. + +"They're always wigglin' like a basket of snakes," Jimmie observed. + +"Sounds like they were calling the police," Frank put in. + +"I'll tell you about it when I return," Jack said. "If there's anything +grand, gloomy or peculiar over there I'll be sure to find it. Want to go +along with me, little boy?" he added, turning to Jimmie, who at once +resented this manner of address by trying to push Jack overboard. + +"Of course I'm goin'," Jimmie declared, giving over his benevolent +intentions with regard to Jack. "I reckon you'll get lost if you go six +yards away from the _Manhattan_ alone." + +"Run along, both of you!" Ned said. "And don't get into trouble. We've +got no time to waste looking up runaway boys." + +"If the native tribes are holding a convention there," Frank said, as +the boys slipped into the boat which they were to row ashore, "just give +them my compliments and ask them to dinner." + +For some moments after the boys reached the white beach and disappeared +in the jungle Ned stood scanning the island with his glass. + +"I half believe the chiefs are there," he said, turning to Frank. + +"Then why did you let the boys go?" asked the latter. + +"I wish now that I hadn't," Ned replied. + +"Say," Pat called out, "I can go and bring 'em back. They can't be very +far away. Shall I?" + +"Yes," was the hesitating reply, "and bring back all the news you can +about what is going on on the island. There's something unusual taking +place there, judging from the row the monkeys are making." + +"How you going to get ashore?" asked Frank. "The boat is over there on +the beach." + +"I'll show you," Pat replied. + +The next moment he was in the water, striking out with lusty strokes for +the shore, only a few rods away. + +"There's a crocodile coming!" Frank called out to him. + +The call was designed to make Pat show a burst of speed, but it did +indeed serve as a warning to the swimmer, for a huge crocodile separated +himself from a point a few paces away and started to make a breakfast of +the boy. + +Pat saw the danger and hesitated an instant, uncertain whether to turn +back to the _Manhattan_ or to strike out for the shore. This second of +hesitation would have cost him his life if Ned had not acted promptly. + +When he saw that the crocodile was sure to win in the race, he fired one +shot and the saurian disappeared beneath the surface of the water, shot +through the eye. Pat turned back to the _Manhattan_, but Ned directed +him to go on to the shore, find the boys, and return as quickly as +possible. + +"And row back here before you go," continued Ned. + +"And swim to the beach again?" called Pat, glancing cautiously about. +"Not on your whiskers!" + +"Afraid of a little crocodile not more then forty feet long!" laughed +Frank, as Pat reached the beach and entered the boat. + +"Here's the boat," Pat called, in a few moments, touching the bow of the +_Manhattan_. "What next!" + +"I'm going with you and bring it back," Ned replied. "When you boys +reach the beach you'll have to call out. I'm going to take the +_Manhattan_ out farther." + +"All right!" Pat said. "I think you need to after that shot!" + +"And tell the boys," Ned went on, "that they'll have the chiefs of a +hundred tribes of dog-eaters after them if they don't get to the boat +right quick!" + +"I guess that ought to bring them!" Frank said. + +Ned accompanied Pat to the beach, brought the boat back, and then moved +the _Manhattan_ some distance out in the bay. + +"Do you really think the boys are in danger?" asked Frank, after they +had settled down to a careful watch of the beach. + +"They certainly are," was the reply. + +"Do you think the chiefs are really on that island?" + +"Yes; in fact, I am quite certain of it." + +"Oh, a wild cat might have stirred up the monkeys," Frank said, hardly +believing the lame explanation of the disturbances which he was making. + +Ned pointed off to the west. + +"Look there," he said. + +"Can't see a thing." + +"Then take the glass," Ned said. + +"Why," Frank said, "there's smoke over there on the west coast! Now, +what do you think of that? It wasn't there a few minutes ago." + +"No," replied Ned. "It wasn't there a few minutes ago. It puffed up +while I was looking that way." + +"It must be a steam launch," Frank observed. + +"Of course," Ned replied, "and steam has been gotten up since that shot +was fired. Now do you understand?" + +"I'm afraid I do," Frank replied. "And the steamer is coming around here +to see what's going on, and the native chiefs will be coming down to the +bay to look the situation over! Where do the boys come out?" + +"They are in a dangerous position," Ned replied. + +"I hope they'll get here before the steamer turns that point." + +"They will have to return pretty soon if they do," Ned said, looking +again through his glass, "for the steamer is approaching the southern +end of the island rapidly, and will soon be in sight." + +"Can we beat it?" asked Frank. + +"On the run? I'm afraid not. If the boys were here we might stand a +chance of keeping out of their way for a long time, but we've got to +remain here until the last moment in the hope of their returning." + +"You're not thinking of going away and leaving them, are you?" asked +Frank, surprised at Ned's remark. + +"If we stay here and submit to capture," Ned replied, "it is all off for +all of us. If we get away we may be able to render assistance to the +boys, but if we remain here and are killed or taken prisoners there is +little hope for them, surrounded by savages on an unknown island, +without even a boat." + +"Of course you are right," Frank said, "It seems cruel to sail away and +leave them here." + +The steamer, as shown by the column of smoke, was now approaching the +southern end of the island, and would soon be in a position from which +the _Manhattan_ might be seen. + +"If we are going at all," Ned said, with a sigh, "we may as well be +moving. We ought to be able to make the north end by the time they gain +the south end. It will be a game of chase, I reckon. I hope the boys +will understand." + +"They certainly will," replied Frank. "They know well enough we are no +quitters, and that there is usually a good reason for what you do." + +The _Manhattan_ was soon in motion, speeding at the rate of fifteen or +eighteen miles an hour toward the north end of the island. Ned watched +the smoke of the steamer intently as the race progressed. Finally the +point at the north was turned, and, much to the surprise of both boys, +they saw Pat standing on the beach beckoning to them in a manner full of +excitement. + +"There's been something doing," said Frank, with a shiver. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +OF THE WILD CAT PATROL, MANILA. + + +The smoke from the steamer was now on the south end of the island, +moving along toward the east with a speed which showed Ned that it would +be impossible to outfoot the larger craft. + +There was little time to lose, if the _Manhattan_ was to continue the +flight, and yet it was evident that Pat had something of importance to +communicate or desired to be at once taken on board. Ned did not +hesitate long, for the boy's life might be at stake. + +But when the _Manhattan_ neared the point of land upon which Pat stood +the boy shook his head and pointed to the west. It was clear that he did +not wish to be taken on board there. + +Ned kept on toward the beach, however, notwithstanding Pat's frantic +gestures, and was not a little annoyed when he saw the boy wade out into +the water, down the sloping shore, lapped by tiny waves, and strike out +boldly for the boat. + +He reached the _Manhattan_ in safety, was hauled in, and sank down in +the cockpit with a grunt of exhaustion for he had exerted his full +strength, "and then some" as he afterwards explained, in the long swim. +Presently he arose and pointed to a little projection on the shore, +perhaps three hundred yards ahead. + +"There's a river runs in there," he said, "and the _Manhattan_ will find +a safe harbor, as the stream though narrow, is deep and overhung with +trees and creepers." + +"But they must know that there is a boat here," Frank said. "This engine +of ours talks some when she moves." + +"I don't think they heard it," Pat insisted. + +"But the shot?" asked Ned. + +"That might have come from the island. Anyway," Pat went on, "there is +little commotion on the island except that made by the monkeys and the +birds." + +"Did you see anything of the boys?" asked Ned, the safety of Jack and +Jimmie concerning him greatly. + +"No," was the disappointing reply. "They got too good a start on me." + +"How far inland did you go?" asked Frank. + +By this time the _Manhattan_ was under way, and the place of refuge +spoken of by the boy was not far away. + +"I climbed the hill that runs near the shore," was the reply. "The first +thing I saw was a collection of tents and leaf shelters." + +Ned and Frank both gave exclamations of amazement. + +"Found at last!" Frank said. + +"The next thing I saw," Pat went on, "was a small steamer lying in a bay +on the west shore. There is a break in the hills which line that coast, +and I could see the boat plainly. I have seen her in Manila. It is the +_Miles_, and she is carrying the American flag. She got up steam just as +I caught sight of her, and at first I thought her activity had been +aroused by the shot which saved my life, but I've now reached the +conclusion that she was merely making a perfunctory trip around the +island." + +"Then you think if we escape observation on this run we will be safe for +some hours?" + +"I am quite sure of it, so far as those on the boat are concerned. But +what is the boat doing here? It is a government boat, used by officials +in making tours of inspection. Perhaps the high brows at Manila are wise +to what is going on here, and have sent the _Miles_ to look into the +matter. Then we're left, eh?" + +As the _Manhattan_ was now nosing her way into the mouth of the little +stream referred to by Pat, and Ned was fully occupied in working her in, +he made no reply to the suggestions thus presented. However, he was +studying over the proposition with a wish in his breast that the _Miles_ +might not be at that time in the legitimate service of the government. + +He was virtually disobeying the positive orders of Major John Ross in +cruising about in the _Manhattan_ at that time. If he had obeyed +instructions he would doubtless be in Manila now awaiting the slow +unwinding of red tape, instead of there in the channel. He had taken the +bit in his teeth and desired to "make good." + +Besides, he was satisfied that the government officers, if the _Miles_ +really was there on an official mission, would merely disperse the +native chiefs if they were discovered and permit the plotters to escape. +This would only put off the day of final action, for the chiefs would +continue to assemble and discuss the treaty until the Philippines were +in a blaze of war or the men who were urging them on were in prison. + +"There," said Frank, presently, "no person out there in the bay can get +a look at us so long as we remain here." + +Indeed the harbor was an ideal hiding place. The stream turned sharply +to the east from its northerly course just before it reached the white +beach, ran a few yards in that direction, and then turned north once +more and emptied into the sea. This placed a dense growth of jungle +between the beach and the position taken by the _Manhattan_, which had +passed into the channel running east and west and was effectively +screened from view on either side by the growths of the jungle. + +As soon as the boat was in the position desired, Ned crossed the arm of +land lying between the stream and the beach and looked out with his +glass. The _Miles_ passed while he stood there, the American flag flying +from her masthead. When he went back to the _Manhattan_ there was a +troubled look on his face. + +"She's on government service, all right," he said to Pat and Frank, "I +saw men in uniform on her deck." + +"I didn't see anybody land," said Pat. + +"Did she communicate with the shore in any way?" asked Ned. + +"Well, there were native boats plying about and they might have taken +some of the brown men off to her." + +"It is all of a piece with the counterfeit instructions," Ned said. +"There is an unknown interest working in this case. If the officers at +Manila suspected or had wind of what is going on here, why didn't they +send a troop ship and capture the chiefs, and so screen out the men +responsible for the conspiracy?" + +"That's another thing we've got to find out," Frank said, with a grin. +"We've got a good many things to find out!" + +"And the first thing to discover," Ned said, "is what has become of the +boys." + +"Right you are!" cried Pat. "I'll go back to the top of the hill and see +if there's any commotion on the island." + +"What does the island look like?" asked Frank. + +"Looks like a valley with a line of hills shutting it in. Looks like a +saucer with a high rim. The dago chiefs are encamped in the middle of +the saucer." + +"In a thicket, of course?" + +"It is quite free from jungle growths down there," was the reply--"so +clear that I was able to see the encampment and the people moving about. +And I think I saw the treaty box, at that!" + +"Treaty box?" laughed Frank. "Don't you ever think these brown men have +any box to put their treaty in!" + +"What do you think about it, Ned?" asked Pat. + +"I hardly think they unlock their pocket-books with keys like the one I +found," replied Ned. "And, besides," he added, "the white men back of +this conspiracy would naturally want a treaty signed up with all the +ceremony that could be hatched up, in order to impress the chiefs. Yes, +I think there must be a treaty box!" + +"And you think you've got a key to it?" asked Frank. + +"I've got a key to something," was the reply. + +Frank opened his lips to make some remark, but Ned laid a hand on his +arm and drew closer to him so that a low voice might be heard, at the +same time motioning to Pat to remain quiet. + +"Now, don't move, or turn to look," Ned said, "but in a few seconds, +after I have turned away, look, casually, toward the great balete tree +which rises above the jungle straight to the south." + +Ned turned away directly and faced the jungle to the north. + +"What do you see?" he asked, turning toward the boys again but not +looking at them. + +"Monkeys wiggling in the creepers," Frank said. + +"Filipinos," answered Pat. + +"How many?" asked Ned. + +"Well," replied Pat, "I thought I saw two, but I guess there is only +one. We've got to get him," he added. + +"Of course!" Frank said. "If we don't, he'll go back to camp and tell +about seeing us here; then they'll swarm down on us, and it will be all +off with the whole bunch of us. We've got to get him!" + +"But how?" asked Pat. + +In the short silence that followed all three boys cudgeled their brains +for some idea which might serve, but the case was assuming a hopeless +aspect when a shrill voice in pretty good English came from the tree. + +"Hi, there!" cried the voice. + +"If that's Jimmie, made up as a little brown man," Pat said, "I'll beat +him up when he comes aboard." + +"More likely to be Jack," said Frank. + +"Hi, there!" repeated the voice from the tree. + +"That's not Jimmie, or Jack either," Ned said. "What do you want?" he +asked. + +The reply came in the form of a feline growl which might have issued +forth from the throat of a wild cat. + +"What does the badge say?" asked the voice, then. + +The boys looked at each other in wonder for a moment and then Ned +answered: + +"Be prepared!" + +"Now, what do you think of that?" Pat demanded. "What do you think of +meeting a Boy Scout out here?" + +"What patrol?" asked Frank, half doubting whether the person in the tree +would find the correct answer. + +"Wild Cat, Manila!" came the reply. + +"Then come out of the tree, Wild Cat," Ned laughed, "and tell us how you +came to be here." + +There was a great rustling of foliage, and then a Filipino boy not more +than fourteen years of age appeared on the trunk. He worked his way down +and disappeared in the jungle. In a moment, however, he made his +appearance on the margin of the little stream and was on board. + +He was a rather good looking young fellow, with keen eyes and a lithe, +muscular figure. He was well dressed in a suit of light material, and +wore a Boy Scout badge on the lapel of his coat. + +"We're gettin so we find 'em in the woods!" Frank said, as the boy +stepped on the bridge deck. "Did you come to the island on the steamer +which just passed here?" he added, as the lad looked about him with a +grin. + +"Yes," was the reply. "Come as servant." + +"Well, why aren't you on board now?" asked Frank, suspiciously. + +"Run away!" was the short reply. + +"What for?" demanded Frank, determined to know all that there was to +know about the new-comer, and urged on by Ned's nods, which told him to +proceed. + +"Tired of city," was the grinning reply. + +As the boy spoke he turned around to the jungle and waved his hand, as +if taking it all in at one motion. Then he laid a finger on his own +breast and said: + +"That for mine!" + +"I'm afraid you've been in bad company," laughed Frank. "You're talking +slang! What's your name?" + +"Minda," was the reply. + +"Sounds like a girl's name," grunted Pat. "What are the chiefs doing on +the island?" + +"Conference," was the reply. + +"They're forming a confederacy, are they?" + +Minda shook his head and looked perplexed. + +"Don't know," he replied. + +"Where are the two Scouts who went ashore a long time ago?" asked Ned. + +"Tied," replied Minda, crossing his wrists to indicate what he meant. + +"That's nice!" Pat broke in. "Where are they?" + +Again Minda shook his head, saying that he did not know where the boys +were, that they might have been put on board the steamer. + +"So the officers on board the steamer communicated with the shore?" +asked Ned. + +"Yes; that's how I got away," was the reply. + +"Do the officers know what is going on?" continued Ned. Again Minda +shook his head. + +"I reckon you're off there," Pat exclaimed. "They do know, and the man +in charge on board the steamer is a traitor! I know him!" + +Again the Filipino looked puzzled. + +"Good man!" he said, and sat down on the bridge deck. + +"Do you really believe the boys were put on board the steamer?" asked +Frank of Ned, in a moment. + +"I think the native chiefs would put us all on board the steamer, if +they could do so," was the reply. + +Then the patrol leader turned to Minda again. + +"What did the steamer come down here for?" he asked. + +"Patrol," was the reply. + +"On no special mission?" Ned went on. + +"Just to patrol," was the reply. + +"I don't believe it!" Frank burst out. "That boat was sent down here to +investigate this conspiracy matter, and the man in command is making a +perfunctory job of it. He'll then go back to Manila and report nothing +doing!" + +"And the conspiracy will go on, and there'll be war!" Pat added. + +"Just so!" Frank commented. + +"Well," Ned said, "we can't find out whether you are right or not by +asking the officers, either on the steamer or at Manila. We've got to +find out by watching the brown men! We've got to leave the _Manhattan_ +here and go into the jungle and see what is going on, and find out what +company the chiefs receive. It is my idea that some of the men in +uniform are leading double lives!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE SENATOR'S SON SEEKS A KEY. + + +Jimmie and Jack were lying behind a great flowing vine which swung from +a balete tree, looking keenly out in the direction in which they +believed the camp to be situated, when four lusty men who appeared to be +Filipinos crept noiselessly out of the jungle and sat down on their +backs with chuckles of satisfaction. + +"Quit it!" roared Jimmie, thinking they had been followed from the boat. + +Then he saw it was no joke, for Jack was floundering about, and one of +the little brown men was tying his hands with a hard cord. He flopped +over on his back and looked up into the sinister face of a native. + +"What's comin' off here?" demanded the boy, trying hard to get a glimpse +of Jack from where he lay. + +"We're pinched!" Jack called out. + +Then the two were dragged hastily to their feet and pushed through the +jungle toward the camp. Jimmie thought this a place for optimism, and +decided to try it on the low-browed chap who was rather rudely forcing +him along. "I was just thinking of going down to see your camp," he said +with a grin, "but I didn't know the way exactly. I'm glad you happened +along. I've got the left hind foot of a rabbit that was caught by a +black cat at midnight, in the dark of the moon, in a negro cemetery, on +the grave of a black man who was hanged for murder. Guess that's brought +me luck." + +"You'll need four rabbits' feet if you get out of this," Jack grumbled. +"Suppose we take a quick hike for the boat, right now?" he added, +believing the Filipinos would not be able to understand English. + +In this he was mistaken, for one of the men said: + +"Don't you ever try it. Your left hind foot won't protect you if you +do." + +The boys gazed about the group, now halted, trying to pick out the +speaker. + +"But this is a magic rabbit-foot," Jimmie retorted, scornfully as if any +sane person ought to know of the virtues of a left hind rabbit-foot. "It +used to be owned by an armless man who rowed over the Great American +Desert in an open boat!" + +This, of course, was all for the purpose of inducing the one who had +spoken in English to speak again, in order that he might be sorted out +of the others. Jimmie's imaginative powers proved equal to the occasion. + +A man who, regarded closely, did not look at all like a Filipino--a +slender, though broad-shouldered, man with sharp gray eyes and the +awkward manner of one unused to disguise--laughed lightly at the boy's +odd conceit and said: + +"That will be about enough of that Bowery lingo. What are you boys doing +here?" he added. + +"We came over to see about puttin' up a couple of skyscrapers!" replied +Jimmie. "The air seems nice an' high here. Guess we wouldn't have to +push it up any to build fifty stories. Where you takin' us?" he went on. +"If I owned this shrubbery we're borin' through, I'd have it manicured." + +"Where did you leave the _Manhattan_?" asked the other, without taking +the trouble to answer Jimmie's question. + +"We didn't leave her," Jimmie lied, cheerfully arguing with himself that +it wasn't any of the other man's business where they had left the boat. +"She's left us, an' gone off on a cruise to the South; left us to reign +on this island. She'll be back in a couple of days, an' then you'll get +what's comin' to you." + +"I'm glad you took over the government of the island," the other +laughed. "Only for your appearance here we should not have known about +the _Manhattan_ being in these waters. Now we can look her up. We have a +steamer here for that purpose." + +"I guess I ought to have remained on board," Jimmie said, ruefully. + +"It is a wonder that Nestor permitted you to leave the boat," observed +the other. "It is said of the lad that he makes few mistakes," he went +on, glancing from one boy to the other. + +"So you know Ned, do you?" asked Jack. "Well, you know a good fellow. If +you stay about here you'll be likely to know more about him before +long." + +"Oh, I mean to remain," was the cool reply. "Nestor is wanted at Manila +for disobeying orders, and I'll take him along with me when I go. +There's a steamer out here looking for him." + +The boys knew that Ned had left Manila in defiance of the orders of +Major John Ross, but they did not believe that a steamer had been sent +out to arrest him. They knew that he had received his original orders +from Washington, and believed that when Ross communicated with the +authorities there he would be instructed to keep his hands off so far as +Ned was concerned. + +The man was, of course, lying, doubtless in the hope of creating the +impression in the minds of the boys that he was still in the service of +the government, and there on official business. The boys had no fear of +their leader being taken back to Manila under arrest. They were more +concerned for his life if he fell into the hands of this traitor. + +"You know a fat lot about it," Jack said, disdainfully. "What you know +about Ned's business won't swell your head any. Where's this steamer +you're talking about?" + +"I suspect," replied the other, "that she is now circling the island in +order to pick up the _Manhattan_. Nestor was wrong to run away with a +government boat. He'll serve time for it, I reckon." + +"I suppose," Jimmie said, in as sarcastic a tone as he could bring +forth, "that you're lookin' among these bushes for the _Manhattan_. She +might have climbed one of these big trees," he added, with a grin. + +The leader made no reply, none being required, and the party pressed +forward toward the center of the island. The jungle grew thinner as they +advanced, and presently the encampment came into view. + +It was evident to the boys that some of the native chiefs were there in +state, for some of the tents--doubtless stolen from the government--were +gaudily decorated, and attendants were flying about as if their lives +depended on the speed with which they covered the ground. It seemed to +the boys that there could not be less than three hundred persons +present, and the decorated tents, marking the stopping place of a chief, +indicated a large collection of native rulers. + +The boys were not taken through the encampment, but led into a tent on +the outskirts, where they were securely tied up and left alone. + +"Cripes!" Jimmie said, when the flap of the tent fell behind the figure +of the disguised man, "this reminds me of a drammer we used to have on +the good old Bowery. In this play there was a girl that was always bein' +captured an' rescued. Any scene that didn't witness a couple of captures +and a couple of rescues was no good. This is just like that. We're bein' +captured, all right, but we ain't bein' rescued--not just yet!" + +"Ned's somewhere about," Jack said, confidently. "He'll manage to turn +us loose before long." + +Then through the jungle, and ringing snappingly on the clear air, came +the snorting of the _Manhattan's_ engines. At that moment she was +entering the little creek which Pat had pointed out. In a moment the +explosions ceased. + +"If they didn't know before," Jack said, "they know now. It won't take +them long to geezle the _Manhattan_ now. Say," he added, "roll over here +and eat these cords. If I could get down to them I'd soon be free." + +"I wonder if I could?" asked Jimmie. + +The cords were hard and strong and tightly knotted, but after a long +time the boy succeeded in releasing Jack's hands, and the rest was easy +as they were alone in the tent. In a very short time both boys were free +of bonds. + +The tent did not seem to be guarded, as the captors doubtless believed +escape from the island impossible, even if the boys succeeded in getting +away from the camp. They did not know, of course, that the member of the +Wild Cat Patrol from Manila had noted the capture of the lads, and had +started away to notify their friends as soon as the explosions heard so +plainly by the boys notified him of the whereabouts of the _Manhattan_. + +Jimmie and Jack remained quietly in the tent for some moments after +their freedom from their bonds had been gained, then Jimmie crawled to +the wall nearest the center of the camp, lifted the canvas and looked +out. He crouched there a moment and then dropped the canvas and turned +to his chum. + +"You remember the night in Yokohama?" he asked. + +"I should say so," Jack replied. "Didn't I wait around a bum old hotel +until almost morning for you to come back?" + +"Well," Jimmie went on, "the man that sat in disguise in the tea house, +and the men who were there with him, are out there." + +Jack approached the little opening made by the lifting of the canvas and +looked out. + +"Which one?" he asked. "Which one was disguised!" + +"The military-lookin' chap," was the reply. + +"On the night them gazabos chased us down the Street of a Thousand Steps +he was made up like a Jap. When we came to the marines he ducked, as if +afraid of Uncle Sam's uniforms." + +"Ned rather thought he'd be down to this conference," Jack said. + +The man to whom the boy called special attention was in the garb of a +civilian, but the military manner was unmistakable. He now stood talking +with half a dozen Filipinos, occasionally pointing to the eastern coast +of the island. + +"He's sendin' his natives after the _Manhattan_, all right," Jimmie +said. "There's goin' to be somethin' doin here before long. Look who's +here!" he added, as a young man of perhaps twenty-five sauntered toward +the tent. + +Under his arm the young man carried a steel box, like those used as +receptacles for cash and important papers in safe deposit vaults. The +box seemed to be quite heavy, for the young man frequently shifted it +from one side to the other. + +"There's your treaty box!" laughed Jack, poking Jimmie in the ribs. + +"It may be, at that," the boy replied. + +The young man passed from group to group in front of the tents, +apparently seeking some one. Occasionally he pointed to the keyhole of +the box and the others felt in their pockets. + +"He's lost the key to the treaty box," Jimmie grinned. + +"Probably he's got cigarettes in there and wants to dope himself with +one," Jack replied. + +"Anyway," Jimmie went on, "I wish Ned was here. I'll bet he could open +that box for him." + +"Now he's talking with the man who chased you out of the tea house in +the Street of a Thousand Steps," Jack said, "and the fellow is raving +about something." + +"They can't open the treaty box!" laughed Jimmie. + +"You'll be seeing things next," Jack grunted. "Now, what do you think of +that?" he added. "The chap is bringing his box here." + +"Then fix yourself up so you'll look like you was in captivity," Jimmie +advised. "If he finds out we've released ourselves he'll tie us up +again." + +The boys found pieces of the cord with which they had been tied and +managed to put up a very fair imitation of being bound good and hard. +When the young man entered the tent he stood over them for a moment with +a supercilious grin on his face. + +"How do you like it, boys?" he finally asked. + +"Fine!" Jimmie sang out. + +"Isn't it most dinner time?" Jack added. + +The young man sat down on a bundle of freshly cut grass, placed the box +by his side, placed his chin on his hands, his elbows on his knees, and +sat for some moments regarding the boys with an amused smile on his +rather weak face. + +"What are you doing here?" he asked. + +"We're doin' acrobatic stunts on a high wire just now," scorned Jimmie. + +"Don't get gay, now," the other growled. "I'm the son of a United States +senator." + +"I'm the sister of the sun an' moon," Jimmie replied. "So don't be +givin' me no guff." + +"You're a cheeky little baggage," the son of the senator replied, rising +to his feet. + +"You might leave that box here," Jimmie called out, "if it's got +anythin' to eat in it. We could eat a crocodile." + +"Be careful that the crocodiles don't eat you," warned the other and, +seizing the box in a firmer grasp, walked out of the tent. + +"What do you make of it?" asked Jack. + +"The son of a senator," Jimmie replied, "is here representin' some big +interest, an' that's the treaty box he's got. Say, if they ever get all +these native kings an' queens an' prime ministers to goin', there'll be +bloody war in the Philippines, an' Japan, or China, or Germany, or +France will butt in, an' there'll be a fine time." + +"Of course," Jack replied. "That's why we've got to stop it." + +"It might be stopped by scatterin' these chiefs, an' kings, an' all the +rest," Jimmie concluded. + +"Not so you could notice it," Jack insisted. "Didn't we scatter them +when they met on that other island? Well, they've come together again, +haven't they? I've heard Ned say that the only way to stop this thing is +to get a good grip on the man at the head of it. The thing now is to +find who that man is." + +"I should say so, with the military men all mixed up in it!" Jimmie +said. "It seems to me that the head of it must be in Washington, in +Manila, or in Yokohama. I wish Ned was here." + +"Tied up?" echoed Jack. "If he was, we'd never get out. Let me tell you +this, little man," he went on, the tan on his cheeks showing browner +than ever against the sudden paleness of his face, "let me tell you +this: These men are here in the guise of soldiers to put this treaty +through. These chiefs think they represent men high up in our +government. If they didn't think so they wouldn't listen. + +"When it is all over, and war has been declared, and our title to the +islands has gone up in smoke, these traitors will go back to their posts +in the army. Now, this being the case, they won't want to see us around, +will they?" + +"Hardly," was the reply. + +Jimmie saw what his chum was coming to and opened his eyes wider than +ever. + +"You mean," he added, "that when the ruction breaks out, or even before, +we'll be put out of the way?" + +"Of course." + +"Then I'm goin' to duck right now!" Jimmie said, moving toward the wall +of the tent. "I'm not goin' to stay here an' be bolo meat. If we can get +to the first thicket we stand a chance of gettin' to the _Manhattan_." + +"That's all right, but it won't do," Jack said. "Don't you suppose these +gazabos heard the fuss the engine was makin'? Well, then! But we've got +to go somewheres, so come on. Me for a point opposite to the direction +of the sounds we heard." + +There was a sudden commotion in the camp just then, and the boys reached +the first thicket. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +SIGNAL LIGHTS IN THE CHINA SEA. + + +The boys reached the first thicket and quickly disappeared from the +sight of those in the camp. There they listened for an instant, but +heard nothing which sounded like pursuit. Then they dug into the jungle +and worked around toward the bay where they had left the _Manhattan_. + +There came no alarm from the camp as they passed through the thickets, +using only their hands in fighting the creepers and snake-like vines. It +was afterwards learned that the arrival of a particularly powerful chief +had caused the commotion which had so assisted in the escape. + +Luckily the attentions paid to the new arrival stretched over a long +period of time, otherwise the boys would certainly have been retaken. +Disturbed by the noise made by the lads in pushing through the jungle, +the monkeys, birds, and other creatures of the forest lifted up their +voices and seemed to point out the path of flight. Jimmie declared that +a brass band could have done no more to locate them. + +It was after noon when they came to the little bay where they had left +the _Manhattan_. There was the bay, shimmering in the sun, there was the +beach where they had landed. But where was the motor boat? + +"They've had to run for it," Jimmie decided, gazing gloomily over the +waste of sea and back to the jungle. "What's the next move? This spot +must be watched, so we've got to get out of here. I guess we're in for +it, all right." + +The situation seemed to be a desperate one, and the boys crept back into +the jungle to study it out. If the _Manhattan_ had left the vicinity of +the island there was no hope for them; still, they decided to make sure +that it had before giving over the search for it. In considering the +situation they did not at all censure Ned, for they saw that he might +have been obliged to take the _Manhattan_ away from the little bay in +order to avoid capture. + +At last when, in their tracing of the coast in the faint hope of finally +coming upon the _Manhattan_, the boys came upon the little stream where +the boat was hidden, they remained concealed from the sight of those on +board while they took careful note of the surroundings. It did not seem +possible that the _Manhattan_ had not been discovered by the Filipinos, +and naturally the boys suspected that some trick to gain possession of +her without an open fight was being worked. + +The boat lay quietly drawing at the cable which held her to the bank of +the little stream, with everything apparently in order in the cockpit +and in the cabin, but there were at first no signs of the boys. +Presently, however, Pat's red head shot up out of the cockpit, where he +had evidently been lying down. + +As the head appeared, an arrow whizzed almost over the heads of the +watching boys and struck the side of the boat with a force which seemed +equal to cutting a hole in it. Pat was out of sight in a moment, with +the cabin door closed behind him. + +"Going back to old methods, are they?" whispered Jack. "Do you see +anything of Ned or Frank there?" + +Jimmie shook his head. + +"I'm afraid they've gone to look us up," he said, "an' in that case, +their return to the boat is likely to bring about a fight." + +The battle was on in a moment, for Ned, Frank and the Filipino boy were +now approaching the boat. It was decidedly a desperate charge they were +making through the jungle when shots from the right of the pursuers +caused the latter to believe that their peril lay in that direction. + +When the Filipinos turned to beat off this attack Ned and his companions +made a rush for the boat and reached her in safety. Then the Filipinos +rushed to the bank, a dozen or more of them, in a rash attempt to board +the _Manhattan_. + +They were met by a hot fire from the cabin and the cockpit as soon as +they came out on the little rim of clear space on the bank and turned to +the thicket for shelter only to meet a volley of revolver shots from the +interior. This was too much for the untrained natives to endure, and +they fled up the shore of the stream and disappeared. + +The boys themselves were uninjured, but spots of blood on the shore and +on the leaves indicated that their bullets had not all gone astray. The +wounded natives, however, had been carried off by their companions. + +Of course those on the boat understood where the fire which had assisted +them had come from. Jimmie and Jack were the only persons on the island +who would be apt to come to their aid. + +"Come out of that!" Frank called, as the last Filipino disappeared. +"Don't stay there in the thicket all day! We've got to get out!" + +"Why don't you get out, then?" demanded Jimmie, with a grin. "We'll stay +here an' run things while you are gone." + +The boys were soon on board and the _Manhattan_ was worked out into the +channel. But before she was far away from the shore a volley of shots +came from the jungle, doing no damage except to the beauty of the craft. + +"Now run!" advised Jack. "The steamer over on the other side can chase +the legs off us if given half a chance." + +Frank took charge of the engine, and Jack stood by to see that he did +the right thing, and the boat purred through the waters at a speed which +she had never been called upon to make before. Presently the steamer +showed up, pumping great columns of smoke into the sweet air, and the +chase was on in earnest. + +Ned directed Frank to seek the shelter of a group of islands not far +away and sat down to talk with Jimmie, first explaining to the two who +had just come aboard how the Filipino Boy Scout came to be there. + +"We can't miss 'em!" Jimmie exclaimed, shaking the Filipino warmly by +the hand. "We found Boy Scouts in Mexico, and in the Canal Zone, and now +in the Philippines. They hop out on us wherever we go, like 'skeeters!" + +There was now a long and serious talk concerning the course to be +pursued. Jimmie and Jack told of meeting the man who had been followed +to Yokohama, and also of the senator's son and the box he carried. The +Filipino told what he knew of the plans of those on board the steamer, +now gradually drawing away from them. + +"Are you sure that the men in charge of the steamer are American +military men?" asked Ned. + +"Sure!" was the reply. "I came from Manila with them." + +"And they are in the service of the government?" + +"Sure!" + +"Then what are they doing on that island, in company with the insurgent +chiefs?" demanded Frank, but the Filipino only shook his head. + +He insisted that Lieutenant Carstens, who was in command of the vessel +from which the steam launch had come, was a fine officer, and high in +the esteem of the Manila authorities. + +"Then what is he monkeyin' with the rebel chiefs for?" demanded Jimmie. +"It looks to me like Uncle Sam was goin' to get the double cross." + +"Why don't you go back to the steamer," asked Pat of Ned, "and go on +board?" + +"That would be fine!" cried Jack. + +"What could they do to him?" demanded Frank. + +"That boat is here to make trouble for me," Ned said, in a moment. "I +can't understand what is going on, but I know that it would not be safe +for me to go on board." + +"For why?" asked Jack. + +"I should be accused of murder," was the grave reply. + +"For shootin' the dagoes who were shootin' at you?" demanded Jimmie. + +"That will be the charge," Ned replied. + +"Then we'll become pirates!" Jack cried. "We'll sail the raving deep and +get a new plank for prisoners to walk as soon as the old one wears out. +We'll be bold, bad men on the Spanish main!" + +"Cut it out!" Frank said. "This is no joke. They've got the goods on us +for that shooting, and we've got to keep out of the way until Ned +discovers the inner workings of this red tape machine." + +The truth of this statement was so apparent that there was little more +argument on the subject. It seemed that, in trying to defend the +government against a gang of conspirators and traitors, Ned had indeed +come to a point of open rupture with some of the men in authority. + +For some unknown reason they were chasing him down. Twice he had come to +the spot where the treasonable document was to be executed, and twice he +had been driven away without accomplishing the object he sought to +accomplish. + +About the middle of the afternoon the government steamer disappeared +entirely, leaving the _Manhattan_ alone in the network of tiny islands +which came down pretty close to the northern shore of the island of +Luzon. Ned watched the last trace of her smoke disappear with much the +same feeling that one experiences when an enemy he has been fighting +passes from view but does not leave the vicinity. + +"She's getting ready to spring out on us," he said to Frank. "She is +either waiting for night, or she has gone back to dig up a gunboat. +Those on board of her have good ground for arresting us, and before we +could prove the true state of affairs at the time of the shooting the +treaty would be signed and war would be on." + +"If we only had that treaty box!" Jimmie exclaimed. + +"And the senator's son with it!" Jack put in. + +The steamer gave them no more trouble that day, and when night fell the +_Manhattan_ nosed into a creek which rippled into the channel and the +boys prepared to pass the night there. It was a still night and there +was no moon, but would be later on. The air, heavy with tropical scents, +scarcely stirred, the light breeze having gone down at sunset. + +The island which the boys had selected as a resting place for the night +was well up to the north of Luzon and faced the China Sea. There seemed +to be no land between its western coast and the shoreline of China. Far +out in the sea the lights of a liner gleamed for an instant as the boys +carried provisions ashore, then the great expanse of water showed only +the light of the stars. + +"We may have to lug this stuff back to the boat with a rush," laughed +Jimmie, as he carried a basket of tinned provisions from the rowboat to +the little glade where they were to prepare supper. "I don't believe the +government steamer went very far away. If she did, she'll come back with +a gunboat." + +"Imagine a gunboat out here after the _Manhattan_!" scoffed Jack. "All +the steamer people wanted was to drive us away. Don't you think they +could have caught us if they had set out to? You bet they could! But +they didn't want to show up before us. There are people on board of her +who do not want to be seen in the society they have been in during the +past few days." + +Ned looked the speaker over thoughtfully for a moment. + +"I think," he said, "that you've about hit the nail on the head. They +wanted to drive us away, and they didn't want their own boat in the way +to-night." + +"What do you mean by that?" asked Frank. + +"I'm not very clear in my mind as to what I did mean," laughed Ned. +"However, it is plain that the steamer did not relish staying about +here." + +Ned watched the supper preparations for a short time and then walked +away toward the interior. The island was a very small one, and consisted +chiefly of a round rim of white sand--which was rock pounded up by the +beating of the waves--and a rocky, cone-like elevation which lifted +above the waters of the China Sea like a signal tower. + +In some distant epoch the bit of rock had been cast up from the bottom +of the ocean, and the rains and suns of countless years had formed from +the volcanic material the thin soil which here and there supported +tropical growths. + +Sailors called the island "Elephant's Head," because the central +elevation was said to resemble in some remote degree the head of an +elephant, and because two great ridges of rock jutted out into the +water, pointing toward the coast of China. These ridges formed an +excellent harbor, and were known as "The Tusks." + +The _Manhattan_ was not anchored in this secure harbor, but in a bay +which was formed by a break in the rock just around the south corner of +the island. There were springs high up on the mountain, and these formed +the river which had in turn worn away the rock and shaped the bay. + +Ned reached the place where the climb began in five minutes after +leaving the campfire. There was no jungle to speak of and he walked +rapidly. He passed on up the steep side of the mountain for some +distance and then paused on a little shelf of rock which faced the west +and took out his glass. + +Before him lay the quiet waters of the great China Sea, while back of +him loomed the rugged bulk of the mountain, the summit indistinct in the +darkness of the moonless night. The growths of the tropics came up to +where he stood and then died out from lack of soil. Elephant's Head +stood out boldly, its rugged lines unsoftened by the growths which +flourish almost everywhere in the Philippines. + +Below, Ned could see the red of the campfire, sheltered from the sea +side by a screen of bushes. Away to the west he could see, at first, +nothing, and then a light came dancing over the waves. At first he +thought he must be mistaken, but the light remained stationery except +that it seemed to rock with the slow movement of the waves. + +While the boy was wondering over the matter Pat came scrambling up the +side of the mountain. He threw himself on the shelf of rock by Ned's +side and pointed out to the west. + +"You see that light?" he asked. + +"Yes; I was just wondering about it," was the reply. + +"It is at the top of a tall mast," Pat went on to explain, "and is a +signal. I can't read it, of course, but it seems to me that it means +mischief." + +"I have no doubt of it," was the reply, "but we've got to wait for +developments for a time. This seems to me to be a waiting game," he +added with a laugh which did not sound at all merry. + +The boys sat for a long time, watching the light, which grew nearer, and +the campfire below, which was still glowing brightly. Then Ned turned +his glass to the north and an exclamation of surprise escaped him. Where +he looked there was a duplicate of the light to the west, and that, +also, was drawing closer. + +"I think," Ned said, after calling Pat's attention to the second light, +"that we'd better have that fire out. Go down and ask the boys to finish +their suppers and make everything dark." + +"Why," Pat said, "you haven't any notion those ships are coming here, +have you?" + +"There's a pretty good harbor here," Ned said. + +"Yes, but--" + +"And the insurrectos must have arms," Ned went on. + +Pat thumped his hands down on his knees half a dozen times and then +brought one palm down on Ned's shoulder. + +"Sure!" he said. "Sure, sure, sure! The game is to land arms and +ammunition here to-night! Now, what do you think of tumbling headfirst +into the center of the disturbance like this? Say, we'll have to receipt +for those guns!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +FOR PIRACY ON THE HIGH SEAS. + + +The boys hastened down to the campfire and quickly extinguished it, much +to the disgust of Jimmie, who had begun the preparation of an elaborate +meal--at least as elaborate as could be gotten together out of tin cans. + +This precaution taken, the _Manhattan_ was towed into the mouth of the +little creek and climbers and creepers drawn over her until no one would +have suspected her presence there. The engine was not set in motion in +making this change because of the danger from the explosions. + +All this accomplished, Ned and Pat climbed back to the shelf of rock and +again looked out over the mysterious China Sea. There were the two +lights, one to the west and one to the north. They were closer to the +island than before, however, and the light up toward Formosa was drawing +to the south rapidly. + +"They are going to meet here, all right," Pat said, "and I'll go apples +to snowballs that they've got arms for the insurrectos. The manager of +this enterprise never let all those chiefs get away from that other +island without signing the treaty, and now he's sneaking in guns to help +them out." + +The boys discussed the situation for some moments, the lights coming +nearer with astonishing rapidity. At length another light showed away to +the south and west, but not such a light as the others. + +It was not high up in the air, like the others, and directly it seemed +to divide itself into half a dozen points. Its progress toward the +island seemed to be even faster than that of the others. + +"That's a steamer," Ned said, after a long look through his glass. + +"The other lights are on steamers, too," Pat replied. "No wind-jammer +could make the time, in this calm, that those boats are making." + +While the boys looked the lights went out, or appeared to, and there was +only the glimmer of the unfamiliar constellations of the heavens over +the China Sea. + +"That's strange!" + +Pat turned to Ned and grasped him by the arm. + +"What do you make of it?" he continued. + +"That may be a signal," was the reply. + +"If it is, the glims will show again directly." + +"They may," was the reply. + +But the lights did not show again, and, after waiting for an hour or +more, the boys started back to the camp. Half way down, the dull, +reverberating boom of a cannon came to their ears, over the water. + +"What does that mean?" asked Pat. + +"It may be the gunboat Jimmie insisted would be sent for me," smiled +Ned. + +"You don't really think that?" + +"Hardly," was the reply, "but I don't know what to make of it." + +"Perhaps it was a command for the other ships to show their lights," Pat +suggested. + +"I hope Uncle Sam is becoming wise to the game that is being played down +here," Ned said, "and has sent a gunboat to look into it." + +"That's it!" cried Pat. "That's just it! If she doesn't pass the ships +in the dark there'll be something doing here." + +The dull boom of the gun came again, and, far out, the low lights of the +gunboat showed above the water. She seemed to be passing swiftly to the +north. + +"She's going to pass us, all right!" Pat cried. "Now, what did she make +that noise for? To warn the ships that she was coming, and to get out of +the way?" + +"There's some good reason," Ned replied. + +In a moment a searchlight shot out from the gunboat and prowled over the +sea. The boys could see it moving about, but could not see that it +picked up the ships which had previously shown the lights. One of the +vessels, it appeared, was too far to the south and the other too far to +the north to be reached by the traveling rays from the gunboat. + +"She's slowing down!" Pat cried, in a moment. "She's going to search the +islands. Glory be!" + +"You may not want to meet her people, after you find out what they +want," said Ned. "Remember that battle with the Filipinos back there." + +"I'm willing to take chances with them," was the reply. + +The boys now hastened back to camp and Ned passed on to the creek where +the _Manhattan_ lay in hiding. + +"Jimmie," he said, turning to face that young gentleman, "do you +remember whether those rockets we bought at Manila were put on board?" + +"Sure they were!" was the reply. "Want 'em?" + +Ned replied that he did, and the boy went prospecting in the lockers of +the boat. + +"Got 'em!" he cried presently. + +"Do you know how to send them off?" asked Ned. + +"Do I? Well, if you'd ever seen me bossin' the fireworks at Tompkins +Square, in little old N. Y., I guess you wouldn't ask that!" + +Just then Jack came blundering along through the brush and half fell +into the boat. + +"You'd make a fine scout!" Jimmie said. "You move through the thickets +with the stealth and grace of an elephant!" + +"What's that firing about?" asked Jack, paying no attention to the boy +and facing Ned anxiously, his face only half seen in the semi-darkness. + +"That is what I want you to find out," was the reply. "I want you and +Jimmie to put the boat in running condition, everything ready for a +spurt of speed. And I want you to remain here in the boat, ready to +shoot out in a second." + +"All right! That's easy." + +"You may have to wait a long time," Ned went on, "and you may have to go +inside of five minutes. When you go, muffle the engine as much as +possible, but run like the Old Nick was after you--run for the gunboat +out there!" + +"They'll pinch me!" wailed Jimmie. + +"And when you get to the gunboat," Ned continued, "tell the officer in +charge that Nestor is a prisoner on this island, and that the +insurrectos are about to land guns and ammunition here." + +"You a prisoner!" Jack echoed. "What's the use of lying about it?" + +"I shall be a prisoner by the time you reach the gunboat," Ned said, +coolly--as calmly as if he had been announcing that he would be taking +his supper at that time. + +"If you go in the _Manhattan_," Jack said, "you won't be a prisoner +here." + +"But I've got to stay here," Ned said, "and besides, the boat must not +be loaded down. She may have to make a hot run for the gunboat." + +"I don't know what you're up to," Jack said, doubtfully, "but I guess +you do, so I'll do just as you say." + +"What about the rockets?" asked Jimmie. + +"They are to be used in signaling the gunboat," Ned replied. "She may be +a long ways off when you get out there." + +When the boys at the camp had finished their supper, eaten in the +darkness, and watched the sea for signs of the ships for half an hour, +they started toward the boat. Then another shot came over the water, +followed by two more, fired in quick succession. Ned joined them +instantly, for, following the shots, the rattle of sailing gear and the +thud-thud of boxes or boards on a deck echoed over the sea. + +"One of the ships is close in," Ned said. "Now we'll see if the owners +are unloading missionaries here!" + +The vessel close in looked like an old-fashioned top-sail schooner; +still there was an engine and a propeller. She was a three-master, and +looked, in the uncertain light, as if she had been in service in the +East for a long time. + +She glided into the harbor between the Tusks as if she knew every inch +of the channel, and brought up close to a flat surface of rock on one of +the Tusks, which formed a natural pier. Then the hatches were opened, +and shaded lanterns gleamed about the deck. + +Ned glanced back over the mountain, and was astonished at seeing a green +signal light there, almost at the top. The men on the schooner saw the +signal, too, for Ned could see them pointing at it, could hear them +laughing as if a great point had been gained. + +"Wonder why we didn't see that?" asked Frank. "It must have been there +when the lights showed from the ships." + +"We didn't go up high enough, or it might not have been there when we +were looking," was the reply. + +"Well," Frank said, then, "if we didn't see the chap who is tending that +light on the mountain, he must have seen us; or if he didn't see us he +must have heard the engine of the _Manhattan_ doing her talking stunt." + +"Probably," replied Ned. + +The matter was more serious than his manner indicated, for he turned +quickly and walked toward the _Manhattan_, calling out softly to Pat as +he did so. There was no answer for a moment, and then it came in the +shape of a dozen pistol shots. + +Ned dropped down behind a clump of bushes and waited for an instant, +resolved to know what was going on at the boat before advancing. Then +the boys from the camp came running up, asking questions, and all made a +rush for the boat. + +When they came within sight of the spot where she lay, they saw that she +was moving out into the bay, and that Pat was standing by the engine +whirling the fly-wheel. On the shore were a score of Filipinos, standing +with guns turned toward the boat. + +The boys saw Ned and Frank spring forward, saw them hesitate an instant, +and then drop to the ground. The _Manhattan_ swung out into the bay with +engines snapping and propeller churning the smooth waters. + +"Whoop--ee!" shouted Pat from the deck. + +"Got her off all right!" shouted Jimmie. "Nobody hurt!" + +"Straight to the Northwest," shouted Ned, "and keep your rockets going!" + +"I wish we had been able to get on board," Frank said, regretfully, as +the _Manhattan_ showed a clean pair of heels out of the bay. "I saw Jack +on her." + +"The boys on board have their instructions," Ned said, "and now we may +as well be getting out of range of these little brown men! If Pat and +the others hadn't been on their guard the boat would have been +captured." + +The moon was rising now, almost at full, and brought the natives, +standing on the beach, out in full relief. They were well armed, and +seemed very angry at the turn matters had taken. They had evidently been +sent out to capture the boat, and were not pleased at the report they +would now be obliged to make. + +They stood looking out at the fast receding boat for only a moment +before opening fire on her. Directly, however, the _Manhattan_ was out +of range, and then they turned their attention to Ned's party, which, +being hidden by the thicket, might not have been discovered at that time +only for the instructions shouted out by Ned as the boat slid away. + +Knowing that he would be between two fires if a battle opened, Ned made +no show of resistance when the natives approached him with leveled guns. +There was a great bustle between the Tusks now, showing that the cargo +of the schooner, whatever it was, was being landed, and it was natural +to suppose that there existed an understanding between the crew and the +men on the island. + +"Don't try to shoot!" a voice said in good English. "My men have you +covered." + +"Who are you?" asked Ned, not much surprised, after what had taken +place, to find the party officered by an American. + +"An officer in the United States army," was the unexpected reply. + +"Then what are you doing all this shooting for?" demanded Frank. "Why +did you molest the _Manhattan_, here on government service?" + +"We'll see about the service she is on later," replied the officer. +"Beat it for the harbor, all of you." + +When the party reached the Tusks the crew of the schooner was busy +unloading long pine boxes which looked as if they contained shovels and +hoes, and seemed to be very heavy. The second vessel, the one which had +been observed in the north, lay close in. + +"Where's the officer in charge?" asked Ned, as they approached a group +standing at the head of the harbor. + +The officer who had captured the boys pointed out a tall, rather +fine-looking man who was standing, pencil and paper in hand, checking +off the boxes as they crashed down on the beach. + +"There he is," was the information given. "Lieutenant Carstens, and a +mighty good man at that!" + +The Filipino boy stepped forward, as if anticipating a friendly greeting +and then drew back in confusion. Lieutenant Carstens had looked him +fairly in the face and had not recognized him. + +Ned did not step forward to present his side of the case to the man +pointed out to him, for there was no need to do so. The man was the one +he had met in the tea house in Yokohama, in the Street of a Thousand +Steps. + +"Go on and give him a talk," Frank said, as Ned drew back. + +"There is not a bit of use," Ned replied. "The man is a crook, and is +not acting for the government here." + +"Then why these vessels?" asked Frank. "He must be a good deal of a wise +crook if be sails about with a fleet like that." + +"I rather think he is a good deal of a wise crook," Ned replied. "He's +the man whom Jimmie saw mixing with the rebel chiefs." + +"But look here," Frank insisted, "look at the blue coats unloading the +boxes. They are in the service, for sure. This Lieutenant Carstens may +be a crook, but he has a command in the United States navy, all right." + +One of the men who was assisting the Lieutenant in the tally now called +his attention to the prisoners and the Filipino boy standing by their +side. He listened for a moment to what was said to him, then motioned +for the Filipino boy to approach. The two talked for a moment in +Spanish, and then the boy, evidently much against his will, was sent on +board the ship. + +In a few moments the Lieutenant turned to Ned, a smile of victory on his +lips. + +"Well," he said, "your career as a pirate has been brought to a sudden +close." + +"What do you mean by that?" demanded Ned. + +The question was a natural one, but was entirely unnecessary, for the +boy knew what was meant--knew on what desperate chance the lives of +himself and his friends rested. + +"I mean," answered the Lieutenant, "that you are under arrest for piracy +on the high seas. Also for deliberate murder. Also for the larceny of +the _Manhattan_ from Manila." + +"Very well," Ned replied, coolly, "take me back to Manila for trial. I +am willing to go with you." + +"We don't take pirates back to Manila for trial," was the sneering +reply. "We give them a hearing and shoot them down on the spot. I'll +attend to your case directly." + +"You've got your nerve!" cried Frank. + +The Lieutenant turned with a snarl and pointed the end of his pencil +toward the two boys. + +"Put them in irons," he said. "We'll give them a drum-head when we get +the goods out of the _Clara_ and will shoot them at midnight." + +The boys made no resistance. That would have been useless, for there +were twenty to one against them. + +"And," continued the officer, "send for the relatives of the natives +this man Nestor murdered on Banta Isle. We'll have them for witnesses." + +"They attacked me," Ned said, in a second sorry that he had spoken at +all. + +"They were ordered to recover the _Manhattan_, property stolen from the +government," was the reply, "and you resisted them. Put a stick in his +mouth, Ben, if he talks any more." + +Ben, a muscular, scar-faced fellow of thirty, stepped forward and took a +seat on the rock near the captives. He had the mild, soft eyes of a +student of theology and the square jaw and hard hands of a prize +fighter. + +"You're to keep your face closed--see?" he said, nudging Ned in the side +with an elbow. "You're to keep your clapper tied," he went on, "or I'll +tie it up for you. And how in the name of the Seven Seas did you ever +get in such a scrape, Ned Nestor?" + +The last words were spoken very softly, but before that Ned had +recognized the man as one he had known and liked on the water front in +New York. + +"You're in a bad box," Ben went on, "for that slob means business." + +"There's just one chance for us," Ned whispered. "If the rockets are all +right, and the gunboat is not too far away to see the signals!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +THE FLARE OF A ROCKET. + + +Ben looked at Ned in astonishment. + +"You never got the _Manhattan_ away, did you?" he asked. + +"The boys got it away," replied Ned. + +The sailor remained silent for a moment, his face turned away from the +man he was supposed to be watching. When he spoke it was in a very low +tone, with little movement of the lips, and with his face still turned +toward the lieutenant. + +"You should have gone with it," he said. + +Ned did not reply. He had, at the last moment, made a rush for the boat, +but had been kept away from her by the natives. + +"Carstens has been after you for a long time," the sailor went on. "He +got his orders at Manila." + +"What was he doing on the island with the rebels?" asked Ned. + +"I'm sure I don't know," was the whispered reply. "There's something +mighty funny going on here. More mischief, I'm afraid. No one knows what +is in the boxes that are now being unloaded." + +"What does he say they are?" asked Ned. + +"Supplies, to keep the chiefs good-natured." + +"He brought them from Manila?" + +"No, he picked them up over on the China coast." + +"I thought so," Ned answered. + +"Now, what is the answer to that remark," asked Ben. + +"You'll get the answer directly," Ned replied. "Listen to the rattle of +the alleged supplies when a box is thrown down hard!" + +"I was noticing that." + +"Sounds like guns?" asked Ned. + +"Yes, indeed, but why should the government be supplying the dagoes with +guns? We have all we can do to keep them decent when they have no arms +at all." + +"You sailed from Manila with Carstens?" said Ned, putting his statement +in the form of a question. + +"Yes, I left Manila on the _Clara_. He seemed to be all right until +after we picked up the boxes on the China coast. He was a good fellow, +when we left Manila, but he was confined to his cabin for a day and a +night and has been ugly as sin ever since. He came out of the sickness +looking a bit seedy but that ought not to cause him to turn into a +red-handed brute, had it?" + +"He has been acting badly, has he?" asked Ned. + +"As if the very Old Nick was in him," was the reply. "You heard what he +said about a drum-head court martial for you?" the sailor added. + +"Of course." + +"Well, he means it. He's got something against you that doesn't show on +the outside. He'll try you in five minutes and shoot you within the next +ten." + +"That would be murder." + +"Well, he has the authority, under the general instructions regarding +the treatment of pirates," said the sailor. + +"But you know that I'm not a pirate, and so does Carstens," Ned said. +"You know that I came here in the _Manhattan_ without the consent of the +officers at Manila, but you know that I was only defending myself when +those natives were shot." + +"I don't know anything about it," was the discouraging reply. "I've +heard you spoken of as a pirate for the past few days, and the members +of the crew all believe you to be one. If he orders them to shoot you, +they'll do it." + +"Yes, I presume so," Ned said, soberly. + +"What are you going to do about it?" asked the sailor, after a short +pause. + +"The question," Ned replied, "is what are you going to do about it?" + +"I couldn't do a thing if I tried," was the reply. "When Carstens hears +that the _Manhattan_ got away he will be red-headed, and will order the +trial to proceed at once. I'll see what I can do with some of the men I +know well, but the chances are that I'll only get myself into trouble +without doing you any good." + +"All you can do," Ned said, "is to delay the trial, and the execution, +if it comes to that." + +The officer who had made the arrest, after failing to seize the boat, +now approached the Lieutenant and said something to him in a low tone. + +"What?" the latter almost screamed. "You let the boat get away?" + +"They were too quick for us," was the reply. + +"Too quick for you?" howled the Lieutenant. "Do you know what you've +done? You've ruined all my plans--the plans of the government. +Inefficiency is worse than open disobedience, and you may consider +yourself under arrest!" + +The officer saluted and turned away, a scowl on his face. + +"There is a likely man to talk with first," Ned suggested to the sailor. +"He will doubtless listen to you." + +The Lieutenant now turned sharply toward the prisoners. + +"What's going on there?" he demanded. "What are you talking to that +pirate for?" he added, approaching Ben threateningly. + +"Trying to see what I could get out of him, sir," Ben replied, saluting. + +"Well?" + +"Not a thing!" + +"Then cut it out," said the officer, moving away. + +By this time the boxes were all out of the _Clara_, and the other vessel +was brought up to the Tusks. A great pile of boxes lay in the sandy +beach, and these the Lieutenant counted over for the second time. Then +he beckoned to a dignified looking native and went over the ranks of +boxes with him. + +"Is it correct?" asked Carstens. + +The other nodded and passed a slip of paper to the officer. + +"Yokohama exchange," Ned heard him say. + +"It must be that the native is paying for the guns," Ned said, and Ben, +looking half frightened, half angry, nodded his head. + +The Lieutenant now turned to the unloading of the _Martha_, which was +now at the north Tusk. The hatches were soon lifted and the unloading of +the cargo began. It consisted principally of boxes and barrels. + +"Ammunition," Ned whispered. + +Again the sailor nodded. + +"Nice old government officer he is!" Frank said, in a half whisper. + +"He doesn't act like himself," Ben said, "not since he came out of the +cabin after being ill for a day and a night. And the boxes coming out of +the hold now do not look like the boxes that were put in it on the China +coast. I don't know what to make of it all." + +During all this talk Ned had been listening intently for the shriek of a +rocket, casting his eyes up the mountain side in the hope of seeing the +green light of a signal reflected there. But no reports of rockets in +the sky had come to his ears, and there were no signal lights reflected +on the mountain. + +The moon was well up in the heavens when the unloading of the _Martha_ +was completed. Then the Lieutenant called the dignified native to his +side again, and once more the toll of the boxes was taken and a slip +passed over to the officer. This done, the men went back into the hold +again and began unloading small boxes, evidently containing tinned +provisions. + +"There," whispered Ben, "those are the goods Lieutenant Carstens took on +board at the Chinese port." + +"Then where were the guns and the ammunition taken on?" asked Ned. + +"That is what gets me," was the reply. + +"Tinned goods were also put into the _Clara_?" Ned asked. + +"Yes; and they are going to take them out." + +"Thought they'd get the guns out first," said Ned. "Don't you see," he +added, "that this man Carstens is a traitor! Can't you see that he is +turning guns, undoubtedly stolen from the government, over to the rebel +chiefs, and getting his pay for them?" + +"It looks that way," was the slow reply, "but what am I to do about it?" + +"Talk with some of the men," urged Ned. "If those arms are taken away +from this island by the natives they will be used to murder soldiers and +sailors." + +"I know it," said the sailor, "but what can I do?" + +"Go and talk to the officer he just ordered under arrest." + +"And have him report the conversation in order to get back into the good +graces of the Lieutenant!" said Ben. "I'm not quite so green as that." + +"What sort of a reputation does this man Carstens bear in army circles?" +asked Ned, presently, seeing that it was of no use to argue with the +sailor, who was afraid of being brought into trouble if he tried to aid +the boy. + +"First-class," was the reply. "He is known as a brave and dependable +officer." + +"And any action he might take here would be endorsed at Manila?" + +"Yes; I think so." + +"Then," Ned said, grimly, "if the _Manhattan_ doesn't get within +speaking distance of the gunboat very soon there will be a couple of +funerals on this island." + +"I am afraid you are right," said Ben. "If I could do anything for you I +would, but--" + +"Stop that clatter there!" shouted Carstens, pointing the end of his +pencil toward Ned. "Didn't I tell you to put a stick in his mouth if he +opened it again?" + +Ben saluted and said that he was trying to get a confession out of the +prisoner, and the Lieutenant turned back to the work of tallying the +tinned goods. It was quite evident that he did not intend to leave that +important duty to any subordinate. + +Ned knew that he was in the tightest hole his love for detective work +had ever fitted him into. He knew that the Lieutenant suspected him, and +would not hesitate to order him shot after a mock trial. He had little +doubt that the officer had, after his return from Yokohama, managed to +poison the minds of the officers at Manila against him. That was why, he +thought, he had been ordered by Major John Ross to remain at Manila +until instructions could be received from Washington. + +He understood that Carstens might murder him there at will and so close +his mouth forever. After the murder there would be no one to tell of the +secret meetings on the islands where the rebel chiefs were assembled, no +one to tell of the murder of Brown at the Yokohama tea house, no one to +tell of the arms unloaded there and turned over to the Filipinos--unless +the sailors should take it into their heads to investigate the long +boxes and take their lives in their hands by reporting their +discoveries. + +Lieutenant Carstens certainly had everything to his taste there, and Ned +was of the opinion that he would not be very long in exercising his +authority to the limit. While the boy was thinking over the situation, +trying to find some way out of the peril he was in, a sleepy-looking +young man came out of the cabin of the _Clara_ and stepped ashore. He +was neatly dressed, with a handsome face and alert figure. Lieutenant +Carstens bowed to him as he approached the place where he stood and +pointed to the prisoners. + +"Do you know who that is?" whispered Ned to the sailor. + +"No," was the reply, "except that he is the son of a prominent +politician in the United States." + +Ned did not need to ask another question then. Jimmie had described the +senator's son, and Ned knew that the young man who had held possession +of the treaty box was there, in conference with the Lieutenant. + +"I guess," the boy mused, "they've got the top hand. The Lieutenant has +his military authority, and also has the senator's son here to swear to +anything he asks him to!" + +"You should have made a getaway in the _Manhattan_," Ben said, in a +moment. + +"Then I wouldn't have seen the unloading of the arms," Ned answered. + +Ben arose and stood yawning by the side of his prisoner. The Lieutenant +and the senator's son approached and stood for a moment looking down on +the two captives. + +"Why not call the drum-head now?" asked the senator's son. "It will help +to pass a couple of hours which might otherwise be dull." + +"Call it, then," said the officer. "The sooner it is over the better." + +Ned looked up to the mountain as one looks to a friend for assistance +and cheer when things are going hard, and the mountain did not +disappoint him. For there, high up, was the green light of a distant +rocket. + +The _Manhattan_ had found the gunboat and was using the signals. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE MAN BEHIND THE DOOR. + + +It was a second later that the puff of the exploding rocket reached the +ears of those gathered about the boxes on the island, for sound does not +travel as rapidly as light. When it came, Lieutenant Carstens made a +dash for the side of the mountain and began the ascent. After ten +anxious minutes he was back again with a malevolent grin on his face. + +"The gunboat has captured the _Manhattan_," he said, facing Ned. + +Ned made no reply, for he was not a little puzzled at the remark. It +indicated that the speaker believed that he had as complete control over +the actions of those on the gunboat as he had over the conduct of those +on board the _Clara_ and the _Martha_. If this was true, there was +nothing more to hope for. The gunboat would bring Pat, Jack, and Jimmie +back as prisoners, and the drum-head would deal with five prisoners +instead of two. + +The Lieutenant now dispatched a man to the shelf of rock on the mountain +which Ned had previously occupied, instructing him to report the +progress of the gunboat, supposed to be bringing in her prize. From time +to time the watchman called out that the two boats were rapidly nearing +the harbor, and Ned listened to the reports with varying emotions. Now +he was certain that the officer in charge of the gunboat would +understand the situation; now he was almost sure that the officer and +Carstens had had an understanding with each other from the first. + +Two chiefs, evidently men of distinction among the native tribes, now +approached the Lieutenant and spoke to him in Spanish. After replying +Carstens turned to the son of the senator. + +"Clem," he said, "perhaps you would better bring the box from the cabin. +These men are satisfied with the goods they have received, and are ready +to sign." + +And so the treaty was to be executed there--after the receipt of +sufficient arms and ammunition to make the revolt against the government +formidable. Ned saw the craft with which the game had been played, and +wondered if the officer who was coming on the gunboat could be induced +to make an examination of the boxes on the beach and the box about to be +brought from the cabin. + +If he could, that would end the trouble so far as Ned and his companions +were involved in it. If he stood hand-in-glove with Carstens, however, +he would pretend to doubt the statements offered by the prisoners and +refuse to make any investigation at all. In this case, there was likely +to be murder done before morning. + +"Gunboat rounding the point!" called the lookout. + +The critical moment was near at hand, and Frank and Ned looked into each +other's faces with apprehension in their eyes. Still, there was no +weakening, no outward sign of the mental commotion within. + +Presently the gunboat rounded the point to the north and slid into the +harbor between the Tusks, followed closely by the _Manhattan_. Ned saw +that the boys were still on the _Manhattan_, but that two men in uniform +were there with them. It looked to him as if the lads had been placed +under arrest, for they did not appear as jubilant as they would +doubtless have looked if their story had been taken at its full face +value. + +Lieutenant Carstens appeared to be astonished and decidedly out of +temper when the commander of the gunboat stepped out on the north Tusk. +He was nervous, too, and cursed roundly at one of the men who crossed +his path as he advanced to meet the officer. The three boys, who did not +now act like prisoners, flocked off the _Manhattan_ and gathered around +Ned and Frank. Their faces, however, still showed anxiety rather than +joy at the success of their efforts to bring the gunboat to the island. + +"I presume you have your instructions regarding the _Manhattan_ and her +crew?" Lieutenant Carstens said, after the formalities had been gone +through with. + +"I understand that the boys took the boat out without permission," was +the reply. "I am ordered to return her to Manila and to place the boys +under arrest." + +This was encouraging, for Ned knew that they would be safer under the +guard of the captain of the gunboat than that of Carstens. Everything +could be explained if they were taken back to Manila, and not shot like +dogs, without a trial. + +"Since leaving Manila," Carstens went on, "they have attacked several +native settlements and murdered several persons. I already have them +under arrest for piracy." + +"What is the proposition?" asked the other. + +"In my judgment they should be tried here, and, if convicted, executed +at the scene of their latest crime." + +"I protest against that," said the other. + +"See here, Curtis," Carstens said, roughly, "these fellows are my +prisoners, and I am here with special orders. That will be all." + +"Hardly all," was the cool reply, "for I have my gunboat in the harbor." + +Encouraged by this statement, Ned stepped forward and raised his bound +hands. + +"May I speak a word?" he asked. + +"Certainly not!" said Carstens. + +"Go ahead!" the captain of the gunboat, Frederick Curtis, said. +"George," he added, addressing an officer, "go to the boat and train her +guns on this delightful party." + +Carstens turned deadly pale but smiled, and saluted. + +"I'm sure you will do nothing rash," he said. + +"I shall not overstep my instructions," was the reply. "What have you to +say?" he continued, facing Ned. + +"I want a few words with you in private," was the reply. + +"I protest!" shouted the Lieutenant. + +"Best speak here," was the decision of the captain. + +At this moment the senator's son made his appearance on the Tusk with a +steel box under his arm. He advanced quickly to the group and passed the +box to Lieutenant Carstens. + +"First," Ned began, "I ask you, Captain Curtis, to take charge of the +box just given to Lieutenant Carstens." + +Captain Curtis extended his hand for the box, but the Lieutenant drew +back. + +"This is unusual," the lieutenant said, "irregular and discourteous." + +"I waive the point for the present," Captain Curtis said, "but I insist +that the box shall not leave your hands until it passes into mine." + +"Next," Ned went on, encouraged by the words and manner of Captain +Curtis, "I want you to have the cabin of the _Clara_ searched." + +Lieutenant Carstens approached the speaker in a threatening manner, but +Curtis stepped in front of him. + +"Why shouldn't the cabin of the _Clara_ be searched?" the latter +demanded. + +"You shall pay for this indignity!" Carstens roared, turning away from +the group, with the box still under his arm. Ned pointed to the box, and +Captain Curtis stopped him. + +"I want that box," he said, calmly. + +Lieutenant Carstens hastened his steps and lifted the steel box in his +hands, as if about to toss it into the sea. Before he could execute his +purpose, however, the box was seized by the Captain. + +"If you wish to assist in the search of the cabin," Captain Curtis said, +"we will go there together. Come along, Nestor," he added, turning to +Ned and cutting the cord which held his wrists. "You suggested the move, +and you shall see what is discovered in the search." + +The Lieutenant moved along with the others, but paused at the head of +the stairway leading down into the little stern cabin. + +"I protest against this!" he roared, his face bloodless with passion or +fright. + +"By the way," Captain Curtis said, lifting the steel box high in the +air, "this appears to be quite heavy. Suppose we open it here?" + +"There is no key," Carstens replied. + +Ned held up the odd-shaped key he had found on the island first visited. + +"I think I can open it," he said, "but you'll find that Carstens has a +key if you'll take a look through his clothes." + +"Will you surrender the key?" asked Captain Curtis of the Lieutenant. + +"The boy lies!" thundered Carstens. "I have no key." + +"What does the box contain?" asked the Captain. + +"I don't exactly know," Ned replied, "but it is my opinion that it +contains a treaty pledging certain tribes to unite in rebellion against +the United States provided they are supplied with guns and ammunition." + +"Your opinion is of little account!" gritted the Lieutenant. + +"And I believe," Ned went on, "that other papers are in the box--papers +giving a history of the plot, also papers stolen from the government. +Anyway, if you say so, Captain, I'll open the box with my key and we'll +soon find out." + +"Perhaps we would better retire to the cabin," suggested Captain Curtis, +noting the curious faces gathering about. "We can settle the whole +matter there." + +Lieutenant Carstens would not have entered the cabin if one of the +officers of the gunboat had not crowded him down the stairway. + +"This is an outrage!" he shouted. + +The senator's son now came hastily down the steps, his face red with +rage, his fingers working convulsively, as if already playing about the +throat of an enemy. + +"That box is mine!" he cried. "I demand that it be returned to me +unopened. I am the son of a United States senator." + +"If what I suspect is true," Ned said, "you will need all the political +pull a member of the senate has in order to keep yourself out of the +penitentiary." + +"Put that boy out of this cabin!" snarled the young man. "This is my +private room. I paid for its use during the cruise." + +Ned whispered a few words to the Captain, and the latter turned with a +smile to a door opening at the rear of the little room where the excited +group stood. + +"Well," he said, "there is a question here as to whether the box +contains any treasonable documents. If the box belongs to you, open it +and we'll see if the charge is true or false. If it is false the box +shall be returned to you." + +"I have lost my key," was the reply. + +"How long ago?" asked Ned. + +The young man turned a supercilious face on the boy, but answered: + +"Several days ago. What is it to you?" + +"Where were you when you first missed it?" Ned persisted. + +"That does not concern you," was the reply. + +"If you lost it in Captain Godwin's station," Ned said, with a smile, "I +presume I have it." + +He held up the key he had found on the river bank, among the bushes, on +the morning following the abduction of Lieutenant Rowe, and the other +lunged for it. + +"Never mind!" Ned laughed, dodging away, "I don't care to part with the +key just now. After the investigation of the box is over you may have +it." + +"Unlock the box," ordered the Captain. + +Ned stepped forward with his key, but was brought to a stop by a beating +on the door of the rear cabin. + +"I forgot," the boy said, "and the man in there doubtless desires his +liberty. If some of you will unlock the door you will find the man the +government sent away in charge of this expedition." + +"What do you mean?" asked the Captain, while Carstens sank back in his +chair with a groan. + +"I think," Ned replied, "that you will find the real Lieutenant Carstens +on the other side of that door." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +BOY SCOUTS UNEARTH PLOT. + + +The door was opened instantly, and a man in the uniform of a lieutenant +in the United States Navy, stepped forth. He was pale and haggard, and +there was a bandage about his head, but his eyes were clear and bright. +Even in his emaciated condition his resemblance to the man crouching in +his chair was striking. + +There was a silence in the cabin for an instant as the man stepped +forth. Surprise was depicted on every face except those of Ned and +Captain Curtis. + +"You see I was right," Ned said. + +"You are Lieutenant Carstens?" asked the Captain. + +"I am," was the slow reply, "and I ask that the traitor cowering in the +chair be placed under arrest." + +"That has already been done," the Captain said. "How long have you been +confined in the cabin?" + +"Several days," was the reply, "ever since the first day out, and each +day seemed an eternity of years, for I knew that a treasonable scheme +was afoot. If you will open that steel box," he added, "you will find +the proof of my words." + +"So they tried to corrupt you, did they?" asked Ned, applying the key to +the box. + +"Indeed they did," was the reply, "and failing, they determined to take +my life. Why they delayed doing so is more than I can understand." + +"Perhaps it may be well to use the key held by this man Keene, who has +been personating me for so many days," Lieutenant Carstens said. + +"I know nothing about the box or its contents!" Keene shouted. "It was +given to me by the senator's son, and now I command you to restore it to +him as I received it, unopened." + +Captain Curtis raised his hand and three men sprang upon Keene, who +struggled violently for a moment and then dropped back, inert and almost +lifeless. A search of his pockets revealed a key which was the exact +duplicate of the one in the possession of Ned, and with this the steel +box was opened. + +Captain Curtis took a sheaf of papers from it and handed them to Ned. + +"See if your guess had any merit," he said, with a laugh. + +"Here," Ned began, separating the papers one by one, "is a treaty signed +by many native chiefs. Under its provisions, a thousand islands in the +Philippine group would have been in open revolt within a week." + +"This is all news to me!" gasped the senator's son, pale and frightened. + +"And yet you claimed the box!" Ned said. + +"But only as a piece of property placed in my possession as a sacred +charge," the young man answered. "I didn't know what it contained. This +man Keene, who has been posing as Lieutenant Carstens, alone knew what +was in the box." + +"That is false!" shouted Keene, "for you wrote the treaty, and witnessed +the signing of it. It was all done in the interest of that gigantic +corporation of which your very honorable father is the head!" + +"Are you ready to tell the truth at last?" asked the Captain. + +"Yes," answered Keene, "I'll tell all I know about it. I was poor and in +disgrace in army circles, and this senator offered me more than I could +refuse. That is all there is to it. I'll tell the truth, fast enough." + +"You're a fool!" shouted the senator's son. "Who will believe what you +say? As you said a moment ago, you are in disgrace in army circles now, +having been cashiered for cheating at cards. No officer would take your +word, or your oath, for that matter." + +"And he," Keene faltered, pointing a shaking finger at the young man, +"was sent out here to pay me the price of my treachery and to see that I +delivered the goods!" + +"It is false!" the young man replied. "All a lie! Wait until you hear +from Washington! Then you'll see who is a traitor!" + +"And this," Ned went on, holding up another paper, "is the order which +followed Lieutenant Rowe to Captain Godwin's headquarters. Why they kept +it, I do not know, but keep it they did." + +"Read it," commanded the Captain. + +"It orders Lieutenant Rowe," the boy summarized, "to arrest Tag, Captain +Godwin's servant, and half a dozen other Filipinos at Godwin's +headquarters and place them in irons. It informs Lieutenant Rowe that he +must remain at Godwin's quarters until further instructions are sent to +him." + +"That paper," Keene said, "was retained to prove to the native chiefs +what difficulties we, their friends, were encountering in trying to +assist them in building up a confederacy of their own." + +"It seems to me that there is nothing more to say about this matter," +Ned said. "We boys came to the Philippines to assist the government in +unearthing this plot and bringing the leaders to punishment, and there +seems to be nothing more to be done." + +"But I don't quite understand it yet," Captain Curtis said. "How did you +know that this box contained the treaty? How did you know that Keene was +personating Lieutenant Carstens?" + +"This man Keene," Ned laughed, "played his hand awkwardly. Through spies +in the offices at Manila, doubtless, he learned that the treachery of +the Filipinos at Godwin's island had been discovered. He knew that the +government would look there first, and determined to block the +investigation until he could accomplish what he had set out to do and +get his blood money." + +Keene frowned up from his chair at the boy, but said nothing. The +senator's son smiled weakly and kept his eyes on the floor. + +"Go on!" the Captain said, greatly interested. + +"Lieutenant Rowe was detailed to investigate the matter, and ordered to +the Godwin island. If the isle has another name I have never learned of +the fact." + +"It is called Penalty Island," smiled the Captain, "because the man sent +there is supposed to be given the detail for some oversight of duty. +However, in the case of Captain Godwin, I do not think this holds good." + +"After the Lieutenant left for Penalty Island, then," Ned went on, +"Keene discovered what was going on and feared that Tag and his fellows, +if arrested, would snitch, as the boys have it. Then the messenger was +sent after Rowe with more definite instructions. That is, he was given +more positive instructions and sent out in haste. On the way to Penalty +Island the instructions were stolen and another paper substituted. + +"While the original order required Rowe to arrest Tag and his fellow +conspirators, the false one required the Lieutenant to return at once to +Manila. This would indeed have blocked the investigation and given Keene +and his confederates time in which to complete their work of organizing +the tribes. + +"But the messenger knew what the papers he had been given contained, and +when they were read by the Lieutenant--exactly opposite to the +instructions given him--there was a pretty row. He informed Rowe of the +substitution and advised him not to obey the orders delivered. + +"Tag and his men, clustered about the windows and porch of the nipa hut, +heard what was going on and decided to get rid of Lieutenant Rowe and +his party by assassination. This plan was not carried out because this +young man Clem, whom we know only as the senator's son, arrived with a +party of Americans and Filipinos. + +"This man Keene might have been with the party, but I'm not sure of +that. I don't know the date when he left Manila, or when he took charge +of the _Clara_ as Lieutenant Carstens." + +"I was not there!" Keene gritted out. + +"Oh, yes, you were!" insisted the senator's son. "You were in command of +the _Clara_ at that time, with Lieutenant Carstens locked up in his +cabin." + +"That is a falsehood," Keene said, turning to Ned. "I was there at +Penalty Island, but I was not at that time in command of the _Clara_." + +"And only for me," Clem went on, "the Lieutenant and his men would have +been shot instead of being taken prisoners." + +Keene settled back into his chair without replying to this. + +"Why did you go to Yokohama?" asked Ned. + +"So you recognized me?" growled Keene. "You knew me when you saw me in +the tea house? Well, I went there to kill Brown!" + +The assertion was made so savagely, so recklessly, that the listeners +gazed at the speaker in wonder. + +"Brown," continued Keene, "was blackmailing me. He was at Penalty Island +and was threatening to reveal what he knew unless I gave him a large sum +of money. He went to Japan and I followed and caused him to be killed." + +"And then you went back to Manila and went aboard the _Clara_?" asked +Ned. + +"Yes; and came down to witness the signing of the treaty." + +"Where did you get the guns?" asked Ned. + +Captain Curtis gave a quick start at the question. + +"The guns?" he asked. "What guns?" + +"The guns which were unloaded here to-night," was the reply, "and turned +over to the chiefs. If you will look through Keene's pockets again you +will find drafts in payment for them." + +"Where did you get the guns?" demanded the Captain. + +"Stole them from the government!" was the reply. "We caused them to be +loaded on board at Manila, before Carstens went aboard. He never knew +they were in the hold. We were to pick up a lot of tinned provisions on +the China coast--left there by a wrecked supply boat--and carry them to +natives supposed to be on the verge of starvation. I took Carstens' +place just before we reached the place where the tinned goods were. What +I want to know is this," he added. "How did you learn so much about what +we were doing, and intended to do?" + +"This young man," pointing to Clem, "had a battle with one of the men at +the nipa hut," was the reply. "He was not so strong as his opponent, and +was dragged about the floor. If you will look at his heels you will see +three large nails protruding from the right one. I saw them when he +first came out of the cabin, when he lifted his shoe to strike a match +for his cigarette. + +"During this struggle his right hand was injured a bit, cut so that the +blood ran from the wound. Now, after getting the prisoners to the canoe, +he opened the treaty box in order to place therein the original +instructions given to the messenger. If you will look at the paper you +will observe a slight smear of blood. + +"When he opened the box he took from it a very rough draft of the treaty +and threw it away, after burning it about half up. I found what was left +of it, bearing his mark, the bloody smear, and so learned what was in +the box--beyond all reasonable doubt. He lost his key there, and I found +it. The other key was in the possession of Keene, as you know." + +"But why did you go to Yokohama?" asked Keene. + +"I followed Brown there. At least I followed you and him to Manila. +There you both disappeared, and I was told that Brown had gone to +Yokohama. Do you remember of having trouble with him in a saloon at +Manila, and threatening him? Well, I found that out, and I found out +that you had been having trouble with him ever since returning to the +city. + +"It was easy to get his description, and so I followed him to Yokohama, +believing that I could get his confession. He fled to Japan because of +his fear of you, I take it?" + +"He went to Japan because I promised to meet him there and give him a +large sum of money," was the sullen reply. "I went there to kill him!" + +"And then you got the _Clara_, and circulated about the islands in her +launch, and conferred with the native chiefs. I frightened you away from +a couple of the conferences, as you know. You were betraying your +country, and trying to place the crime on the hands of Lieutenant +Carstens!" + +"I should have succeeded, and got away with a fortune only for you!" +growled the fellow. "Well," he added, "it is all in the game. I lost out +and you won out. Good luck to you!" + +They were too late to stop the sudden lifting of the hand to the mouth, +and when they lifted him from the floor of the cabin he was dead. The +senator's son stood over the body for a moment and turned to Captain +Curtis. + +"You know all about it now," he said. "If I am under arrest, take me to +Manila. I can get bail there." + +The guns were reloaded on the _Clara_, the ammunition on the _Martha_, +and the ships sailed at once for Manila, with half a dozen native chiefs +who had come to receive the arms locked up in the cabin formerly +occupied by Lieutenant Carstens. The removal of the arms and the capture +of the leaders brought the conspiracy to a close and the matter was +hushed up. Tag and his companions were arrested and punished. + +The young man who claimed to be the son of a senator pleaded guilty to +receiving stolen arms, stolen from the government, and was sentenced to +a long term in a federal prison. When it was all over, after Major John +Ross had condescendingly admitted the great value of Ned's services, +after the government had paid the boy a large sum for his work, the five +lads, Ned, Frank, Jack, Jimmie and Pat, arranged to spend a month among +the islands in the _Manhattan_. + +"Bounding from isle to isle!" Jack cried. "Lying in the boat when you +don't know whether the sea is the sky or the sky is the sea, both being +so blue!" + +"Well," Jimmie said, "I'll go along to see that you don't get captured +again." + +"I'd like to know whatever became of that man French," Ned said, +laughing. + +"Oh, he ducked," Frank said. "I heard Captain Curtis asking about him +last night. He was just a paid thief, and jumped his parole." + +"And we'll take Pat along," Jack said, "to leave signs in grass and send +up smoke signals of distress. How did you get the two columns to +working, Pat?" he added. + +"The natives are lazy and didn't like to work, so I offered to bring the +wood for them and build a fire. Well, I built two fires, as you know, +and they suspected something and tied me up again." + +"You're a handy Irishman, all right!" laughed Jack. "What have you done +with the Filipino Boy Scout? I saw him with you last night!". + +"He's going back to Washington," was the reply. "We may meet him over +there." + +On the following morning the boys would have been away in the +_Manhattan_, but that night Captain Curtis visited them and left a +sealed envelope with Ned. + +"You are to open that at Portland, Oregon," he said. + +Ned did not look altogether pleased when he read the papers contained in +the sealed envelope. + +"There's going to be trouble up in the Northwest," he said, "and we're +going there on government service. And we're going to have aeroplanes! +Think of it!" + +There was a shout, and Ned was almost buried under a collection of legs +and arms. + +"Whoop--ee!" cried Jack. "Me for the aeroplanes!" + + + +THE END. + + +The story of the Boy Scouts' adventures in the Northwest will be found +in the next book of the series, "Boy Scouts in the Northwest, or, +Fighting Forest Fires." Chicago, M. A. Donohue & Co.. publishers. + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +Other Books by M. A. DONOHUE& CO. + + +701-727 S. Dearborn Street, +CHICAGO + +_ASK YOUR BOOKSELLER FOR_ THE DONOHUE COMPLETE EDITIONS and you will +get the best for the least money + + + + +Boy Scouts _SERIES_ + + +EVERY BOY AND GIRL IN THE LAND WILL WANT TO READ THESE INTERESTING AND +INSTRUCTIVE BOOKS + +WRITTEN BY That Great Nature Authority and Eminent Scout Master G. +HARVEY RALPHSON of the Black Bear Patrol. + + Boy Scouts in Mexico; or, On Guard with Uncle Sam + + Boy Scouts in the Canal Zone; or, The Plot Against Uncle Sam + + Boy Scouts in the Philippines; or, The Key to the Treaty + + Boy Scouts in the Northwest; or, Fighting Forest Fires + + Boy Scouts in a Motor Boat; or, Adventures on the Columbia River + + Boy Scouts in an Airship; or, The Warning from the Sky + + Boy Scouts in a Submarine; or, Searching An Ocean Floor + + Boy Scouts on Motor Cycles; or, With the Flying Squadron + + + + +Alger Series For Boys + + +The public and popular verdict for many years has approved of the Alger +series of books as among the most wholesome of all stories for boys. + + Adrift in New York + + Andy Gordon + + Andy Grant's Pluck + + Bob Burton + + Bound to Rise + + Brave and Bold + + Cash Boy, The + + Charlie Codman's Cruise + + Chester Rand + + Cousin's Conspiracy, A + + Do and Dare + + Driven From Home + + Erie Train Boy + + Facing the World + + Five Hundred Dollars + + Frank's Campaign + + Grit; The Young Boatman + + Herbert Carter's Legacy + + Hector's Inheritance + + Helping Himself + + In a New World + + Jack's Word + + Jed, the Poor House Boy + + Joe's Luck + + Julius, the Street Boy + + Making His way + + Mark Mason's Victory + + Only an Irish Boy + + Paul Prescott's Charge + + Paul, the Peddler + + Phil, the Fiddler + + Ralph Raymond's Heir + + Risen from the Ranks + + Sam's Chance + + Shifting for Himself + + Sink or Swim + + Slow and Sure + + Store Boy, The + + Strive and Succeed + + Strong and Steady + + Struggling Upward + + Telegraph Boy, The + + Tin Box, The + + Tom, the Boot Black + + Tony, the Tramp + + Try and Trust + + Wait and Hope + + Walter Sherwood's Probation + + Wren Winter's Triumph + + Young Aerobat + + Young Adventurer, The + + Young Explorer + + Young Miner + + Young Musician + + Young Outlaw + + Young Salesman + + + + +WOODCRAFT _for_ Boy Scouts and Others + + +_By_ OWEN JONES _and_ MARCUS WOODMAN _With a Message to Boy Scouts +_by_ SIR BADEN-POWELL, _Founder of the Boy Scouts' Movement_. + +One of the essential requirements of the Boy Scout training is a +Knowledge of Woodcraft. This necessitates a book embracing all the +subjects and treating on all the topics that a thorough knowledge of +Woodcraft implies. + +This book thoroughly exhausts the subject. It imparts a comprehensive +knowledge of woods from fungus growth to the most stately monarch of the +forest: it treats of the habits and lairs of all the feathered and furry +inhabitants of the woods. Shows how to trail wild animals; how to +identify birds and beasts by their tracks, calls, etc. Tells how to +forecast the weather, and in fact treats on every phase of nature with +which a Boy Scout or any woodman or lover of nature should be familiar. +The authorship guarantees it's authenticity and reliability. +Indispensable to "Boy Scouts" and others. Printed from large clear type +on superior paper. + +Embellished With Over 100 Thumb Nail Illustrations Taken From Life + + + + +Oliver Optic Series + + +For a full generation the youth of America has been reading and +re-reading "Oliver Optic." No genuine boy ever tires of this famous +author who knew just what boys wanted and was always able to supply his +wants. + + All Aboard + + Brave Old Salt + + Boat Club, The + + Fighting Joe + + Haste and Waste + + Hope and Have + + In School and Out + + Little by Little + + Now or Never + + Outward Bound + + Poor and Proud + + Rich and Humble + + Sailor Boy, The + + Soldier Boy, The + + Try Again + + Watch and Wait + + Work and Win + + The Yankee Middy + + The Young Lieutenant + + + + +THRILLING, INTERESTING, INSTRUCTIVE BOOKS + +By HARRY CASTLEMON + + +No boy's library is complete unless it contains all of the books by that +charming, delightful writer of boys' stories of adventure, Harry +Castlemon. + + Boy Trapper, The + + Frank the Young Naturalist + + Frank in the Woods + + Frank on the Lower Mississippi + + Frank on a Gunboat + + Frank Before Vicksburg + + Frank on the Prairie + + Frank at Don Carlos Ranch + + The First Capture + + Struggle for a Fortune, A + + Winged Arrows Medicine + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Boy Scouts in the Philippines, by +G. Harvey Ralphson + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY SCOUTS IN THE PHILIPPINES *** + +***** This file should be named 20208.txt or 20208.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/2/0/20208/ + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +book was produced from scanned images of public domain +material from the Google Print project.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/20208.zip b/20208.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7114167 --- /dev/null +++ b/20208.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ff6b61 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #20208 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/20208) |
